.^^ 

.n^   .^^ 


^>,^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


k£|2^    125 

■so    "^^       ■^■i 

1^  Kk    12.2 

1.8 


1.25  11111.4    mil  1.6 


0^\ 


n.. 


-'^ 


■^  ■  .>>• 


°>  :.> 


'/ 


/A 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  NY.  14580 

(716)  872-4503 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notes/Notes  techniques  et  bibliographiques 


The  Institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
original  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliographicaliy  unique, 
which  may  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checked  below. 


EI 


D 


D 


D 
D 


D 


D 


Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 


I      I    Covers  damaged/ 


Couverture  endommag6e 


Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaur6e  et/ou  pellicul6e 


I      I    Cover  title  missing/ 


Le  litre  de  couverture  manque 


I      I    Coloured  maps/ 


Cartes  gdographiques  en  couleur 

Coloured  ink  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 


I      I    Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 


Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 

Bound  with  other  material/ 
Reli6  avec  d'autres  documents 

Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

La  reliure  serr^e  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  intirieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  tieen  omitted  from  filming/ 
II  se  neut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  ajouties 
iors  d'une  restauration  apparaissent  dans  le  texte, 
mais.  lorsque  cela  6tait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  M6  fiimies. 

Additional  comments:/ 
Commentaires  supplAmentaires: 


L'institut  a  microfiimd  le  meilleur  exemplaire 
qu'il  lui  a  6t6  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exemplaire  qui  sont  peut-dtre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibllographique.  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  reproduite.  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  mithode  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiqu6s  ci-dessous. 


D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 
D 


This  item  is  filmed  ai  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 


Coloured  pages/ 
Pages  de  couleur 

Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommag^es 

Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Pages  restaur6es  et/ou  pelliculdes 

Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 
Pages  d6color6es,  tachetdes  ou  piqudes 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  ddtachdes 

Showthrough/ 
Transparence 

Quality  of  print  varies/ 
Quality  indgale  de  I'impression 

Includes  supplementary  material/ 
Comprend  du  matdriel  suppl^mentaire 

Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  disponible 

Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  ref limed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  une  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  6t6  filmdes  A  nouveau  de  fa9on  d 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


The 
to  t 


Ths 
pos 
oft 
film 


Ori( 
beg 
the 
sior 
oth( 
first 
sior 
or  il 


The 
shal 
TIN 
whi 

Mai 
diff( 
enti 
beg 
righ 
reqi 
mat 


10X 

IbUIII 

Dili  a 

Si    III 

Ilia  a 

14X 

u  lau 

A  ua 

lOUU 

UllUII 

18X 

■  IIUII 

^ua  t< 

i-uao 

BUUB 

22X 

26X 

30X 

y 

12X 

16X 

20X 

24X 

28X 

32X 

The  copy  filmad  here  hat  been  reproduced  thanks 
to  the  generosity  of: 

Library  Division 

Provincial  Archives  of  British  Columbia 


L'exemplaire  film*  fut  reproduit  grAce  A  la 
gAnArositA  de: 

Library  Division 

Provincial  Archives  of  British  Columbia 


The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  keeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate  Ail 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  Isst  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


The  last  recorded  rrame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  — »>  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"}, or  the  symbol  V  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 

Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method; 


Les  images  suivantes  ont  AtA  reproduites  avec  la 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettetA  de  rexemplaire  filmA,  et  en 
conformitA  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 

Les  exempiaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprimAe  sont  filmAs  en  commen^ant 
par  ie  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
derniAre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration,  soit  par  Ie  second 
plat,  salon  Ie  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exempiaires 
originaux  sont  filmAs  en  commengant  par  la 
premiAre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustratioii  et  en  terminant  par 
la  derniAre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 

Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparaitra  sur  la 
derniAre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  Ie 
cas:  Ie  symbols  —^  signifie  "A  SUIVRE",  Ie 
symbole  V  signifie  "FIN". 

Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  Atre 
filmAs  A  des  taux  de  rAduction  diffArents. 
Lorsque  Ie  document  est  trop  grand  pour  Atre 
reproduit  en  un  se  I  clichA,  il  est  filmA  A  partir 
de  Tangle  sup^ri  ,b,.  gauche,  de  gauche  A  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  ban.  ^n  prenant  Ie  nombre 
d'images  nAcessaire.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  mAthode. 


1 

2 

3 

1 

t 

3 

4 

i 

6 

■rarw 


AND  HER 


BY  PKRUlMtok       ., 

p\0  AND  C04ST 

1^.  MINING  LAWS 


PUBLISHING  CO. 


fcOlAN  MINING  LaW^  i^ansas  City.  U.  S.  fl 


m 


^  Vol.  I.  No.  I. 


Quarterly,  $4  per  Yoifts 


■Uv 


I 


•I 


■U^' 


THR 


II 


Territory  of  Alaska. 


A  Brief  Account  of  Its  History  and  Purchase ;  Its  Inhab- 
itantSy  Geogfraphical  Features  and  Resources^ 
witfi  especial  reference  to  the  Gold-Fields 
and  Methods  of  Reaching  Them. 


Compiled  from 

Official  Government  Records  and  the  Latest  and  Most 

Reliable  Sources^ 

By  MAJOR  H.  O.  S.  HEISTAND, 

Assistant  Adjutant-General  U«  S.  Army.     On  duty  in 

the  Division  of  Military  Information,  Adjutant- 

GeneraPs  Office,  War  Department. 


Washingfton,  D.  C,  January  If  f898. 


HUDSON-KIMBERLY  PUBLISHING  CO. 
KANSAS  CITY,  MO. 

1898. 


uni 


■5.- 


:t 


H413 


Copyright,  189«,  by 

HUDSON-KIMBERLY   PUBLISHING   Co 

Kansas  City,  Mo. 


•"-nrnm 


m 


CONTENTS. 

Chapter  I. 
lyocation,  Extent,  Area,  Geographical  Features 9 

Chapter  II. 
History 17 

Chapter  III. 
Acquirement  of  the  Territory 25 

Chapter  IV. 
Climate 35 

Chapter  V. 
Inhabitants,  Population  and  Government 45 

Chapter  VI. 
Resources  and  Industries 59 

Chapter  VII. 
Gold :  Discovery,  Dissemination  and  Product 79 

Chapter  VIII. 
Routes  to  the  Gold  Fields 87 


I  A 


!. 


:j 


CONTENTS. 
Chapter  IX. 


Miners'  Outfits . 


lOI 


Appendix. 

United  States  Mining  Laws,  Canadian  Mining  Laws, 
Etc 


"5 


= 


1  i 


lOI 


,!  p^ 


I^aws, 


"5 


APPENDIX. 

A.  United  States  Mining  Laws 115 

B.  Canadian  Mining  Laws 176 

C.  Glossary 184 

D.  Fourteen  Months'  Supply  of  Provisions  as  stated 

by  Governor  Brady,  of  Alaska 188 

E.  Table  of  Distances 191 

F.  Newspapers  Published  in  Alaska 193 

G.  Postofl&ces  in  Alaska,  November  ist,  1897 194 

H.    Freight    and    Passenger    Rates,    Pacific    Coast 

Steamship  Company's  Steamers 194 


iH. 


BOOKS  AND  DOCUMENTS  CONSULTED. 


I. — Report  on  the  Population,  Industries  and  Re- 
sources of  Alaska  by  Ival  Petroff,  Volume  VIII, 
Tenth  Census  Report. 

2.— Alaska  Handbook  No.  84,  Bureau  of  the  American 
Republics,  August,  1897. 

3. — Military  Reconnaissance  in  Alaska,  Schwatka,  1897. 
(Senate  Ex.  Doc.  No.  2,  2nd  Session  49th  Congress.) 

4.— Reconnaissance  in  Alaska,  1885,  Allen.  (Senate 
Ex.  Doc.  No.  125,  2nd  Session,  49th  Congress.) 


6 


APPENDIX. 


5.— Alaska  ;  Our  Arctic  Province.     Henry  W.   Elliott, 
1886. 

6. — Encyclopaedia  Britannica. 

7.— Official  Guide  to  the   Klondike    Country,    W.   B. 
Conkey  &  Co.,  New  York. 

8.— Chicago  Record's  Book  for  Gold-Seekers,  Chicago 
Record,  1897. 

9.— Klondike,  C  irles  A.  Bramble,  1897. 

10. — Klondike,  Miners'  New  Publishing  Co.,  1897. 

II.— The  Gold- Fields  of  the  Klondike,  John  W. 
Leonard,  1897. 

12.— Klondike  Gold-Fields,  C.  A.  Plempel,  1897. 

13.— Klondike  and  the  Yukon  Country,  L.  A.  Coolidge, 
1897. 

14.— The  Yukon  Gold-Fields,  C.  H.  Lugrin,  1897. 

1 5- — The  Boundary  between  Alaska  and  British  Colum- 
bia. (Senate  Ex.  Doc.  No.  i46,  2nd  Session  50th 
Congress.) 

16.— Report  of  Reconnaissance  in  Alaska,  1885,  by 
Lieutenant  W.  R.  Abercrombie,  United  States 
Army.     (Not  published.) 

17.    Bancroft's  History  of  Alaska. 

18.— Reports  of  Governors  of  Alaska,  Census  Returi;s  of 
1890. 

19.— Reports  of  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy,  1879  to  1896, 
inclusive. 

20.— Reports  and  Records  on  file  in  the  State,  War  and 
Navy  Departmentt.     (Not  Published.) 


\ 


iV.   Elliott, 

ry.    W.   B. 
rs,  Chicago 


APPENDIX.  7 

21. — Boundary  between  Alaska  and  "British  Columbia. 
(Sen.  Ex.  Doc.  No.  146,  2nd  Session  50th  Con- 
gress.) 

22. — Report  of  the  introduction  of  Domesticated  Rein- 
deer into  Alaska,  Sheldon  Jackson.  (Senate  Ex. 
Doc.  No.  70,  53rd  Congress,  and  Session.)  Wash- 
ington, 1894. 

23. — Current  Literature. 


[897. 
John    W. 

97. 

.  Coolidge, 


^97- 

sh  Colum- 
ission  50th 


1885,    by 
;ed  States 


Returiis  of 
79  to  1896, 
,  War  and 


PREFACE  TO  ALASKA  BY  MAJOR  H.  O.  S. 
HEISTAND. 


The  original  of  this  volume  was  prepared  from  the 
information  from  various  sources  in  the  Military  Infor- 
mation Division  of  the  Adjutant  General's  Office,  to- 
gether with  that  collected  from  various  Departments  of 
the  Government.  It  was  later  enlarged,  revised  and 
brought  up  to  date  from  all  sources  of  information  con- 
sidered reliable,  and  its  publication  by  the  writer 
authorized  that  it  might  be  placed  within  the  reach  of  the 
public. 

The  author  makes  grateful  acknowledgment  of  the 
courtesy  of  the  officers  of  the  United  States  Coast  and 
Geodetic  Survey  office,  by  whose  permission  the  excel- 
lent maps  and  most  of  the  photographs  used  as  illustra- 
tions appear ;  and  also  of  valuable  assistance  given  him 
by  Major  Arthur  L,.  Waguer,  Assistant  Adjutant- 
General  United  States  Army,  iii  charge  of  the  Informa- 
tion Division  of  the  Adjutant-General's  Office,  and 
Vleutenant  H.  H.  Whitney,  4th  United  States  Artil- 
lery, on  duty  in  the  same  office. 

Washington,  D.  C,  January  i,  1898. 


[.  o.  s. 


[  from  the 
tary  Infor- 
Office,  to- 
rtments  of 
;vised  and 
ation  con- 
the  writer 
each  of  the 

ent  of  the 
Coast  and 
the  excel- 
as  illustra- 
given  him 
Adjutant- 
:  Informa- 
'ffice,  and 
ites  Artil- 


^M 


!    !. 


I: 


i 


!'! 


ALASKA. 


m^ 


Chapter  I. 


,'fVif)' 


K 
O 

X 

e 

I 
O 


IvOCATION,  EXTENT,  AREA  AND  GEOGRAPH- 
ICAL FEATURES. 


Alaska  lies  in  the  extreme  northwestern  portion  of 
the  continent  of  North  America,  stretching  along  the 
coast,  and  by  its  chain  of  islands  out  into  the  Pacific 
Ocean,  from  the  130th  to  the  187th  meridian  of  longitude 
west  from  Greenwich,  a  t.  atance  of  about  2,300  statute 
miles;  from  north  to  south  it  lies  between  the  50th  and 
71st  parallels  north  latitude,  a  distance  of  about  1,300 
statute  miles.  Its  northern  boundary  is  the  Arctic 
Ocean;  it  is  bounded  on  the  east  by  British  Columbia,  on 
the  south  by  the  Pacific,  and  on  the  west  by  Behring  Sea 
and  the  Arctic  Ocean.  It  has  a  coast  line,  including  its 
islands,  of  over  26,000  miles,  or  about  five-sevenths  of 
the  entire  coast  line  of  the  United  States.  At  Behring 
Strait  the  mainland  of  Alaska  is  but  60  miles  from  the 
mainland  of  Russia,  and  Big  Diomede  Island  (Russian), 
near  the  center  of  the  channel,  makes  a  convenient  half- 
way landing. 

The  western  limit  of  the  territory,  Attn  (Attoo) 
Island,  is  nearly  3,000  (2,943)  wiles  west  of  San  Fran- 
cisco. When  the  fisherman  of  Maine  is  just  spreading 
canvas  for  a  morning  sail,  the  fisherman  of  Attn  is  ar- 
ranging his  hut  for  the  night. 
-2- 


10 


ALASKA. 


Owing  to  the  irregular  shape  of  the  Territory  of 
Alaska,  the  extreme  dimensions  give  but  little  idea  of 
its  area,  which,  according  to  the  latest  reliable  compu- 
tations, is  577,390  statute  square  miles;  an  area  larger 
than  the  entire  territory  of  the  United  States  east  of 
Indiana,  and  twelve  times  the  size  of  the  State  of  New 
York. 

From  the  difference  in  proper  names,  growing  out  of 
native  designations,  those  applied  by  the  Russians,  and 
still  others  in  use  by  Americans,  considerable  confusion 
as  to  geographical  terms  has  resulted,  and  will  continue 
to  exist  until  some  means  of  uniformity  is  established 
and  generally  accepted.  Travelers  should  not  rely  upon 
information  from  any  but  the  most  disinterested  and 
reliable  sources. 

The  country  is  rich  in  geographical  detail.  There 
are  broad  extents  of  morass,  or  swampy  plains  (tundra), 
with  a  dense  growth  of  mosses  and  grasses,  over  a  frozen 
subsoil  and  ice  which  does  not  thaw  to  a  greater  depth 
than  eighteen  inches  below  the  surface;  great  mountain 
ranges,  with  lofty  peaks  and  active  volcanoes;  broad, 
undulating  prairies,  and  ex+ensive  valleys,  through 
which  course  mighty  rivers,  ted  by  the  melting  snows 
and  numerous  lakes  and  springs — these  great  streams, 
with  their  many  tributaries,  form  a  perfect  network  of 
waterways  over  the  surface,  and  constitute  the  arteries 
of  the  scant  trade  and  travel.  Massive  glaciers,  hundreds 
of  feet  in  thickness,  covering  in  some  cases  over  a 
thousand  square  miles  of  territory,  and  loaded  with  mo- 
raine and  vegetation,  slowly  grind  their  way  to  the  sea;* 
the  adjacent  ocean  is  studded  with  islands,  varying  in 
size  from  the  largest — Prince  of  Wales  Island,  having 

*L,teutenant  Abercroinbie  (Report  on' Alaska,  1885). 


T 
i. 


ALASKA. 


11 


J. 


an  area  of  s.cxjg  square  miles — to  mere  points  of  rock 
almost  hidden  at  high  tide,  and  the  main  coast  is  every- 
where indented  with  long  arms  of  the  sea,  reaching  into 
the  depths  of  the  near-by  mountains. 

The  capital  of  the  Territory  is  Sitka,  located  on  the 
west  coast  of  Baranof  Island,  in  latitude  57  degrees  north 
and  longitude  135  degrees  west.  It  was  established  by 
Baranof  in  the  winter  of  17 99- 1800.  The  town  is  about 
1,300  miles  from  San  Francisco,  though  by  the  usual 
vessel  route  the  distance  is  over  1,600  miles.  In  1890 
the  population  was  1,190. 

Juneau,  founded  by  Joseph  Juneau  in  1880,  with  a 
population  in  1890  of  1,250,  is  now  said  to  be  a  progres- 
sive city  of  nearly  5,000  inhabitants,  with  fine  buildings, 
wharves,  waterworks  and  hotels,  electric  lights  and 
amusements  (Guide  to  the  Yukon  Gold  Fields — Wilson). 

Wrangell,  on  Wrangell  Island,  a  village  of  about  300 
souls,  ten  miles  from  the  mouth  of  the  Stikine  River,is 
the  point  of  departure  for  the  gold  fields  by  the  way  of 
the  Stikine  route. 

Douglas  City,  on  Douglas  Island,  with  a  population 
of  about  400,  is  the  location  of  the  great  Treadwell  gold 
mines,  and  what  is  said  to  be  the  largest  quartz  mill  in 
the  world. 

Yakutat,  on  the  bay  of  the  same  name,  has  a  popula- 
tion of  about  300. 

Nucheck,  once  an  important  trading  point,  but  now 
only  a  small  village,  is  on  Hunchinbrook  Island,  50 
miles  from  the  mouth  of  the  Copper  River. 

There  were  formerly  important  trading  points  on  the 
Kenai  Peninsula,  but  of  recent  years  they  have  lost  their 
importance. 

Kadiac  Island  is  the  seat  of  great  Alaskan  industry. 


ml 


m 


.-iff ' 


12 


ALASKA. 


St.  Paul,  in  the  north  of  the  island,  does  a  large  fur 
trade,  and  is  the  seat  of  several  canning  factories,  said  to 
employ  i,ioo  hands.  Karluk,  with  a  population  of 
1,123,  is  said  to  have  the  largest  cannery  in  the  world. 
Other  villages,  almost  equal  in  size,  on  the  island,  are 
Alitak  and  Kadiak,  having  a  combined  population  of 
about  900. 

Afognac,  with  a  population  of  409,  is  on  the  island 
of  the  same  name. 

The  Aleutian  Islands,  being  mild  in  climate,  were 
early  occupied  by  the  Russians,  and  many  settlements 
resulted.  On  Unalaska  Island  there  is  an  important 
point,  Iliuliuk,  having  a  church,  custom  house,  stores 
and  wharves.  Small,  thrifty  villages  of  from  100  to  300 
are  on  Ounga,  Unimak,  Athka  and  the  Pribylof  Islands. 

Port  Chester  is  a  Chimmesyan  Indian  village  of  about 
800  people,  on  Annette  Island.  It  has  a  steam  saw-mill, 
church,  shops,  stores  and  an  Industrial  Home. 

St.  Michael,  on  Norton  Sound,  is  one  of  the  most  im- 
portant points  on  the  coast.  It  was  established  as  a 
Russian  redoubt  in  1835.  The  island  has  an  area  of  51 
square  miles,  all  embraced  within  the  United  States 
Military  Reservation.  Besides  the  military  post  estab- 
lished there  by  the  War  Department  in  October,  1897, 
there  are  two  trading  posts  of  rival  firms,  both  used  as  a 
base  of  supplies  for  the  Upper  Yukon  country  and  the 
Arctic  trade.  There  is  also  a  Russian  church  and  par- 
sonage building.  Swedish  and  Episcopal  Missions  are 
on  the  adjacent  mainland.  In  October,  1897,  there  were 
180  people  on  the  island.* 

At  Port  Clarence,  just  south  of  Behring  Strait, 
there  is  a  fine  harbor,  where  whaling  vessels  lay  up  and 

*Report  of  Commanding  Officer,  Fort  St.  Michael. 


ALASKA. 


13 


wait  for  supplies.  A  village  of  about  500  people,  more 
than  half  of  whom  are  white,  is  located  here,  and  ad- 
jacent to  it  is  a  reindeer  farm.  Point  Hope  (301 — 5 
white),  Cape  Smythe  (246 — 46  white),  Icey  Cape  (57) 
and  Point  Barrow  (152)  are  Arctic  villages.  The  latter 
was  the  point  occupied  by  Captain  P.  H.  Ray,  United 
States  Army,  188 1-3,  in  command  of  the  United  States 
station  of  the  International  Polar  Expedition. 

Nulato  and  Nuklakayat  are  Yukon  trading  posts,  467 
and  568  miles  from  the  sea  (L,ieutenant  Allen).  Ram- 
part City  is  a  new  mining  village  of  about  400  people, 
established  in  the  summer  of  1897,  on  the  Yukon  River, 
100  miles  or  so  above  Nuklakayat. 

Fort  Yukon,  established  by  the  Hudson  Baj-  Com- 
pany in  1847,  on  the  Yukon  River,  nearly  900  (1,300  by 
water)  miles  from  the  sea,  is  just  within  the  Arctic  Cir- 
cle, where,  in  summer,  the  sun  is  visible  for  the  entire 
24  hours.  Here  the  Yukon  River  widens  out  to  several 
miles  in  extent  and  flows  through  many  shallow  chan- 
nels over  the  Yukon  Flats,  making  navigation  slow  and 
difficult  at  low  water. 

Circle  City,  founded  in  1891,  100  miles  above  Fort 
Yukon,  had  a  population  in  1896  of  1,150,  including 
about  40  women.  Missions  are  established  there  and 
hospitals  proposed.  It  is  said  that  many  of  the  inhab- 
itants have  abandoned  the  town,  at  least  temporarily,  to 
go  to  richer  mines. 

Forty- Mile  Post,  near  the  mouth  of  Forty-Mile  Creek, 
was  at  one  time  a  thriving  mining  town — a  true  Mecca 
of  the  North — but  it  is  said  to  have  diminished  in  im- 
portance since  the  drouth  of  1896  and  subsequent  dis- 
covery of  rich  diggings  elsewhere. 

The  principal  rivers  are  the  Yukon  and  its  largest 


w 


A:i 


:  'liil  ■ 


14 


ALASKA. 


two  tributaries,  the  Tanana  and  Koyukak;    Kuskokwin, 
Copper  and  Sushitna. 

The  principal  mountains  are  Mount  I,ogan,  altitude 
19,500  't;  Mt.  St.  Elias,  18,010;  Mt.  Wrangell,  17,500; 
Mt.  -T  nan,  16,600;  Mt.  Drum,  13,300;  Mt.  Sanford, 
13,000;  and  Mt.  Blackburn,  12,500.  The  average  height 
of  the  main  range  is  from  10,000  to  12,000  feet,  with  but 
few  practicable  passes. 

/^ori  Cudahy. — Fort  Cudahy  is  a  trading  establish- 
ment in  British  territory,  on  the  Yukon  River  at  the 
mouth  of  Forty-Mile  Creek,  on  which  there  are  rich 
placer  mines.     There  is  a  saw-mill  in  the  vicinity. 

Dawson  City. — Dawson  City,  the  chief  town  of  the 
Klondike  district,  was  established  in  August,  1896.  It 
is  in  British  territory,  about  50  miles  east  of  the  Alaska 
boundary,  on  the  right  banks  of  the  Yukon  and  Klon- 
dike Rivers,  near  their  junction.  It  is  170  miles  from 
Circle  City;  1,598  miles  from  Seattle,  by  the  way  of  Ju- 
neau, and  4,722  miles  by  way  of  St.  Michael.  It  can  be 
reached  from  Seattle  in  from  35  to  90  days,  according  to 
the  route.  The  townsite  occupies  a  square  of  160  acres, 
owned  by  Mr.  Joseph  I^adue,  formerly  a  resident  of  New 
York  State.  It  is  laid  out  in  regular  streets  and  squares. 
Town  lots  which  sold  for  {{55.00  in  1896  were  worth  from 
$3,000  to  $5,000  this  year  (1897).  All  of  the  houses  are 
constructed  of  logs,  the  logs  selling  for  $3.00  each,  and 
lumber  is  worth  $150.00  per  thousand  feet.  Many  of 
the  inhabitants  live  in  tents.  The  gold  "diggings"  are 
from  12  to  25  miles  distant. 

There  is  a  population  of  from  3,000  to  5,000,  mostly 
citizens  of  the  United  States.  There  are  about  75 
women  and  some  children.  The  Canadian  Government 
has  established  a  post-office  at  Dawson  City,  and  the  mail 
is  carried  once  a  month  by  the  members  of  the  North- 
west Mounted  Police,  a  Canadian  military  force,  also 
charged  with  preserving  order  and  maintaining  the  law. 

There  are  said  to  be  a  few  horses,  but  dogs  are  gen- 
erally used  for  transportation  purposes. 


?;■*» 


t 


ALASKA.  15 

The  climate  is  severe,  and  changes  are  sudden.  There 
is  a  short,  hot  summer,  lasting  from  May  to  September, 
with  practically  no  spring  or  autumn  conditions — leaping 
from  one  extreme  to  the  other.  The  ice  begins  to  break 
up  between  the  i.^c  and  15th  of  May,  and  by  the  last  of 
September  winter  has  begun  again,  the  month  of  Octo- 
ber being  described  as  similar  to  the  month  of  November 
in  the  northern  part  of  the  United  States.  The  mean 
temperature  does  not  vary  much — not  much  more  than 
25  degrees  from  month  to  month.  The  mean  tempera- 
ture is:  Spring,  14  degrees;  summer,  50 degrees;  autumn, 
17  degrees;  winter,  30  degrees,  with  extremes  for  the 
year  running  from  —68  to  +75  or  +100  degrees.  The 
earth  is  frozen  to  the  greatest  depth  yet  excavated  and 
thaws  for  only  eighteen  inches  to  two  feet  during  the 
summer.  The  longest  day  of  the  year,  June  2 2d,  the 
sun  rises  at  1:30  a.  m.,  and  sets  at  10:30  p.  m.,  with  good 
twilight  for  the  rest  of  the  day. 

The  climate  is  healthy,  and  deaths  have  been  very 
few.  Mosquitoes  are  said  to  be  very  troublesome,  and 
so  small  that  they  go  through  the  ordinary  netting. 
Game  is  very  scarce,  so  that  all  food  must  be  transported 
to  the  town  from  some  base  of  supply. 

The  following  prices  give  an  idea  of  the  cost  of  living 
in  Dawson  City  in  the  summer  of  1897,  and  were  con- 
sidered reasonable: 

Flour,*  per  100  pounds $12.00 

Bacon,  per  pound i  50 

Sugar,  brown,  per  pound .20 

Sugar,  granulated,  per  pound .25 

Rice,  per  pound .20 

Condensed  milk,  per  can .60 

Butter,  per  pound i .  50 

Eggs,  per  dozen  5  •  00 

Beans,  per  pound .12^ 

*Since  writing  the  above,  the  scarcity  of  provisions  in  Daw- 
son City  has  caused  the  price  of  flour  to  rise  to  the  almost  pro- 
hibitive price  of  from  |iooto  $125  for  a  50-pound  sack,  and  other 
provisions  in  proportion.  Single  meals  at  restaurants  cost 
from  $3.50  to  $5.00. 


.  m 


•I  .lis 


16 


ALASKA. 


Salt,  per  pound $     .15 

Dried  fruit,  per  pound $  o. 25  to        .35 

Cigars,  each -50 

Tobacco,  per  pound i .  50  to      2 .  00 

Blankets,  per  pair 16.00  to    30.00 

I^inen  shirt 5  •  00 

Underwear,  per  suit 10.00 

Canvas  overalls 2 .  50 

Boots 10 .  00  to    1 2  00 

Suit  of  clothes,  ready  made 30.00  to    50.00 

Fur  overcoat 25.00  to  100.00 

Dogs,  for  sleds 100.00  to  300. 00 

Bread,  per  loaf .50 

lyumber,  per  thousand  feet 100.00  to  200.00 

Meals  at  restaurant,  each i  50 

Wages,  per  day 5.00  to    15.00 

Considerable  business  is  done  in  the  town,  and  the 
place  is  said  to  be  one  of  great  activity.  Gold  passes 
current  for  money  at  $17.00  per  ounce.  There  are 
restaurants,  bakeries,  saloons,  dance  halls,  barber  shop, 
a  bath  establishment,  etc.  At  last  accounts  there  were 
ten  saloons  and  three  restaurants.  Drinks  were  sold  at 
the  uniform  price  of  50  cents  each,  and  in  the  restaurants 
the  $1.50  dinner  was  composed  of  bacon,  beans,  bread, 
coffee,  cheese  and  dried  fruit.  The  dance-hall  is  80x40 
feet,  with  an  orchestra  of  three  pieces.  There  is  also  a 
laundry,  which  charges  25  cents  a  piece  for  its  work. 
Gambling  is  prevalent  among  all  classes,  but  crime  is 
almost  unknown. 

The  Church  of  England  has  a  resident  minister,  and 
other  ministers  are  on  the  wa)'^  to  Dawson  City.  Bijjhop 
Bompas  is  the  head  of  the  diocese,  which  includes  the 
Klondike. 


ALAfiKA. 


17 


Chapter  II. 


HISTORY. 


That  portion  of  the  territory  of  the  United  States 
known  as  Alaska  was,  up  to  the  year  1867,  borne  on  the 
maps  of  the  world  as  Russian  America.  Russia  held  it 
by  right  of  discovery. 

During  the  reign  of  Peter  the  Great  was  organized 
the  first  of  the  exploring  expeditions  which  led  to  the 
discovery  of  Alaska,  and  gave  territory  on  the  Western 
hemisphere  to  his  empire,  thus  enabling  the  Czar  to  ex- 
tend his  dominion  over  three  continents.  He  selected 
Vitus  Behring,  a  Danish  captain  in  the  Russian  service, 
to  command  the  expedition,  which  set  out  February  5, 
1725;  after  sixteen  years  occupied  in  exploring  the  coast 
and  waters  of  Siberia,  Alaska  was  sighted.  The  Czar 
died  three  days  after  the  expedition  started. 

In  1733  Kmpress  Anna  fitted  out  the  second  expedi- 
tion. It  occupied  six  years  crossing  Siberia,  and  in  the 
spring  of  1 74 1  Captain  Behring,  with  two  small  vessels, 
one  commanded  by  himself,  and  the  other  by  I^ieutenant 
Chirikof,  put  out  from  Kamchatka,  on  the  waters  of 
Behring  Sea.  The  vessels  became  permanently  sepa- 
rated. On  the  night  of. July  15,  1741,  Chirikof  sighted 
land  in  latitude  55°  21'  north,  which  is  near  the  extreme 


m 

■«vg 


:f?5 


'f'h 


18 


ALASKA. 


point  of  the  mainland  of  the  Alaskan  Peninsula.  Sub- 
sequently it  became  known  that  Chirikof's  discovery 
preceded  by  thirty-six  hours  Behring's  first  sight  of  the 
mainland  of  Alaska.  Chirikof  sent  two  landing  parties 
ashore,  and  the  members  were  massacred  by  the  natives. 
The  commander,  with  his  reduced  crew,  returned  to 
Kamchatka,  after  a  period  of  intense  suffering  and  hard- 
ship. Many  of  his  men,  including  himself,  were  seized 
with  scurvy.  Chirikof  was  among  the  number  who 
recovered. 

Captain  Behring  landed  on  th  coast,  and  shortly  af- 
terward returned  to  his  ship,  weighed  anchor  and  set 
sail  for  Kamchatka,  but  his  vessel  was  wrecked  on  what 
is  now  known  as  Behring  Island,  in  the  Commander 
group,  where  his  crew  spent  the  winter,  many  of  them 
dying,  the  remainder  living  in  dugouts  in  the  sandbanks 
of  a  small  .stream  and  subsisting  on  sea  animals  which 
they  captured  and  the  flesh  of  dead  whales  thrown  upon 
the  beach,  until  the  following  spring,  when  the  few  sur- 
vivors constructed  a  boat  of  the  timbers  of  the  wrecked 
vessel  and  made  their  way  to  Siberia.  Behring  died  on 
the  island  December  8,  1741. 

There  is  no  record  of  any  effort  to  visit  the  country 
until  1743,  when  expeditions  to  engage  in  the  fur  busi- 
ness were  inaugurated  by  the  Russian  merchants.  The 
first  adventurer  of  this  class  was  Emelia  Bassof,  a  Cossack 
sergeant  of  I^ower  Kamchatka,  who  made  four  voyages 
to  the  Commander  Islands  in  1743,  1745,  1747  and  1749. 
He  was  followed  by  a  sailor  named  Nevodchikof,  who 
reached  the  islands  of  Attu  and  Agatu  in  1745.  In  1749 
a  vessel  reached  the  island  of  Athka  and  others  in  its 
vicinity.  In  1 759  a  trader,  Glottof,  advanced  as  far  as 
the  island  of  Oumnak,  and  subsequently  discovered  the 


\ 


ALASKA. 


19 


' 


whole  group  of  islands,  including  Unalaska  (Oonalashka), 
now  known  as  the  Fox  Islands.  Glottof,  so  say  the  tra- 
ditions of  the  natives  of  those  islands,  was  the  first  Rus- 
sian who  came  among  them;  he  furnished  a  map  of  the 
region  to  his  government.  In  1760  Andreian  Tolstykh 
landed  on  the  island  of  Adakh,  where  he  remained  three 
years,  and  completely  explored  the  island,  and  rendered 
a  detailed  report  of  his  operations  and  their  results  to  the 
Russian  Government. 

In  1761  a  ship  belonging  to  the  merchant  Bechevin 
reached  the  mainland  of  the  Alaskan  Peninsula.  By  this 
time  the  continued  oppression  of  the  natives  by  the 
traders  aroused  the  former's  fury  and  brought  on  a  series 
of  conflicts  covering  a  period  of  more  than  twenty  years, 
in  which  many  lives  were  sacrificed. 

August  3,  1784,  there  landed  on  Kadiak  Island  a 
trader  named  Shelikhof,  who,  for  many  years,  operated  on 
a  large  scale.  Shelikhof  established  peaceful  relations 
with  the  Indians,  when  possible,  and  failing  in  that, 
fought  them  with  vigor.  He  was  victorious  in  so  many 
conflicts  that  it  enabled  him  to  establish  a  large  number 
of  outposts  for  hunting  parties.  After  a  victory,  he  held 
hostages  to  insure  the  good  behavior  of  the  savages. 
Shelikhof  was  a  shrewd  trader  and  a  bitter  foeman,  though 
possessed  of  a  kindly  disposition.  For  his  hostages, 
prisoners  and  the  friendly  natives  he  established  schools 
and  churches  of  the  Greek  Catholic  faith.  His  argu- 
ments setting  forth  the  advantages  the  natives  would 
secure  by  embracing  Christianity  ana  adopting-  civiliza- 
tion, being  simple  and  practical,  always  met  with  hearty 
response.  Many  of  the  natives  were  baptized  and  re- 
ceived into  orthodox  membership.  Shelikhof  returned 
to  Russia  in  1787,  taking  with  him  thirty  natives. 


4 

f 

I 


20 


ALASKA. 


The  estimated  population  of  Alaska  at  that  time  was 
about  5,000  souls,  but  it  is  not  reliable. 

In  1 790  another  trader,  Baranof,  owing  to  a  series  of 
misfortunes  in  his  own  affairs,  was  tempted  to  accept  an 
interest  in  the  business  established  by  his  rival,  Sheli- 
khof,  and  arrived  in  Alaska  to  assume  control  of  the 
latter's  fur  interests  in  the  new  country.  The  extra- 
ordinary energy  and  decision  displayed  by  Baranof  in 
the  management  of  his  own  affairs  in  Siberia  had  long 
attracted  the  attention  of  Shelikhof. 

To  the  ability  and  efforts  of  Baranof  is  due  the  final 
establishment  of  the  Russian  Empire  on  the  continent 
of  North  America. 

In  the  meantime.  Captain  Cook  had  visited  the  coast, 
but  the  Russians  were  fully  acquainied  with  the  result 
of  his  voyages  and  visits  to  the  northwest  of  America. 
Gerassim  Pribylof  had  also  discovered  the  summer 
haunts  of  the  fur  seal  herd  on  the  islands  which  now 
bear  his  name.  The  result  of  this  discovery  was  to  se- 
cure to  Russia  the  formerly  lost  trade  with  the  Chinese, 
who  placed  high  value  upon  the  fur  of  the  seal,  in  the 
tanning  and  coloring  of  which  they  had  become  expert. 
July  20,  1795,  Shelikhof  died,  but  his  widow  continued 
the  management  of  the  company's  affairs.  Before  his 
death  Shelikhof  had  sought  the  union  of  all  the  various 
companies  trading  in  Asiatic  Russia  and  the  American 
Colonies.  In  1797  the  consolidation  was  effected,  and 
the  new  firm,  under  the  name  of  the  Russian-American 
Company,  received  a  charter  from  the  Russian  Govern- 
ment, granting  it  the  exclusive  right  to  all  territory  and 
resources  of  water  and  land  in  the  new  Russian  posses- 
sions for  a  period  of  twenty  years.  This  charter,  granted 
by  the   Emperor   Paul  in    1791;,   marks  an  era  in  the 


ALASKA. 


21 


Alaskan  history;  from  that  time  to  its  cession  to  the 
United  States,  the  history  of  the  territory  is  the  history 
of  the  Russian- American  Company,  Baranof,  who  had 
shown  so  much  skill  and  ability  in  extending  business, 
continued  to  conduct  the  affairs  of  the  company  in 
Alaska.  He  was  a  man  of  great  determination,  courage 
and  physical  endurance,  but,  through  his  quarrelsome 
disposition,  made  numerous  enemies,  and  became  the 
victim  of  conspiracy  and  treachery.  In  1 808  the  com- 
pany commissioned  his  successor,  who,  however,  died 
before  leaving  Kamchatka.  After  the  discovery  of  a 
plot  to  kill  him  in  1809,  Baranof  showed  evidence  of  a 
broken  spirit,  and  the  eflFects  of  old  age  and  constant 
struggle  became  plainly  visible. 

Finally,  in  1817,  Captain  Hagemeister  was  sent  to 
Sitka,  with  instructions  to  relieve  Baranof  as  chief  man- 
ager of  the  Colonies.  Hagemeister  concealed  his  real 
capacity  for  several  months  after  his  arrival,  and  spent 
the  time  in  familiarizing  himself  with  the  affairs  of  the 
company  until  January  n,  18 18,  when  suddenly  he  pro- 
duced his  commission  and  ordered  Baranof  to  turn  over 
his  command.  The  old  man  promptly  complied,  and, 
although  millions  had  passed  through  his  hands,  so  con- 
scientious had  he  been  in  his  relations  with  the  company, 
and  so  little  attention  had  he  paid  to  his  private  affairs, 
that,  at  the  age  of  80  years,  he  found  himself  poor  and 
in  feeble  health.  Baranof  started  back  to  Russia  in  the 
"  Kutuzof,"  the  ship  which  had  brought  Hagemeister  to 
Sitka.  At  Batavia,  where  the  vessel  was  detained  for  a 
few  days,  he  went  ashore  and  contracted  malarial  fever, 
from  the  effects  of  which  the  creator  of  Russian  America 
died,  April  16,  1819.  Hagemeister  conducted  the  affairs 
of  the  company  until  1821,  when  he  was  relieved  by 


'-§k 


««.-,),  I 


22 


ALASKA. 


Mikhail  Ivanovich  Muraviev,  who  occupied  himself  with 
the  organization  of  colonies  and  extending  the  trade  of 
the  company,  whose  charter  had  been  renewed.  Under 
Muraviev's  administration  the  boundary  of  the  Russian 
possessions  in  America  was  established.  The  treaty 
with  the  United  States  was  concluded  April  17,  1824, 
and  that  with  England  on  February  28,  1825.  During 
his  administration  (1823),  the  priest  Mordovsky,  with 
his  assistant  missionary  monks,  arrived  and  spread  the 
gospel  among  the  natives  with  such  vigor  that  at  the 
end  of  three  years  the  Russian  Church  in  the  Colonies 
had  10,561  communicants,  of  whom  8,532  were  natives; 
schools  were  established  at  Sitka,  Kadiak  and  Una- 
laska. 

In  1826  Muraviev  was  succeeded  by  Captain  Chis- 
tiakof,  whose  administration  was  marked  by  the  ex- 
ploration and  mapping  of  the  Alaskan  coast  and  islands. 

Chistiakof,  after  a  prosperous  administration,  was 
relieved  in  1831  by  Baron  Wrangell,  who  made  a  con- 
tinuous, though  unsuccessful,  effort  to  destroy  the 
English  CvStablishment,  the  Hudson  Bay  Company,  which 
had  grown  to  be  a  strong  and  dangerous  rival  of  the 
Russian-American  Company. 

In  1836  Baron  Wrangell  departed,  and  Captain  Ku- 
prianof  assumed  the  direction  of  affairs,  and  turned 
his  attention  to  the  extension  of  the  company's  interests 
toward  the  north,  and  in  1838  had  reached  out  by  ex- 
ploring parties  as  far  as  Point  Barrow.  The  Yukon, 
then  called  Kvikhpak,  was  ascended  as  far  as  Nulato. 
From  1836  to  1840  small-pox  ravaged  the  settlements, 
and  nearly  2,000  deaths  resulted,  mostly  among  the 
natives. 

In  1840  Captain  Etholin  was  appointed  chief  manager 


♦I 


ALASKA. 


23 


of  the  Colonies.  Etholin  found  great  distress  as  the  re- 
sult of  the  small-pox  scourge,  and  occupied  himself  with 
gathering  the  scattered  inhabitants  into  larger  villages, 
where  their  wants  could  be  more  easily  made  known  and 
provided  for.  Aided  by  his  wife,  he  engaged  in  philan- 
thropic work  in  the  education  of  the  young  Creoles  and 
natives. 

EtholJu  was  succeeded  in  1845  by  Captain  (subse- 
quently Admiral)  Tebenkof,  whose  attention  was  largely 
occupied  gathering  the  data  necessary  to  the  comple- 
tion of  what  Mr.  Petroff  calls  "  the  best  atlas  of  the  coast 
of  Alaska  ever  published."  Tebenkof,  like  his  imme- 
diate predecessors,  knew  but  little  about  the  fur  trade, 
and  the  shares  of  the  company's  stock  continued  to  de- 
crease in  value. 

Tebenkof  was  succeeded  in  1851  by  Captain  Rosen- 
berg, who  in  turn  was  relieved  by  Captain  Voievodsky 
under  whose  administration  the  affairs  of  the  company 
continually  grew  worse,  and  its  obligations  increased  to 
such  an  extent  that  efforts  were  made  to  transfer  to  the 
Government  the  expense  of  maintaining  its  authority  in 
the  Colonies.  Russia  having  just  emerged  from  the  ex- 
pensive Crimean  War,  the  Imperial  Cabinet  rejected  the 
proposition,  and  the  grant  of  a  new  charter  was  deferred 
from  year  to  year. 

Voievodsky  was  relieved  by  Captain  Furuhelm  in 
1859,  but  the  company  refused  to  select  his  successor 
until  its  charter  was  renewed.  In  the  meantime,  Gov- 
ernment ofl&cials  were  gathering  information  and  pre- 
paring reports  upon  the  condition  of  the  company's  af- 
fairs, but  their  reports  were  too  conflicting  to  form  a 
basis  of  intelligent  action. 

Early  in  1864  it  is  said  that  the  United  States  Gov- 


Vi 


A 


i   f 


I  \ 


u 


ALASKA. 


ill  I 


ernment  was  approached  privately  in  regard  to  the  pur- 
chase by  it  of  Russian  America.  The  matter  was 
allowed  to  drop,  however,  owing  to  the  war,  then  in 
progress. 

In  1865  the  managers  of  the  Western  Union  Tele- 
graph Company  sought  a  route,  by  way  of  Behring 
Strait,  for  a  wire  to  Europe.  Its  surveying  parties,  dur- 
ing that  and  the  following  year,  were  actively  engaged 
cutting  a  trail  120  feet  wide,  which,  though  much  over- 
grown, is  still  plainly  seen  through  the  forests  on  their 
line.  The  enterprise  was  abandoned,  owing  to  the  suc- 
cessful completion  of  the  transatlantic  cable. 

After  the  refusal  of  the  Russian-American  Company 
to  appoint  a  new  chief  manager,  the  Emperor  of  Russia 
sent  out  Prince  Maksutof  as  Military  Governor.  Mak- 
sutof  remained  in  that  capacity  until  the  Territory  was 
transferred  to  the  United  States,  and  was  some  time  after 
his  appointment  invested  with  full  powers  by  the  Rus- 
sian-American Company,  assumed  control  of  its  affairs 
and  closed  out  its  business. 


lI'V' 


JUNEAU  WATER  FRONT. 


1  ii 


i 


I '  I 


I  >    ' 

f  4 


li    I! 


I' 
I 

li 


H 


M 


ALASKA. 


25 


Chapter  III. 


(I 


ACQUIREMENT  OF  THE  TERRITORY— EXPLO- 
RATION. 


In  the  year  1867  Russia,  for  a  consideration  of 
$7,200,000  in  gold,  ceded  all  the  territory  and  dominion 
then  possessed  by  her  on  the  Western  Continent  to  the 
United  States.  The  original  price  agreed  upon  was 
$7,000,000,  but  when  it  was  understood  that  there  ex- 
isted in  the  Territory  some  fur  and  ice  mcnopolies 
granted  by  the  Russian  Government,  to  quiet  their 
claims  and  prevent  the  possibility  of  subsequent  compli- 
cations, an  additional  sum  of  $200,000  was  added  to  the 
purchase  money,  to  free  the  country  of  all  incumbrances. 
The  treaty  describing  the  boundary  was  signed  March 
30,  1867,  in  the  City  of  Washington,  by  Hon,  V/illiam 
H.  Seward,  Secretary  of  State,  for  the  United  States,  and 
by  Privy  Counsellor  Edward  de  Stoeckl,  Russian  Minis- 
ter to  the  United  States,  for  his  country.  The  treaty 
was  ratified  by  the  United  States  Senate  May  28,  1867, 
and  the  proclamation  of  the  President,  setting  forth  its 
terms  in  the  French  and  English  languages,  was  issued 
on  the  20th  of  June,  1867. 

Alaska  is  therefore  the  last  acquisition  of  territory  by 

the   United   States.     At  the  time  of  its  purchase  the 

price,  less  then  than  two  cents  per  acre,  was,  by  a  great 

many  people,  declared  excessive,  and  Mr.  Seward  met 

with  great  opposition  to  his  project  in  the  United  States 

Senate,  and  was  the  subject  of  much  ridicule  by  the  press 
— 3— 


%■ 


26 


ALASKA. 


of  the  country;  but  calculating  the  possible  development 
of  the  future,  based  upon  discoveries  already  made,  the 
territory  proclaims  his  sagacity  and  reflects  the  wisdom 
of  his  policy.  In  August  commissioners  were  appointed 
by  Russia  and  the  United  States  to  complete  the  formal 
transfer  of  the  territory.  The  $7,200,000  had  not  yet 
been  appropriated  by  Congress,  but  Russia,  reposing  en- 
tire confidence  in  the  good  faith  of  the  United  States, 
signified  her  readiness  to  make  the  delivery  without 
waiting  for  payment.  Major-General  h.  H.  Rousseau,  of 
the  United  States  Army,  and  Captain  PestchouroflF,  of  the 
Russian  Navy,  were  the  commissioners.  The  transfer 
was  made  October  18,  1867,  at  3:30  in  the  afternoon, 
with  suitable  ceremony.  General  Rousseau's  report  to 
the  Secretary  of  State  says : 

"  The  day  was  bright  and  beautiful.  We  fixed  the 
hour  of  three  and  a  half  o'clock  for  the  transfer.  Gen- 
eral Jefferson  C.  Davis,  commanding  the  troops.  Captain 
McDougal,  of  the  'Jamestown,'  Captain  Bradford,  of 
the  'Resaca,'  and  the  ofl&cers  of  their  respective  com- 
mands, as,  also,  the  Governor  of  the  Territory,  Prince 
Maksutof,  were  notified  and  invited  to  be  present.  The 
command  of  General  Davis,  about  two  hundred  and  fifty 
strong,  marched  up  to  the  top  of  the  eminence  on  which 
stands  the  Governor's  house,  where  the  transfer  was  to 
be  made. 

"At  the  same  time  a  company  of  Russian  soldiers 
were  marching  to  the  ground,  and  took  their  place  upon 
the  left  of  the  flag-staff,  from  which  the  Russian  flag  was 
then  floating.  Prince  Maksutof  and  the  Princess,  to- 
gether with  many  Russian  and  American  citizens,  and 
some  Indians,  were  present. 

"It  was  arranged  by  Captain  Pcstchouroft'  and  myself 


T 


L 


ALASKA. 


27 


that  in  firing  the  salutes  on  the  exchange  of  flags,  the 
United  States  should  lead  off,  in  accordance  with  your 
instructions,  and  that  there  should  be  alternate  guns 
from  the  American  and  Russian  batteries,  thus  giving 
the  flags  of  each  nation  a  double  national  salute ;  the 
naval  salute  being  thus  answered  in  the  moment  it  was 
given.  The  troops  were  brought  to  '  present  arms,'  the 
signal  given  to  fire  the  salute,  and  the  ceremony  was  be- 
gun by  lowering  the  Russian  flag.  The  United  States 
flag  (the  one  given  us  for  that  purpose,  by  your  direction 
from  Washington)  then  began  its  ascent,  and  again  the 
salutes  were  fired  as  before,  the  Russian  water  battery 
leading  off.  The  flag  was  so  hoisted  that,  in  the  instant 
it  reached  its  place,  the  report  of  the  last  gun  of  the 
'  Ossippee '  reverberated  from  the  mountains  around. 
The  salutes  completed,  Captain  Pestchouroff  said  : 

"  '  General  Rousseau,  by  authority  from  His  Majesty, 
the  Emperor  of  Russia,  I  transfer  to  the  United  States 
the  Territory  of  Alaska.'  And,  in  as  few  words,  I  ac- 
knowledged the  acceptance  of  the  transfer,  and  the  cere- 
mony was  at  an  end.  Cheers  were  then  spontaneously 
given  by  the  citizens  present." — Seward  in  Washington 
— Seward,  F.  IV. 

The  United  States  flag  used  upon  the  occasion  is 
now  deposited  in  the  State  Department  at  Washington. 

Of  the  ceremony,  Mr.  Petroff  says : 

"The  Princess  Maksutof  wept  at  the  spectacle.  *  * 
*  *  The  native  Indians,  in  their  canoes,  witnessed  it 
from  a  distance,  listening  stolidly  to  the  booming  of 
cannon,  and  gazing  with  indifference  upon  the  descend- 
ing and  ascending  flags.  Of  the  nature  of  the  proceed- 
ings they  had  a  faint  and  imperfect  conception ;  but  one 
thing   the}-    did    lealize — that   the  country    they    once 


^il 


li 


28 


ALASKA. 


imagined  their  own  was  now  being  transferred  to  a 
strange  people,  by  what  must  have  appeared  to  them  a 
strange  ceremony." 

Many  names,  such  as  Sitka,  Yukon,  Aleutla,  etc., 
were  suggested  for  the  new  Territory,  but  Mr.  Seward, 
with  whom  the  final  decision  rested,  chose  Alaska  as  be- 
ing "brief,  euphonious  and  suitable."  The  word  is  a 
corruption  of  Al-av-ek-sa — the  name  given  by  the  native 
islanders  to  the  mainland. 

Almost  immediately  after  the  annexation  of  the  Terri- 
tory by  the  United  States,  the  eastern  boundary  became 
the  subject  of  informal  discussion  between  this  country 
and  Great  Britain,  and  in  his  annual  message  to  Con- 
gress, December  2,  1872,  President  Grant  recommended 
the  appointment  of  a  joint  commission  to  fix  the  bound- 
ary, but  Congress  took  no  action,  and  the  matter  rested 
for  several  years.  On  May  17,  1886,  President  Cleve- 
land transmitted  to  Congress  copies  of  correspondence 
between  Secretary  Bayard  and  Minister  Phelps  upon  the 
subject,  and  recommended  an  appropriation  of  $100,000 
to  cover  the  expense  of  a  preliminary  survey  of  the 
frontier.  Conferences  between  representatives  of  the 
two  governments  have  been  held  since,  but  no  joint  re- 
sults have  been  reached.  Surveying  parties  of  both  the 
United  States  and  Canadian  Governments  have  been  at 
work  independently  along  the  141st  meridian,  and  their 
work  closely  agrees.  At  one  point  the  difiference  is  but 
6  feet  7  inches,  and  at  another  between  500  and  600  feet, 
and  when  a  comparison  of  results  is  finally  made,  even 
closer  approximation  is  expected.  So  far  as  the  border 
marked  by  the  141st  meridian  west  from  Greenwich  is 
concerned,  the  only  difiiculty  is  the  location  of  that  me- 
ridian, which  becomes  more  difiicult  from  the  fact  that 


ALASKA. 


29 


L 


the  stars  which  are  usually  observed  in  such  work  are 
obscured  during  the  working  season  of  the  year  by  the 
almost  continuous  daylight.  That  portion  of  the  border 
which  follows  the  chain  of  mountains  parallel  to  the 
coast  line  is  more  difficult  to  survey,  and  its  exact  lo- 
cation on  the  ground  is  yet  to  be  determined  and 
marked. 

Shortly  after  the  United  States  acquired  the  Territory, 
it  was  visited  by  General  H.  W.  Halleck,  United  States 
Army,  then  in  command  of  the  Division  of  the  Pacific, 
and  on  October  29th  of  that  year  Battery  H,  Second 
Artillery,  and  Company  F,  Ninth  Infantry,  under  com- 
mand of  Colonel  Jefferson  C.  Davis,  Twenty-third  United 
States  Infantry,  took  station  at  Sitka. 

General  George  H.  Thomas  succeeded  General  Hal- 
leck in  command  of  the  Division  of  the  Pacific,  and  vis- 
ited the  Territory  in  1869.  The  transfer  of  Alaska 
Territory  had  taken  place  on  October  18,  1867,  but  quar- 
ters for  the  troops  were  not  available  until  the  29th. 
March  18,  1868,  the  Military  Department  of  Alaska  was 
created,  with  Colonel  Jefferson  C.  Davis,  Twenty-third 
United  States  Infantry,  in  command.  In  June  of  the 
same  year  the  occupying  force  was  increased  by  the  ad- 
dition of  Batteries  E,  F,  G  and  I,  of  the  Second  Artillery. 
Continually  from  the  time  of  original  military  occupa- 
tion, until  1877,  different  points  in  Alaska  Territory 
were  garrisoned  by  United  States  troops.  The  principal 
posts  were  Sitka,  on  Baranof  Island ;  Fort  Tongass,  on 
Tongass  Island;  Fort  Wrangell,  on  Wrangell  Island; 
and  Fort  Kadiac,  on  Kadiac  (Kadiak)  Island,  in  St.  Paul's 
Harbor.  The  last  troops  were  withdrawn  from  the  Ter- 
ritory in  June,  1877.  During  the  ten  years  of  military 
occupation,  the  following  troops  served  in  Alaska  : 


A 


imimt ' 


30  ALASKA. 

TROOPS.  PROM  TO 

2d  Artillery,      C June  2,  1871  January  4,  1873 

•*              E April  29,  1868  October  7,  1870 

"              P August  2,  1868  October  3,  1870 

"  G June  6,  1868    September  18,  1880 

•          "              H October  29,  1867  October  7,  1870 

"              H June  27,  1872  January  4,  1873 

"              I  October  8,  1868  June  29,  1872 

T4th    "              A  June  14,  1876  June  15,  1877 

"              C December  28,  1872  August  18,  1874 

*'              D December  28,  1872  August  18,  1874 

"              F August  16,  1874  June  17,  1876 

t          ••              G.. June  14,  1870  June  14,  1877 

"              t, August  16,  1874  June  17,  1876 

T         "              M June  17,  1876  June  14,  1877 

*9th  Infantry,  F October  29,  1867  May,       1869 

2iBt        *'           B  .  .August  18,  1875  November  9,  1876 

23d         "           E July  3,  1869  June  3,  1871 

After  the  withdrawal  of  the  troops  in  1877,  there  was  no  mil- 
itary occupation  of  the  Territory  for  two  years. 

In  May,  1879,  there  was  a  threatened  outbreak  of  Indians, 
and  the  United  States  ship  "Jamestown,"  Commander  h.  A. 
Beardsley,  took  station  and  remained  about  three  years  in  Alas- 
kan waters  to  protect  citizens  and  property.  Efforts  at  survey- 
ing and  exploration  were  made  by  the  Navy,  but  the  "James- 
town," being  a  sailing  vessel,  could  not  ascend  the  rivers,  and 
little  progress  in  the  work  was  made. 

Since  their  entry  into  Alaskan  waters,  in  1879,  naval 
forces  have  been  maintained  there.  The  vessels  most 
notable  in  this  service  are  the  "  Wachusett,"  "  Adams," 
"Pinta,"  "Thetis"  and  "Alert."  The  revenue  cutters 
"Bear,"  "Corwin"  and  "Rush"  have  performed  nota- 
ble service  in  Alaskan  waters  in  executing  the  laws  and 
relieving  distress. 

Concerning  the  service  of  the  United  States  Marines 
in  the  Territory,  Colonel  Heywood,  Commandant  of  the 
Corps,  under  date  of  November  16,  1897,  says: 

"In  August,  1884,  a  guard,  consisting  of  one  lieu- 

*  First  troops  ordered  to  Alaska. 
tLast  troops  in  Alaska. 


I 


.il 


ALASKA. 


81 


tenant  and  twenty  enlisted  men,  was  ordered  to  the  U. 
S.  S.  "  Pinta,"  stationed  at  Sitka,  Alaska,  and  were  quar- 
tered on  shore  in  the  old  Russian  barracks.  The  guatd 
was  increased  from  time  to  time,  as  the  necessities  of  the 
service  required. 

"  On  June  i,  1892,  the  Marine  Barracks  was  finished, 
and  a  post  was  established,  under  the  command  of  a 
captain. 

"On  November  16,  1896,  the  strength  of  the  com- 
mand was  again  increased  to  forty-four  enlisted  men, 
which  is  still  the  complement. 

"  The  duties  of  the  command  are  to  protect  the  Naval 
Storehouse  and  keep  order  in  the  Territory,  looking  out 
for  the  Indians,  or  any  disturbance  that  may  arise,  upon 
the  request  of  the  Governor." 

In  1897,  owing  to  the  increased  interest  in  Alaska, 
caused  chiefly  by  the  report  of  rich  gold  mines  therein, 
the  War  Department  dispatched  a  military  force  to  the 
Territory  to  protect  American  citizens  and  render  prr-  '. 
aid,  if  necessary,  to  distressed  travelers.  Captair  .  .  H. 
Ray,  Eighth  Infantry,  accompanied  by  lyieutet  at  W. 
P.  Richardson,  of  the  same  regiment,  proceeded  ni  ad- 
vance to  the  Yukon  country  to  investigate  and  rt^  -t 
existing  conditions,  and  were  followed  by  Lieutenant- 
Colonel  George  M.  Randall,  Eighth  Infantry,  with  a 
small  force  of  infantry,  to  Saint  Michael,  where  they  ar- 
rived October  9th,  and  a  military  post  was  established. 
A  military  reservation  has  been  set  aside,  as  described 
in  the  following  order : 

"WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

"  Washington,  October  20,  1897. 
"  I.     By  authority  of  the  President,  the  land  known 
as  St.  Michael  Island,  Alaska,  with  all  contiguous  land 


(trJ 


!    !l 


ill 


i  ii 


32 


ALASKA. 


and  islands  within  one  hundred  miles  of  the  location  of 
the  flagstaff  of  the  present  garrison  on  that  island,  is 
set  aside  from  the  public  landsof  the  Territory  of  Alaska 
and  declared  a  military  reservation. 

"  Parties  who  have,  prior  to  the  receipt  of  this  order, 
located  and  erected  buildings  on  the  land  so  reserved, 
will  not  be  disturbed  in  their  use  of  lands,  buildings  and 
improvements,  nor  in  the  erection  of  structures  needed 
for  their  business  or  residence. 

"  2.  The  military  reservation  above  declared,  and  the 
military  post  located  thereon,  will  be  known  as  fort  St. 
Michael,  and  will  be  under  the  control  and  supervision 
of  the  commanding  officer  of  the  troops  there  stationed. 

"  R.  A.  Alger, 
"  Secretary  of  War." 

Captain  P.  H.  Ray  has  also  selected  a  military  reser- 
vation, ten  miles  square,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Tanana 
River,  and  posted  the  same.* 

No  important  effort  at  exploration,  and  no  informa- 
tion concerning  the  interior  further  chan  that  gf.ined 
from  accounts  by  natives  and  prospectors,  was  obtained 
until  the  spring  of  1883,  when  Brigadier-General  (now 
Major-General)  Nelson  A.  Miles,  commanding  the  De- 
partment of  the  Columbia,  ordered  his  aide-de-camp. 
Lieutenant  F.  Schwatka,  Third  Cavalry,  to  Alaska  to 
make  a  military  reconnaissance  of  the  Territory.  Lieu- 
tenant Schwatka,  with  his  party,  seven  in  all,  left  Port- 
land, Oregon,  May  22,  1883,  and  proceeded  by  steamer 
to  the  Alexander  Archipelago,  where  a  couple  of  weeks 
were  .spent  in  becoming  acquainted  with  the  various 
bands  of  Thlinket  Indians,  who  inhabit  the  islands  and 
coast.     They  then  ascended  to  Dyea  Inlet,  crossed  over 

*I<etter  to  the  Secretary  of  War,  September  15,  1897, 


ALASKA. 


33 


the  Chilkoot  Pass  June  loth,  and  traveled  from  its  head- 
waters down  the  Yukon  to  its  mouth,  where  they  arrived 
the  latter  part  of  August.  A  week  was  spent  at  St. 
Michael.  Upon  the  return  trip  the  Aleutian  Islands 
were  visited,  and  the  journey  continued  to  San  Fran- 
cisco, arriving  there  October  5th.  Lieutenant  Schwatka's 
report,  with  maps  and  illustrations,  was  published  as 
United  States  Senate  Executive  Document  No.  2,  Second 
Session,  Forty-eighth  Congress. 

In  1884  Lieutenant  (now  Captain)  W.  R.  Abercrom- 
bie,  Second  United  States  Infantry,  conducted  an  explor- 
ing expedition  in  the  region  of  the  Copper  River  and  the 
coast  and  adjacent  islands,  as  far  as  the  147th  meridian. 

In  1885  Lieutenant  Henry  T.  Allen,  Second  United 
States  Cavalry,  commanded  an  exploring  expedition 
which  traveled  the  region  of  the  Copper,  Tanana  and 
Koyukuk  Rivers.  His  interesting  illustrated  report, 
with  maps  of  the  country  over  which  he  traveled,  was 
published  as  Se.ate  Executive  Document  No.  125,  Sec- 
ond Session,  Forty-ninth  Congress. 


r 


■ 


r 


1 1 


I! 


1  !li 


m 


i 


i  J 


ALASKA. 


85 


Chaptfj   IV. 


H 


1 


CUMATR. 


"  For  hot,  cold,  moist  and  dry,  four  champions  fierce,  strive 
Vera  for  mastery." — Milton. 


With  reference  to  climate,  Alaska  may  be  separated 
into  two  divisiotis:  the  one.  Southern  Alaska,  embrac- 
ing the  sea-coast  below  St.  Michael  and  the  various  out- 
lying islands ;  the  other  including  all  the  Territory  to  the 
north  and  beyond  the  coast  range  of  mountains. 

The  climate  in  the  southern  portion  of  Alaska  is 
mild  and  moist;  said  to  be  due  to  the  warm  Japanese 
current  which  sweeps  the  western  coast — one  branch 
entering  Behring  Sea  and  preventing  the  southern  flow 
of  ice  and  the  other  bringing  to  the  southeastern  portion 
of  the  coast  a  moisture-laden  atmosphere,  responsible 
for  the  great  annual  rainfall  there  and  on  the  neighbor- 
ing islands.  From  the  report  of  Mr.  Ivan  Petroff, 
special  United  States  Agent  for  the  Tenth  Census,  it  is 
learned  that  observations  on  the  Aleutian  Islands  by 
the  missionary  Veniaminof,  covering  a  period  of  more 
than  seven  years,  showed  53  clear  days,  1,263  rainy 
days  and  1,230  days  of  rain,  snow  or  hail.  The  same 
authority,  speaking  of  the  Kadiak  neighborhood,  says 
that  observations  covering  a  period  of  fifty  years  showed 
a  minimum  temperature  of  —4  degrees  and  a  maximum 
of  -j-  84  degrees— certainly  very  moderate  extremes  •  the 
rain-fall   for  the  same    period  averaged  80  inches  per 


.m 


sill 


36 


ALASKA. 


year,  and  several  years  the  rain-fall  exceeded  90  inches, 
and  once  reached  103  inches  for  a  single  year;  the 
average  number  of  rainy  days  per  year  was  165  and  of 
snow  33,  but  several  years  the  number  of  rainy  days 
reached  250,  and  once  264;  the  highest  number  of  snowy 
days  for  any  year  was  44. 

Speaking  of  the  temperature  of  St.  Michael  Island 
and  vicinity,  Mr.  Petroff  quotes  from  K.  W.  Nelson's  re- 
port in  1880  to  the  Chief  Signal  Oflficer  of  the  Army,  as 
follows : 

"  During  the  past  four  years  the  first  mush  ice 
has  begun  to  form  in  the  bays  from  the  15th  to  the  i8th 
of  October,  and  the  bays  have  been  frozen  so  as  to  bear 
a  man  from  the  25th  to  the  28th  of  October,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  the  year  1878,  when  a  strong  wind  took  the 
ice  out,  and  it  did  not  freeze  again  until  the  loth  of  No- 
vember. Up  to  the  15th  of  October  vessels  could  enter 
here  without  danger  of  meeting  ice.  In  the  spring 
much  more  uncertainty  exists,  as  to  a  great  extent  the 
date  of  open  water  depends  upon  what  the  prevailing 
winds  may  be.  Long- continued  north  winds,  following 
a  severe  winter,  as  in  1880,  may  keep  the  ice  barrier  in 
until  the  20th  of  June,  and  it  has  even  remained  until 
nearly  the  first  of  July ;  but  these  late  dates  are  excep- 
tional. As  a  rule,  the  ice  will  be  thoroughly  broken  up 
and  a  strong  vessel  may  enter  Norton  Sound  through  the 
ice  by  the  loth  of  June.  Between  the  20th  of  June  and 
the  ist  of  July  may  be  called  safe  dates  for  any  vessel 
except  in  an  unusual  season,  as  during  a  large  part 
of  June  fine  weather  prevails. 

"As  in  most  other  places  under  high  latitudes,  there  is 
no  long  gradation  from  season  to  season,  but  instead  we 
have  two  well  marked  periods— a  long  winter  of  about 


m^^ 


ALASKA. 


87 


seven  months,  extending  from  October  until  well  into 
May,  and  five  months  of  summer.  The  winter  is  by  far 
the  best,  as  there  are  long  periods  of  beautifully  clear 
days,  which  are  welcomed  in  spite  of  the  usually 
accompanying  intense  cold.  The  summer  is  rendered 
very  disagreeable  by  a  large  number  of  cold,  misty  rains, 
and  the  low,  overhanging  stratum,  which  appears  to  shut 
down  all  about  like  a  leaden  covering." 

In  the  other  division  of  the  Territory,  across  the  coast 
range  of  mountains,  including  the  Upper  Yukon  Basin 
where  the  present  well-known  gold-fields  exist,  very  dif- 
ferent climatic  conditions  prevail.  In  this  division  the 
air  is  dry  and  clear.  There  is  but  little  rain  in  the  sum- 
mer and  the  snow-fall  in  winter  does  not  usually  exceed 
two  feet  in  the  vicinity  of  Fort  Cudahy,  though  it  is  as 
much  as  twenty  feet  along  the  coast,  where  the  effect  of 
the  Japanese  current  is  felt. 

The  extremes  of  temperature,  however,  are  very 
great,  ranging,  if  reports  of  returned  miners  are  accepted, 
from  —72  in  winter  to  -j-112  degrees  in  summer.  In 
winter  the  air  is  filled  with  frozen  particles  like  frost, 
which,  continually  falling,  keep  the  surface  of  the  ground 
covered  with  a  light,  feathery  coating  of  snow,  and  Mr. 
Harry  De  Windt,  the  explorer,  reports  ice  13  feet  thick 
on  the  Yukon  River. 

In  the  northern  portion  of  the  Territory,  and  indeed 
sometimes  (though  rarely)  as  far  south  as  Dyea  and 
Juneau,  there  occurs  at  irregular  intervals,  a  storm  of  pe- 
culiar violence,  known  locally  as  the  "  takou  "  (taku) ;  the 
otorm  usually  continues  for  a  half  hour  or  more,  during 
which  the  wind  blows  with  terrifically  destructive  force, 
always  from  the  mountains  toward  the  sea,  and  may  be 
accompanied  by  blinding  snow  or  sleet.     The  takou  is 


■fe 


m 


38 


ALASiKA 


well  known  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  North,  where  it  is 
dreaded  more  than  is  the  blizzard  or  the  cyclone  in 
the  regions  of  their  wrath. 

A  report  recently  prepared  by  Chief  Willis  L.  Moore, 
of  the  United  States  Weather  Bureau,  on  the  climate  of 
Alaska,  is  as  follows : 

"The  general  conception  of  Alaskan  climate  is 
largely  due  to  those  who  go  down  to  the  sea  in  .ships, 
and  this  is  not  strange  when  we  consider  the  vast  extent 
of  shore  line — over  26,000  miles,  possessed  by  that  Terri- 
tory. The  climate  of  the  coast  and  the  interior  are 
unlike  in  many  respects,  and  the  differences  are  intensi- 
fied in  this,  as  perhaps  in  few  other  countries,  by  excep- 
tional physical  conditions.  The  natural  contra.st  be- 
tween land  and  sea  is  here  tremendously  increased  by  the 
current  of  warm  water  that  impinges  on  the  coast 
of  British  Columbia,  one  branch  flowing  northward  to- 
ward Sitka  and  thence  westward  to  the  Kadiak  and 
Shumagin  Islands. 

"The  fringe  of  islands  that  separates  the  mainland 
from  the  Pacific  Ocean  from  Dixon  Sound  northward, 
and  also  a  strip  of  the  mainland  for  possibly  twenty 
miles  back  from  the  sea,  following  the  sweep  of  the 
coast,  as  it  curves  to  the  northwestward,  to  the  western 
extremity  of  Alaska,  form  a  distinct  climate  division, 
which  may  be  termed  temperate  Alaska.  The  tem- 
perature rarely  falls  to  zero ;  winter  does  not  set  in  until 
December  1st,  and  by  the  last  of  May  the  snow  has  dis- 
appeared except  in  the  mountains.  The  mean  winter 
temperature  of  Sitka  is  32.5  degrees,  but  little  less  than 
that  of  Washington,  D.  C.  While  Sitka  is  fully  exposed 
to  the  sea  influences,  places  farther  inland,  but  not  over 
the  coast  lange  of  mountains,  as  Killisnoo  and  Juneau, 


\*-i^ 


■ff*!,-; 


ALASKA. 


39 


have  also  mild  temperatures  throughout  the  winter 
months.  The  temperature  changes  from  month  to 
mouth  in  temperate  Alaska  are  small,  not  exceeding 
twenty-five  degrees  from  mid-winter  to  mid-summer. 
The  average  temperature  of  July,  the  warmest  month  of 
summer,  rarely  reaches  fifty-five  degrees,  and  the  highest 
temperature  of  a  single  day  seldom  reaches  seventj-five 
degrees. 

"The  rain-fall  of  temperate  Alaska  is  notorious  the 
world  over,  not  only  as  regards  tric  quantity  that  falls, 
but  also  as  to  the  manner  of  its  falling — viz.,  in 
long  and  incessant  rains  and  drizzles.  Cloud  and 
fog  naturally  abound,  there  being  on  an  average  but  66 
clear  days  in  the  year. 

"Alaska  is  a  land  of  striking  contrasts,  both  in  climate 
as  well  as  topography.  When  the  sun  shines,  the  atmos- 
phere is  remarkably  clear;  the  scenic  effects  are  mag- 
nificent ;  all  nature  seems  to  be  in  holiday  attire.  But 
the  scene  may  change  very  quickly :  the  sky  becomes 
overcast ;  the  winds  increase  in  force ;  rain  begins  to  fall ; 
the  evergreens  sigh  ominously,  and  utter  desolation  and 
loneliness  prevail. 

"  North  of  the  Aleutian  Islands  the  coast  climate 
becomes  more  rigorous  in  winter,  but  in  summer  the 
difference  is  much  less  marked.  Thus,  at  St.  Michael,  a 
short  distance  north  of  the  mouth  of  the  Yukon,  the 
mean  summer  temperature  is  fifty  degrees,  but  four  de- 
grees cooler  than  Sitka.  The  mean  summer  temperature 
of  Point  Barrow,  the  most  northerly  point  in  the  United 
States,  is  36.8  degrees,  but  four- tenths  of  a  degree  less 
than  the  temperature  of  the  air  flowing  across  the 
summit  of  Pike's  Peak,  Colorado. 

"The  rain-fall  of  the  coast  region  north  of  the  Yu- 


PW"»" 


40 


ALASKA. 


kon  Delta  is  small,  diminishing  to  less  than  ten  inches 
within  the  Arctic  Circle. 

"The  climateof  the  interior,  including  in  that  designa- 
tion practically  all  of  the  country  except  a  narrow  fringe 
of  coastal  margin  and  the  territory  before  referred  to 
as  temperate  Alaska,  is  one  of  extreme  rigor  in  winter, 
with  a  brief  but  relatively  hot  summer,  especially  when 
the  sky  is  free  from  clouds. 

"  In  the  Klondike  region  in  mid-winter  the  sun 
rises  from  9:30  to  10  a.  m.  and  sets  from  2  to  3  p. 
m.,  the  total  length  of  daylight  being  about  four 
hours.  Remembering  that  the  sun  rises  but  a  few  de- 
grees above  the  horizon,  and  that  it  is  wholly  ob- 
scured on  a  great  many  days,  the  character  of  the  winter 
months  may  easily  be  imagined. 

"We  are  indebted  to  the  United  States  Coast  and 
Geodetic  Survey  for  a  series  of  six  month's  observa- 
tions on  the  Yukon,  not  far  from  the  site  of  the  present 
gold  discoveries.  The  observations  were  made  with 
standard  instruments  and  are  wholly  reliable.  The  mean 
temperature  of  the  months  Ootober,  1889,  to  April,  1890, 
both  inclusive,  are  as  follows :  October,  33  degrees ; 
November,  8  degrees  ;  December,  1 1  degrees  below  zero ; 
January,  17  degrees  below  zero;  February,  15  degrees 
below  zero;  March,  6  degrees  above  zero;  April,  20 
degrees  above.  The  daily  mean  temperature  fell  and  re- 
mained below  the  freezing  point  (32)  from  November  4, 
1889,  to  April  21,  1890,  thus  giving  168  days  as  the 
length  of  the  closed  season  of  1889-90,  assuming  the  out- 
door operations  are  controlled  by  temperature  only. 

"  The  lowest  temperatures  registered  during  the  win- 
ter were :  32  degrees  below  zero  in  November,  47  de- 
grees below  in  December,  59  below  in  January,  55  below 
in  February,  45  below  in  March,  26  below  in  April. 


i 


V. 

r 

M 
H 


c 


7 

•r. 


I 

I 


! 


'  ? 


^    1 

»' 


x 


( '• 


(I  ll; 


i~ 


K 


w 


ALASKA. 


41 


"The  greatest  continuous  cold  occurred  in  February 
1890,  when  the  daily  mean  for  five  consecutive  days 
was  47  degrees  below  zero.  The  weather  moderated 
slightly  about  the  first  of  March,  but  the  temperature 
still  remained  below  the  freezing  point.  Generally 
cloudy  weather  prevailed,  there  being  but  three  con- 
secutive days  in  any  month  with  clear  weather  during  the 
whole  winter.  Snow  fell  on  about  one-third  of  the  days 
in  winter  and  a  less  number  in  the  early  spring  and  late 
fall  months. 

"  Greater  cold  than  that  here  noted  has  been  ex- 
perienced in  the  United  States  for  a  very  short  time,  but 
never  has  it  continued  so  very  cold  for  so  long  a  time. 
In  the  interior  of  Alaska  the  winter  sets  in  as  early 
as  September,  when  snow-storms  may  be  expected  in 
the  mountains  and  passes.  Headway  during  one  of 
these  storms  is  impossible,  and  the  traveler  who  is  over- 
taken by  one  of  them  is  indeed  fortunate  if  he 
escapes  with  his  life.  Snow-storms  of  great  .severity 
may  occur  in  any  month  from  September  to  May,  in 
elusive. 

"  The  changes  of  temperature  from  winter  to  sum. 
nier  .,re  rapid,  owing  to  the  great  increase  in  the  length 
of  the  day.  In  May  the  sun  rises  at  about  3  a.  m. 
and  sets  about  9  p.  m.  In  June  it  rises  about  1:30  in  the 
morning  and  sets  at  10:30,  giving  about  twenty  hours  of 
daylight,  and  dijQTuvSed  twilight  the  remainder  of  the  time. 

"  The  mean  summer  temperature  of  the  interior  doubt- 
less ranges  between  60  and  70  degrees,  according  to  ele- 
vation, being  highest  in  the  middle  and  lower  Yukon 
valleys." 

As  a  natural  result  of  these  climatic  conditions  the 
warm  weather  brings  myriads  of  mosquitoes,  the    larvae 


:M 


■I  iii 


I 


42 


ALASKA. 


^i:; 


of  which  are  deposited  in  the  damp  moss  which  every- 
where covers  the  ground ;  there  they  remain  protected 
during  the  severity  of  the  winter,  and  as  soon  as  the  snow 
melts  the  vicious  insects  are  released.  Mr.  PetrofF, 
speaking  especially  of  the  Kuskokwim  region,  though 
the  same  complaint  is  made  by  travelers  from  all  sec- 
tions of  the  Territory,  says : 

"  There  is  n  feature  in  this  country  which,  though 
insignificant  oaper,  is  to  the  traveler  the  most  ter- 
rible and  pc  ^  ^t  infliction  he  can  be  called  upon  to 
bear  iu  a  new  land.  I  refer  to  the  clouds  of  blood- 
thirsty mosquitoes,  accompanied  by  a  vindictive  ally  in 
the  shape  of  a  small,  poisonous  black  fly,  under  the  stress 
of  whose  persecution  the  strongest  man  with  the  firmest 
will  must  either  feel  depressed  or  succumb  to  low  fever. 
They  hold  their  carnival  of  human  torment  from  the  first 
growing  of  spring  vegetation  in  May  until  it  is  withered 
by  frosts  late  in  September.  Breeding  here  as  they  do  in 
the  vast  net- work  of  slough  and  swamp,  they  are  able  to 
rally  around  and  to  infest  the  wake  and  the  progress  of 
the  explorer  beyond  all  adequate  description,  and 
language  is  simply  unable  to  portray  the  misery  and 
annoyance  accompanying  their  presence.  It  will  natu- 
rally be  asked.  How  do  the  natives  bear  this?  They, 
too,  are  annoyed  and  suffer,  but  it  should  be  borne 
in  mind  that  their  bodies  are  anointed  with  rancid 
oil  and  certain  ammoniacal  vapors  peculiar  to  their 
garments  from  constant  wear  have  a  repellant  power 
which  even  the  mosquitoes,  blood-thirsty  and  cruel  as 
they  are,  are  hardly  equal  to  meet.  When  traveling,  the 
natives  are,  however,  glad  enough  to  seize  upon  any 
piece  of  mosquito  net,  no  matter  how  small,  and  usually 
they   have  to  wrap  cloths  or  skins  about  their  heads 


*#*»! 


ALASKA. 


43 


and  wear  mittens  in  mid-summer.  The  traveler  who  ex- 
poses his  bare  eyes  or  face  here  loses  his  natural  ap- 
pearance ;  his  eyelids  swell  up  and  close  and  his  face  be- 
comes one  mass  of  lumps  and  fiery  pimples.  Mosquitoes 
torture  the  Indian  dogs  to  death,  especially  if  one  of 
these  animals,  Ly  mange  or  otherwise,  loses  an  incon- 
siderable portion  of  his  thick,  hairy  covering,  and  even 
drive  the  bear  and  the  deer  into  the  water." 


.41 


ALASKA. 


45 


Chapter  V. 


INHABITANTS,  POPULATION  AND 
GOVERNMENT. 


The  inhabitants  of  Alaska  are,  for  the  greater  part, 
natives.  Many  have  become  semi-civilized,  while  others 
still  cling  strictly  to  their  original  modes  of  living 
and  tribal  customs.  Mission  schools  here  and  there,  as 
well  as  others  conducted  by  the  traders,  have  been  long 
established,  and  some  have  produced  expert  copyists, 
clerks  and  bookkeepers.  Natives  are  found  who  speak 
Russian  or  a  few  words  of  English,  but  ordinarily,  be- 
yond that,  with  the  exception  of  the  Chimmesyan,  their 
education  has  not  advanced. 

The  confusion  in  geographical  names  referred  to 
exists  from  the  same  causes  to  even  a  greater  extent  in 
the  designation  of  native  tribes  and  no  two  reports  agree 
either  in  spelling  or  classification. 

In  1879  there  was  a  threatened  outbreak  of  In- 
dians, but  it  soon  subsided;  since  then  the  natives 
have  generally  shown  a  friendly  disposition  toward 
the  whites,  though  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  con- 
tact has  not  been  frequent  and  their  good  will  has 
usually  been  secured  by  remunerative  employment  and 
bestowal  of  gifts.  'In  all  dealings  with  them  a  thoroughly 
understood  bargain  should  be  negotiated  through  a 
reliable  and  competent  interpreter  and  contact  with  them 
in  all  cases  should  be  characterized  by  generosity  and 


ii%l 


m  !  ^ 


I !:-: 


I 


46  ALAPKA. 

forbearance,  ever  remembering  that  they  are  untutored 
savages,  ;ignorant  of  statute  law  and  the  white  man's 
ways. 

Before  .  the  cession  of  jthe  Territory  to  the  Uni- 
ted States  several  estimates  of  the  population  had 
been  made.  The  report  by  the  Missionary  Priest 
VeniaminoflF  in  1839  included  the  inhabitants  of  all  the 
country  now  called  Alaska,  and  says : 

"The  northwestern  part  of  Amtrica  from  Behring 
Strait  to  the  meridian  of  Mount  Saint  Elias,  or  141" 
west  of  Greenwich,  and  all  the  islands  situated  along  the 
coast  of  America  farther  to  the  eastward,  and  a  por- 
tion of  the  mainland  to  a  distance  of  50  versts  from 
the  sea-shore  down  to  longitude  130°  and  latitude 
50",  belongs  to  Russia  aud  is  bounded  in  the  east  by  the 
British  Possessions.  Our  America  is  peopled  with  a 
multitude  of  tribes  and  races,  the  number  of  which  is,  of 
course,  unknown  to  us ;  but  as  far  as  the  names  of  tribes 
in  our  part  of  America  have  been  ascertained,  they  are  as 
follows  : 

I. — The  Kolosh,  inhabiting  the  islands  and  the  nar- 
row strip  of  the  American  continent  at  the 
extreme  southeastern  limits  of  the  Russian 
Possessions,  whose  number  is  now  about 5,000 

2. — The   Oughalentze,  living  near  Mount  Saint 

Elias,  numbering  not  more  than 150 

3. — The  Mednovtze,  who  live  on  Copper  River,  to 

the  number  of 300 

4. — The  Kolchane,  living  far  away  in  the  interior  of 
the  continent  near  our  boundaries;  their  num- 
ber is  unknown 

5. — The  Chugach,  living  on  the  gulf  of  ..he  same 

name,  numbering  now 47 1 

6. — The  Kenaitze,  living  on  the  shores    of    the 

Gulf  of  Kenai,  numbering .1 ,628 


ALASKA. 


47 


7. — The  inhabitants  of  the  southern  shore  of  the 

Aliaska  Peninsula,  numbering 1,600 

— The  Aglegmute,  on  the  northern  shore  of 
the  Aliaska  Peninsula,  numbering 402 

— The  Kadiaks  or  Koniagi,  living  on  the  island 
of  Kadiak,  numbering i  ,508 

— The  Oonalashkans  or  Aleuts,  inhabiting  the 
Fox  Islands  and  a  portion  of  the  Aliaska 
Peninsula,  numbering 1.497 

— The  Atkhans  or  Atkha  Aleuts,  inhabiting  the 
Andreieanof  Islands,  numbering 750 

— The  Kuskokvims,  living  on  the  river  Knskok- 
vim,  which  empties  into  Behring  Sea,  n\  iber- 
ing  about 7,000 

— The  Kvikhpaks,  Kiatentze,  Malegmute  and 
other  tribes  inhabiting  the  shores  of  Behr- 
ing Sea  and  the  rivers  emptying  into  the 
same,  and  also  the  coast  of  the  Northern 
Ocean,  whose   number   cannot   be   less   than 

all  those  :hove  mentioned  together 

To  this  native  population  of  Russian  America  we 
must  idd  Russians  living  in  the  various  settle- 
ments to  the  number  of.    706 

Creoles,  that  i^  offspring  of  Russians  from  native 
American  mothers,  who  form  the  foundation 
for  a  class  of  American  citizens  of  Russia, 
numbering 1.295 


8 


10 


II 


12 


13 


22,307 
ConsecjM        y,  our  total  population  in  America  may 
be  given  as  follows : 

Known  and  counted 10,313 

Known  but  not  counted 1 2,500 

Estimated  only - 17,000 


Making  a  total  of 39.8 13 

A  special  inspector  of  the  Imperial  Russian  Govern- 
ment, Kostlivtzov,  reported  the  population  of  Russian 
America  January  i,  1863,  to  be: 


ii 


ir  w 


48 


ALASKA. 


Tribes.  Males.  Females. 

Creoles 925 971   . . 

Aleut 1,236 1,192.  .  . 

Kenartze 430 507 . . . 


Total. 
.1,896 
.2,428 
937 


Kadiaks 1,115 1,102 2,217 

Chugach 226 ?3o 456 


Totals 3,992  4,002  *7.934 

To  this  Kostlivtzov  added  au  estimate  of  Anahs 

and  Copper  River  natives 2,500 

And  Kolosh  or  Thlinkets 20,000 


Making  a  total  of 30,434 

If  the  difference  in  classification  be  neglected,  this  is 
sufficiently  like  the  results  of  Veniaminoff's  work  in 
1839  to  give  confidence  in  the  approximate  accuracy  of 
both.  A  considerable  reduction  in  the  population 
after  Veniaminoff's  report  might  be  traced  to  the 
ravages  of  small-pox,  which  broke  out  in  1836,  and 
raged  for  a  year  after  his  work  was  completed. 

No  better  information  than  the  foregoing  existed 
concerning  the  Alaskan  population  when  the  Territory 
was  purchased  of  Russia,  and  at  that  time  three  years 
were  given,  by  the  terras  of  the  treaty,  to  the  in- 
habitants, in  which  to  remove  to  Russia  or  become 
subjects  of  the  United  States. 

Our  Government  made  no  effort  at  enumeration  until 
18S0,  when  Mr.  Ivan  Petroff  reported  the  population 
as  follows: 


•This  Is  2,191  lesfs  than  the  Russian- American  Company's 
total  for  the  same  year,  but  the  Russians  and  Northern  natives 
were  omitted. 


n  yii 


ALASKA.  49 

Whites 430 

Creoles 1.756 

Eskimo 17,617 

Aleut 2, 145 

Athabaskan 3.927 

Thlinket 6,763 

Total 33.426 

The  census  of  1890  is  as  follows: 

Whites 4,298 

Indians 23,531 

Mongolians 2,288 

Mixed  blood i  ,935 

Total 32,052 

Or  about  one  inhabitant  to  18  square  miles  of  Terri- 
tory. 

There  are  six  principal  divisions  or  nations  of  the 
aboriginal  inhabitants:  The  Eskimo  (Innuit) ;  the  Thlin- 
ket (Kolosh);  the  Athabaskan  (Tiuneh);  the  Aleut* 
(Oonagan);  the  Chimmesyan  and  the  Skittagaten  (Haida). 
There  are  many  tribes  and  subdivisions. 

The  Eskimo,  numerically  thestrongest  (about  13,000), 
are  the  predominating  native  element  and  occupy  the 
coast  country  from  Point  Barrow  to  the  mouth  of  the 
Copper  River;  a  few  scattered  bands  have  been  seen 
east  of  Point  Barrow. 

The  Eskimo  are  a  peaceful,  inoffensive  people, 
strong  and  hardy  by  nature,  and  though  of  low  mental 
development,  show  considerable  adaptability  to  civili- 
zation. They  have  had  comparatively  little  contact  with 
the  whites,  who,  however,  credit  them  with  being,  as  a 

♦Some  ethtioloj^Ists  class  the  Aleuts  as  Eskimo,  thus  reduc- 
ing the  number  of  separate  nations  to  five. 


11 


!J1    Li''    '  i 


50 


ALASKA. 


m 


ii 


rule,  fair  and  honest  in  their  dealings.  They  subsist 
almost  entirely  upon  sea  food  and  preserve  their  native 
customs  and  dress.  Of  the  Eskimo  there  are  twenty- 
five  separate  tribes,  as  follows : 

The  Nuwiikmiut  (143)*;  extending  from  Dease  Inlet 
about  50  miles  westward,  with  their  principal  village 
at  Point  Barrow. 

The  Utkeagoik  (193) ;  joining  the  Nuwukmiut  on  the 
west  and  extending  to  the  158th  meridian. 

The  Sidar/i  (47) ;  a  very  small  tribe  residing  along  the 
coast  from  the  158th  meridian  to  the  mouth  of  the 
Koo. 

The  Utuka  (48)  and  the  Kukpaurungmiui  (52);  occupy- 
ing the  coast  for  about  100  miles  west  of  the  Koo. 

The  Tikera  (about  300) ;  occupy  the  peninsula  between 
capes  Beaufort  and  Lisburne.  Their  principal  vil- 
lage is  Initkilly,  where  the  coal  mines,  operated  by 
Americans,  give  employment  to  many  of  this  tribe. 

The  Nunatogmiut  and  Kuangmiut  (123)  (the  Kopagniiut 
of  Mr.  Dall) ;  live  along  Kotzebue  Sound  and  rivers 
emptying  into  it. 

The  Mahlemiut  (630) ;  reside  along  Kotzebue  Sound. 

The  Kinegan  (652) ;  scattered  along  the  coast  of  Behring 
Strait.  This  tribe  is  well  known  to  whalers  and 
tradesmen. 

The  Kaviagmiut  (427) ;  occupy  the  peninsula  between 
Kotzebue  and  Norton  Sounds. 

The  Unmdjek  (267) ;  reside  on  St.  Lawrence  Island, 
though  in  habits,  customs  and  dress  are  identical 
with  the  inhabitants  of  the  coast  and  interior  of 
Siberia. 


*The  numbers  in  parentheses  refer  to  popiilation,  and  are 
taken  from  the  census  of  1890. 


#^1 


ALASKA. 


51 


The  Ukivakmiut  (200) 
Th&Kaviagmiut  (427) 
The  Unaligniiut  {\\6) 
The  Chnagmiui  (621) 
The  Mahlemiut  (630)  J 


These  are  all  members  of 
the  once  powerful  Mahlemiut 
tribe.  They  occupy  Univak  Is- 
land, the  northern  and  eastern 
shore  of  Norton  Sound; 
the  Chnagmiut  occupy  the 
mouth  of  the  Yukon  and 
banks  of  that  stream  as  far  as 
Rasboinik  on  the  south,  and 
I  Andreafsky  on  the  nor     . 


The  Kwikhpagniiut  or  IkogmiiU  (172);  live  on  the 
banks  of  the  Yukon  from  Andreafsky  to  the  mouth 
of  the  Chageluk. 

The  Maglemiut  (2,147) ;  these  people  inhabit  the  country 
embraced  in  the  deltas  of  the  Yukon  and  Kuskok- 
wim  rivers  and  the  region  between  these  streams. 

The  iVunivagmiut  (702) ;  inhabit  Nunivak  Island. 

The  Kuskwogmiut,  (3,287);  these,  the  largest  of  the 
Eskimo  families,  are  thickly  scattered  along  the 
shore  of  Bristol  Bay  from  Cape  Avinof  to  the  mouth 
of  the  Kvichavak  River. 

The  Togiagmiut  (200) ;  occupy  the  basin  and  lake  sys- 
tem of  the  Togiak  River. 

The  Kiatagmitit  (214);  occupy  the  interior  region  of 
the  Kvichavak  River. 

The  Aglemiut  (767) ;  live  on  the  northern  shore  of 
the  Alaskan  Peninsula,  from  the  head  of  Bristol 
Bay  and  as  far  west  as  Unangashik.  This  being 
the  region  occupied  by  some  of  the  largest  can- 
neries and  trading  posts,  many  of  this  tribe  find 
employment. 

The  Kaniagmmt  (1,154);  occupy  the  Kenai  Peninsula 
and  Kadiak  Islands. 

The  Chugachigmiut  (433) ;  inhabit  the  shores  and  islands 
of  Prince  William  Sound. 


i^ 


)•  I 


1  f\ 


52 


ALASKA. 


The  Thlinket  (Kolosh)  is  the  second  family  in 
numerical  strength,  (about  5,000)  though  perhaps  first 
in  commercial  importance,  as  they  are  already  well 
known  to  American  traders,  and  come  more  in  contact 
with  miners  and  travelers  than  any  of  the  others. 

They  occupy  the  coast  and  most  of  the  islands 
from  the  mouth  of  Copper  River  to  the  southern  ex- 
tremity of  Alaska.  They  are  a  brave  and  hardy  people, 
and  are  said  to  be  industrious  and  zealous  workers. 
Contact  with  the  whites  has  materially  modified  their 
mode  of  life  in  many  respects,  and  considerable  progress 
has  been  made  in  rudimentary  education.  They  have 
slaves,  but  the  freedom  of  the  latter  is  almost  equal 
to  that  of  their  owners.  There  are  thirteen  tribes  of 
the  Thlinket  nation: 

The  Ugaleiits  (154);  extend  from  Copper  River  to  Con- 
troller Bay. 

The  Yaktag  (82) ;  are  just  south  of  the  Ugaleuts. 

The  Yakutat  (350) ;  occupy  the  coast  as  far  as  Lituya 
Bay. 

The  Chilkats  (812);  this  is  one  of  the  most  powerful 
of  the  Thlinket  tribes,  and  occupies  the  country 
about  the  L<ynn  Canal,  including  Dyea.  They  have 
for  years  acted  as  middlemen  between  the  traders 
and  the  natives  of  the  interior,  and  have  managed 
to  gather  considerable  property.  These  are  the 
natives  who  will  be  met  at  Dyea  and  Skagua 
engaged  in  packing  freight  over  the  mountain 
passes. 

The  Huna  (about  600) ;  inhabit  Chichaghof  Island. 

The  Auks  (about  300) ;  live  on  Admiralty  and  Douglas 
Islands,  and  are  also  to  be  found  in  Juneau. 


ALASKA. 


53 


The  Taku  (225)  and  Hutznahti  (about  500) ;  have  their 
settlements  as  far  south  as  Holkhan  Bay  and  the 
southern  portion  of  Admiralty  Islands. 

The  Sitka-Kwan  (814) ;  the  largest  and  most  civilized 
tribe  of  the  Thlinket,  occupy  Baranof  Island,  and 
individuals  are  to  be  found  everywhere  in  South- 
eastern Ala.ska. 

The  Kakey  (234) ;  are  on  the  island  of  the  same  name. 

The  Siikeeny  or  Stikine  (300);  inhabit  Wrangell  and 
Etholin  Islands,  and  a  few  families  are  on  the  main- 
land at  the  mouth  of  the  Stikine  River,  where 
they  engage  in  taking  freight  across  the  moun- 
tain passes. 

The  Tongass  (255) ;  occupy  the  southern  extremity  ot 
the  Territory. 

The  Hanegas  (about  300) ;  are  to  be  found  in  the 
northern  part  of  Prince  of  Wales  Island. 

These  divisions  are  not  marked  and  there  is  but  little 
tribal  cohesion.  The  entire  Thlinket  nation  is  divided 
into  two  clans,  the  Wolf  and  the  Raven,  and  a  member 
of  one  clan  must  marry  a  member  of  the  other. 

The  Thlinket  is  said  to  occupy  a  very  low  moral 
plane,  and  to  have  no  conception  of  the  truth.  They 
are  addicted  to  liquor,  and  both  sexes  use  tobacco  to 
excess. 

The  third  family  in  numerical  strength  (about  2,900), 
the  Athabaskans,  (called  also  the  Tiuneh*  and  the  Iii- 
galiksf)  occupy  the  interior  along  the  Yukon  and  its 
tributaries  to  about  the  mouth  of  the  Tanana.  They  in- 
clude several  tribes  of  the  North   American   Indians 

» 

who  are  scattered  from  the  Rio  Grande  to  the  Arctic 
Ocean.     It  is  with  diflBculty  that  they  manage  to  live  by 

*Dall. 
tPetroff. 


•I 

I    ^1 


#; 


■  1 

■m 

'"1 

■M 

■It 

i^H 

■■i 

■pII 


r 


11 


nil 


64 


ALASKA. 


hunting  and  fishing  in  the  streams.  These  Indians 
speak  a  dialect  known  to  the  missionaries  as  Tukudh 
(Takuth),  but  with  travelers  they  converse  in  a  jargon  of 
Canadian  French  and  English,  similar  to  the  Chinook  of 
Southeastern  Alaska,  Oregon  and  Washington.  They 
are  sometimes  referred  to  as  the  Stick  or  Forest  Indians. 
Since  the  establishment  of  mining  camps  in  the  Yukon 
country  their  intercourse  with  the  whites  has  increased, 
but  not  sufficiently  to  have  any  perceptible  influence  to- 
wards civilization,  except  in  the  use  of  cooking  utensils 
and  food  procured  from  traders.  They  are  a  strong 
healthy  people,  and  inclined  to  be  honest  and  trust- 
worthy. 

The  Athabaskans  are  the  only  inhabitants  of  Alaska 
who  under  the  law  are  classed  as  Indians.  All  the  other 
natives  are  subject  to  taxation,  may  sue  in  the  courts 
and  be  sued.* 

There  are  fi^e  tribes  of  Athabaskans: 

The  Kuchin  (580);  include  a  number  of  roving  tribes 
who  occupy  the  upper  Yukon  and  Porcupine 
country. 

The  Ingalik  (about  900) ;  inhabit  the  banks  of  the  Yu- 
kon from  Nulato  to  Kozerevsky. 

The  Kuilchana  {ti^qowX  300);  is  a  roving  band  liable  to 
be  seen  anywhere  in  Central  Alaska  from  the  head- 
waters of  the  Kuskokwim  River  in  the  south  to  the 
Chageluk  and  Innoko  in  the  north. 

The  Kenai  or  Tnaina  (about  1,000);  are  found  near  the 
shores  of  Cook's  Inlet  and  on  the  Sushitna  and 
Kinik  rivers  and  the  neighboring  lakes. 


*See  United  States  Circuit  Court,  District  of  Oregon,  May  i, 
1896. — Federal  Reporter,  Volume  27,  page  351. 


WPlI 


ALASKA. 


66 


The  Afna,  better  known  as  the  "Copper  River  Indians" 
(142);  lead  a  nomadic  life  in  the  region  of  Copper 
River,  going  sometimes  as  far  as  the  headwaters  of 
the  Yukon. 

The  fourth  nation  in  numerical  strength  (about 
1,000),  the  Aleut  (as  before  said,  sometimes  classed  as 
Eskimo),  inhabit  the  northern  portion  of  the  Alaskan 
Peninsula  and  all  the  islands  of  the  Aleutian  chain. 
They  are  rapidly  losing  their  native  individuality  and 
show  in  many  ways  the  effect  of  Russian  influence ;  they 
speak  Russian,  belong  to  the  Russian  Orthodox  Church 
(Greek- Catholic),  and  have  grown  in  physical  appearance 
to  resemble  that  people. 

They  are  kindly  disposed  and  gentle,  though  through 
immoral  practices  have  become  diseased  and  physically 
weakened. 

The  Chiramesyan  or  Tsimpseans  (about  1,000),  the 
fifth  of  the  Alaskan  nations,  have  taken  up  their  resi- 
dence in  that  Territory  since  its  purchase  from  Russia. 
They  came  from  British  Columbia,  under  the  influence 
of  an  English  missionary  named  Duncan,  in  1887,  and 
settled  on  Annette  Island  (near  the  mouth  of  Portland 
Channel),  and  in  1891  Congress  set  aside  that  island  as  a 
permanent  home  for  them.*  The  members  of  this  na- 
tion are  far  advanced  in  civilization  and  are  regarded  by 
neighboring  tribes  as  a  superior  people.  They  have  laid 
out  the  town  of  Port  Chester,  with  its  schools,  churches, 
stores,  etc.  The  town  is  one  of  the  industrial  centers  of 
Alaska  and  has  a  large  cannery,  steam  saw-mill  and 
various  shops.  Almost  the  entire  population  speak 
English  and  have  the  customs,  manners  and  dress  of  the 
whites.  Among  them  are  to  be  found  skilled  musicians 
and  eloquent  orators. 

•Act  of  March  3,  1891. 


1 


r 


66 


ALASKA. 


I 


The  Skittagetan  or  Haida  (about  400),  the  last  and 
smallest  of  the  native  nations,  are  a  vigorous,  healthy 
people,  inhabiting  the  southern  half  of  Prince  of  Wales 
Island.  They  live  in  a  semi-civilized  manner  as  regards 
their  houses,  furniture  and  cooking.  They  are  invet- 
erate gamblers,  pr.nctice  polygamy,  hold  slaves,  and  are 
altogether  without  moral  principles.* 

Detailed  descriptions  of  these  nations,  with  interest- 
ing accounts  of  their  n'odes  of  life,  customs,  dress  and 
occupations,  are  given  bv  Mr,  Petroff  ("  Population  and 
Resources  of  Alaska  'y,  Dr.  Geo.  F.  Wilson,  United 
States  Army,  who  accompanied  lyieutenant  Schwatka  in 
1883,  and  by  Mr.  Dall,  in  "  Alaska  and  Its  Resources." 

Governor  John  G.  Brady,  of  Alaska,  in  his  last 
annual  report,  estimates  the  population  at  30,000  na- 
tives and  10,000  whites.  The  white  population  is  scat- 
tered over  the  Territory,  gathered  at  the  various  trading- 
posts  and  in  the  mining-camps.  It  has  materially  in- 
creased within  the  last  year,  and  a  large  influx  of  pros- 
pectors, miners  and  traders  may  be  expected  to  follow 
the  verified  reports  of  the  rich  gold  deposits  located 
within  the  Territory. 

There  was  no  Territorial  Government  established 
until  1884,  when  Congress  made  provision  for  a  civil 
government  for  Alaska,  and  James  H.  Kinkead,  the  first 
Governor  of  the  Territory,  was  appointed.  He  was  suc- 
ceeded in  1885  by  Governor  Alfred  P.  Swineford,  who 
held  ofl5ce  until  1889,  when  Lyman  E.  Knapp  was  in- 
stalled as  Governor.  Governor  Knapp  was  followed  in 
oflBce  by  James  Sheakly,  who  remained  Chief  Executive 
of  the  Territory  until  1897,  when  the  present  Governor, 

*Report  on  Education  in  Alaska,  1896 


CO 

w 
w 
o 

w 


o 


OS 

ft 
w 
o 

» 
o 

od 
w 


o 


Si 


»»i 


Pfl 


^liPitl 


ALASKA. 


87 


John  G.  Brady,  was  appointed.*  No  special  laws  have 
been  enacted  for  the  government  of  Alaska,  but  the  laws 
of  Oregon  are  applicable  in  the  Territory.  There  is  a 
district  court  which  sits  alternately  at  Sitka  and  Wran- 
gell.  There  is  a  land  ofi&ce  at  Sitka,  and  Mr.  Herman, 
Commissioner  of  the  United  States  General  Land  OflBce, 
has  stated  that  the  mineral  land  laws  of  the  United 
States,  the  town-site  laws  (providing  for  the  incorpora- 
tion of  town  sites  and  acquirement  of  title  thereto  from 
the  Government  to  the  trustee)  and  the  law  providing 
for  trade  and  manufactures,  giving  each  qualified  person 
1 60  acres  of  land  in  a  square  and  compact  form,  are  ap- 
plicable to  Alaska.  The  coal  land  regulations  and  the 
public  land  laws  do  not  extend  to  Alaska,  as  the  Terri- 
tory is  expressly  excluded  b)-  the  laws  themselves  from 
their  operation. 

The  patenting  of  mineral  lands  in  Alaska  has  been 
going  on  since  1884. 

The  mining  laws  of  the  United  States  and  of  Canada 
are  to  be  found  in  an  Appendix. 

*NoTR.— The  other  fecleral  officers  are:  a  clerk  of  the  court, 
who  is  ex-ojfficio  Secretary  of  Alaska ;  a  surveyor-general ;  a 
register  of  the  laud  office ;  a  receiver  of  public  moneys  and  a 
United  States  Connnissioner  at  Sitka.  At  Sitka  also  are  :  a  dis- 
trict judge,  United  States  Attorney  and  Assistant  United  States 
Attorney  and  a  United  States  Marshal.  There  are  United  States 
Commissioners  at  Wrangell,  Juneau,  Unalaska,  Kadiak,  Circle 
City,  St.  Michael,  Dyea  and  Uuga. 


r    .|r 


■MX\ 


-5- 


^:i:S3! 


1 


i..t  I 


\m 


ALASKA. 


69 


Chapter  VI. 


RESOURCES  AND  INDUSTRIES. 


"  The  earth  yields  wealth:   from  out  the  earth  come  forth 
riches." 


The  resources  of  Alaska  are  but  slightly  known,  and 
its  industries  are  in  their  infancy.  The  fur  and  lish  in- 
dustries have  been  carried  on  with  profit  for  a  considera- 
ble period  of  time.  Efforts  at  agriculture,  with  varying 
success,  have  been  made  since  its  colonization  by  the 
Russians.  Deposits  of  minerals,  notably  gold,  silver, 
copper,  lead,  iron,  coal  and  oil,  are  known  to  exist,  and 
dense  forCvSts  of  valuable  timber  are  found  in  many  por- 
tions of  the  Territory.  The  obstacles  to  development 
have  not  depended  so  much  upon  the  climate,  which  is 
less  rigorous  than  generally  supposed,  as  upon  the  re- 
moteness of  the  Territory  from  the  markets  of  the  world 
and  the  lack  of  transportation  facilities.  Now  that  the 
discovery  of  gold  in  large  quantities  has  hastened  immi- 
gration in  its  direction,  with  the  result  of  largely  increased 
tran.sportation  and  a  better  knowledge  of  the  country, 
the  re.sources  of  Alaska  will  offer  inviting  fields  for  the 
investment  of  capital  and  the  employment  of  labor. 

About  the  middle  of  the  eighteenth  century  the  Rus- 
sians, attracted  by  the  possibilities  of  profit  in  the  fur 


*»« 


tjii 


n  m 


< 
ill  i 


:i !, 


60 


ALASKA. 


'a 


traffic,  began  the  establishment  of  trading-posts  in  the 
Territory  where  the  fur-bearing  animals  were  numerous 
and  were  taken  in  large  numbers  by  the  natives.  In 
1786  the  discovery,  by  Captain  Pribylof,  of  the  great  fur 
seal  haunts  on  the  islands  which  now  bear  his  name,  gave 
such  great  impetus  to  the  fur  industry  that  it  occupied 
the  attention  of  the  Imperial  Government,  resulting  in 
the  provision  of  regulations,  which,  for  a  period,  limited 
the  annual  catch  of  fur  seals  to  from  30,000  to  40,000, 
with  certain  protection  to  females  and  their  young.  Af- 
terwards, the  number  permitted  to  be  taken  was  in- 
creased to  from  50,000  to  70,000. 

After  the  cession  of  the  Territory  to  the  United 
States,  our  Government,  for  a  consideration  of  $60,000 
per  year,  and  a  small  royalty  on  each  animal  taken, 
leased  the  privilege  of  the  seal  islands,  and  limited  the 
annual  catch  to  100,000,  This  continued  until  1890, 
when  a  new  lease  was  made,  which  stipulated  that  the 
annual  catch  should  not  exceed  100,000,  and  empowered 
the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury  to  make  regulations,  from 
time  to  time,  governing  the  number  that  might  be  taken. 
In  the  meantime,  pelagic  sealing  (taking  seals  in  the 
water)  had  grown  to  such  an  extent  as  to  threaten  the 
extermination  of  the  animals,  and  involved  so  many  in- 
terests, that  the  question  became  the  subject  of  interna- 
tional controversy,  resulting  in  an  agreement  between 
the  United  States  and  Great  Britain  that  the  annual 
catch  on  land  for  the  years  1891-2-3  I  a  limited  to  7,500, 
and  pelagic  sealing  was  prohibited  in  Behring  Sea.  In 
1894  regulations  were  adopted  by  the  Paris  Tribunal  of 
Arbitration  prohibiting  pelagic  sealing  from  the  1st  of 
May  to  the  ist  of  July,  both  inclusive,  each  year;  and 


ALASKA. 


61 


under  regulations  prescribed  by  the  Secretary  of  the 
Treasury,  the  annual  land  catch  has  been  limited  as  fol- 
lows: in  1894  and  1895,  to  15,000  each  year;  in  1896, 
to  30,000,  and  in  1897,  to  21,000. 

In  addition  to  the  fur  of  the  seal  may  be  named  as 
commercially  valuable  those  of  the  sea  otter,  the  land 
otter,  the  beaver,  the  silver  fox,  the  blue  fox,  the  mink, 
the  wolf,  the  marten,  the  squirrel  and  the  muskrat. 
The  skins  of  the  black  and  the  brown  bear  are  also 
met  with. 

Referring  to  the  agricultural  resources  of  Alaska, 
Mr.  PetroflFsays  that  "  it  has  been  settled  by  experiment 
that  cereal  crops  cannot  be  grown,  nor  can  the  fruits 
common  in  the  United  States  be  cultivated  with  success, 
unless  it  be  the  .strawberry  and  cranberry,"  and,  continu- 
ing, he  says : 

"  Taking  up  the  subject  of  the  vegetable  garden,  it 
is  found  that  there  are  localities  in  Alaska  where,  for  the 
last  eighty  years,  or  even  more,  up  to  the  present  date, 
good  potatoes  have  been  raised,  though  I  should  say, 
perhaps,  that  the  raising  of  these  tubers  is  not  a  certain 
success  year  after  year,  except  at  one  or  two  points  within 
the  Alexander  Archipelago,  namely,  at  the  mouth  of  the 
Stak  bin*  River,  at  Fort  Wrangell  and  on  Prince  of  Wales 
Islacd.  The  potato  grounds  of  Alaska,  however,  can, 
with  due  care  and  diligence,  be  made  to  furnish  in  the 
Alexander  Archipelago,  in  Cook  Inlet,  at  Kadiak  Island 
and  inlets  contiguous,  and  at  Bristol  Bay,  a  positive 
source  of  food  supply  to  the  inhabitants.  It  is  not  gen- 
erally known  that  on  Afognak  Island  there  are  nearly 
100  acres  of  laud,  dug  up  in  patches  here  and  there, 


m 


•Stikine. 


t: 
.11 


I 


m 


f  i; 


i 


4i^^ 


l£< 


62 


ALASKA. 


which  are  planted  by  the  inhabitants,  and  from  which 
they  gather  an  annual  harvest  of  potatoes  and  turnips; 
but  there  are  no  fields  spread  out,  squared  up  and  plowed 
anywhere  in  Alaska.  The  little  openings  in  the  forest, 
or  the  cleared  sides  of  a  gently  sloping  declivity,  in 
sheltered  situations,  are  taken  up  by  the  people,  who 
turn  out  with  rude  spades,  of  their  own  manufacture 
principally,  for  the  purpose  of  subjugating  and  overturn- 
ing the  sod.  Many  of  the  gardens,  noticeably  those  at 
the  Kadiak  village,  are  close  by  the  settlement,  while 
others  are  at  some  distance. 

"The  potato  crop  at  Kadiak  in  1880  was  a  total  fail- 
ure, and  this  happens  at  intervals  of  from  four  to  six 
years.  The  winter  preceding  the  planting  in  1 880  was 
an  unusually  cold  and  protracted  one,  and  the  season, 
short  at  the  best,  was  cut  oflF  by  unwonted  early  frosts 
during  September  and  the  latter  part  of  August.  The 
usual  growing  season,  however,  opens  early  in  June, 
from  the  rst  to  the  loth,  and  the  potatoes  are  planted  in 
May,  coming  up  and  growing  freely  until  October,  when 
they  are  harvested.  This  growth  of  potatoes,  fairly  es- 
tablished and  well-defined,  presents  the  only  firm  and 
tangible  evidence  of  agricultural  capacity  within  the 
limits  of  Alaska.  The  turnip  grows  and  flourishes 
wherever  the  potato  succeeds." 

Mr.  PetroflF  comes  to  the  conclusion  that,  although 
Alaska  will  not  support  any  considerable  agricultural 
population,  it  is  apparent  that  the  condition  of  those  who 
reside  in  the  Territory,  engaged  in  other  industries,  will 
be  much  improved  by  better  attention  to  the  develop- 
ment of  the  latent  resources  of  the  soii. 


!P»^I 


ALASKA. 


63 


The  Secretary  of  Agriculture,  under  date  of  January 
i6,  1898,  makes  the  following  statement: 

"  Alaska  is  destined  to  become  a  great  agricultural 
field,  if  it  is  developed  properly.  The  conditions  which 
exist  there  are  paralleled  by  the  conditions  in  Northern 
Scotland,  which  produces  a  rugged  race  which  has  ever 
been  the  mainstay  of  the  British  Navy.  I  believe  that 
before  many  years  the  men  who  are  raised  in  the  rugged 
climate  of  Alaska,  on  such  food  products  as  can  be  culti- 
vated in  that  climate,  will  be  the  hardiest,  healthiest  and 
most  fearless  and  bravest  of  all  the  American  people,  and 
that  they  will  be  the  bone  and  sinew  of  the  American 
Navy  on  the  Pacific  coast. 

"  The  soil  of  Southern  Alaska  along  the  coast  is  rich 
and  best  suited  for  barley  and  oats,  the  food  on  which 
the  Northern  Scotchman  thrives.  Fish  will  be  an  im- 
portant article  of  the  Alaskan's  diet,  and  thus  the  race 
will  become  a  seafaring  one,  well  suited  for  the  United 
States  Navy.  If  we  send  to  the  people  now  living  there 
commissioners  who  can  teach  them  in  a  practical  man- 
ner how  to  raise  these  and  other  foods  profitably,  I  be- 
lieve the  country  will  develop  rapidly.  Grass  is  abund- 
ant, and  can  be  easily  cultivated  further,  and  by  a  special 
process  we  can  teach  the  Alaskans  how  to  make  hay, 
even  in  the  worst  kind  of  Alaskan  climate,  when  it  rains 
a  little  every  day.  We  would  introduce  whatever  veg- 
etables could  be  successfully  cultivated,  and  make  the 
btst  use  of  the  soil  now  so  rich  already. 

"  The  winters  need  not  be  especially  hard,  for  food 
will  be  abundant  in  the  summer,  and  can  be  easily  stored 
away  for  wiuter  consumption.     In  barley  alone  a  tre- 


'ii 


\\% 


C4 


ALASKA. 


mendous  traflBc  could  be  built.  More  thau  enough  bar- 
ley to  feed  a  greater  population  than  is  probable  in  a 
number  of  years  to  come  can  be  successfully  raised,  and 
that  is  a  grain  for  which  there  is  a  constant  market.  I 
repeat  it,  Alaska's  agricultural  possibilities  will  yield 
her  more  money  than  will  ever  be  taken  out  of  the  gold 
mines. 

"Congress,  in  1887,  appropriated  $15,000  for  the 
purpose  of  establishing  an  agricultural  experiment  sta- 
tion in  every  State  and  Territory.  This  was  never  ex- 
tended to  Alaska,  and  a  special  act  of  Congress  has  been 
asked  by  the  Department  of  Agriculture  to  set  aside 
$15,000  for  the  purpose  of  increasing  the  agiicultural 
possibilities  of  that  Territory.  The  department  does  not 
contemplate  establishing  an  experiment  station,  but  asks 
that  Congress  give  the  authority  to  expend  the  money  in 
introducing  various  plants  and  grains  best  suited  to  the 
climate,  and  in  sending  a  corps  of  specialists  to  Alaska 
to  introduce  the  plants  and  educate  the  people  in  their 
use. 

"James  Wii,son, 
' '  Secretary  of  AgriaiUure. ' ' 
(The  Washington  Post,  ^diWVidiry  16,  1898.) 

Mr.  Joseph  I^adue,  speaking  of  Dawson  City  and 
vicinity,  which,  owing  to  the  similar  conditions  existing, 
might  apply  throughout  the  Yukon  country,  is  quoted 
as  saying  : 

"Grain  is  sown  May  15th,  and  barley  and  oats  have 
been  grown  for  the  past  two  years  in  the  vicinity  ;  pota- 
toes will  not  mature  at  Dawson." 


tl 


^"^8ftf¥  ] 


ALASKA. 


65 


\ : 


In  summer  there  is  an  abundance  of  grass  about 
Dawson  City,  and  barley  has  been  raised  in  small  quanti- 
ties in  the  vicinity  of  Forty-Mile  Creek. 

As  to  the  conditions  governing  agriculture  in  the  vi- 
cinity of  Sitka,  Captain  Beardsley,  United  States  Navy, 
says  (Reports  on  Affairs  in  Alaska,  Senate  Executive 
Document  No.  71,  Forty-seventh  Congress,  First  Ses- 
sion, page  125): 

"Whether  it  be  due  to  the  change  of  climate  through 
the  clearing  away  of  many  acres  of  forest,  or  to  improved 
methods,  I  cannot  say,  but  for  several  years  past  excel- 
lent vegetables,  such  as  potatoes,  cabbages,  etc.,  have 
been  raised  yearly  in  the  neighborhood  of  Sitka  and 
Wrangell.  Near  Sitka  there  are  a  large  number  of  plots 
under  cultivation.  I  have  seen,  two  seasons  in  succes- 
sion, lettuce  of  several  varieties;  cabbages  a  yard  across 
before  they  began  to  head,  and  eight  to  ten  inches  in  di- 
ameter headed;  cauliflower  weighing  ten  to  fifteen  pounds; 
Early  Rose  and  Peachblow  potatoes  ranging  from  three 
to  thirty  ounces  each,  and  each  hill  yielding  over  half  a 
bucketful;  turnips  of  very  large  size,  and  cress,  rad- 
ishes, etc.,  in  profusion ;  green  peas  of  excellent  quality, 
and  beds  bordered  by  gooseberries  and  currant  bushes, 
producing  loads  of  fruit.  My  lettuce  bed  kept  me  sup- 
plied from  June  to  September." 

Anent  the  character  of  the  soil  in  the  Yukon  coun- 
try, Mr.  Dall  ("Alaska  and  Its  Resources,"  page  433) 
says : 

"  It  varies  from  rolling  and  somewhat  rocky  hills  to 
broad  and  marshy  plains,  extending  for  miles  on  either 


m 


f 


IP 


i-        i\ 


.^ff^tf 


w 


1^ 


i; 


i! 


Ill 


66 


ALASKA. 


side  of  the  river.  The  underlying  rocks  in  great  part 
are  azoic,  being  conglomerate,  syenite  and  quartzite. 
The  south  shore  of  Norton  Sound  and  portions  of  the 
Kadiac  Peninsula  are  basalt  and  lava.  There  is  on  the 
northeast  shore  of  Norton  Sound  an  abundance  of  sand- 
stone and  clay  beds  containing  lignite.  Sandstone  is 
also  abundant  on  the  Yukon,  alternating  with  the  azoic 
rocks.  The  superincumbent  soil  differs  in  different 
places.  In  some  localities  it  is  clayey,  and  in  such  situ- 
ations is  quite  frequently  covered  with  sphagnum,  which 
always  impoverishes  the  soil  immediately  beneath  it.  In 
others  it  is  light  and  sandy,  and  over  a  large  extent  of 
country  it  is  the  richest  alluvial,  composed  of  very  fine 
sand,  mud  and  vegetable  matter,  brought  down  by  the 
river,  and  forming  deposits  of  indefinite  depth.  *  *  * 
The  soil  is  usually  frozen  to  a  depth  of  three  or  four  feet 
in  ordinary  situations.  In  colder  ones  it  remains  icy  to 
within  eighteen  inches  of  the  surface.  This  layer  of 
frozen  soil  is  six  to  eight  feet  thick.  Below  that  depth 
the  soil  is  destitute  of  ice,  except  in  very  unusual  situa- 
tions." 

Lieutenant  Allen,  United  States  Army  (Report  on 
Expeditions  to  Alaska,  1885),  says: 

"  I  believe  that  lettuce,  radishes,  turnips,  beans,  peas, 
potatoes,  carrots,  and  possibly  buckwheat  and  barley, 
can  be  raised  in  favored  localities  on  the  middle  and  up- 
per Yukon  and  Tanana.  The  climatic  conditions  of  the 
coast  do  not  prevail  here ;  there  is  not  as  much  humid- 
ity. *  *  *  The  summers,  'though  short,  are  very 
hot.  The  sun  is  almost  continually  above  the  horizon, 
and  the  thermometer  has  been  known  to  read  1 1 2  and 
115  degrees  Fahrenheit.  Although  the  soil  usually  re- 
mains frozen  the  year  round  a  depth  of  one  or  two  feet 


ALASKA. 


67 


below  the  surface,  this  would  not  necessarily  interfere 
with  agricultural  pursuits.  By  cultivation  and  proper 
drainage  the  distance  of  the  ice-bed  below  the  surface 
v/ould  be  considerably  increased." 

With  reference  to  cattle  and  other  live-stock,  Mr. 
PetrofF  says : 

"  There  have  been  repeated  attempts  to  raise  stock 
cattle,  sheep  and  hogs  in  large  herds  within  the  borders 
of  Alaska;  The  subject  is  one  in  which  the  Russians 
first  naturally  took  a  deep  interest,  for  they  were  fond  of 
.^ood  living,  and  were  as  desirous  as  any  people  could  be 
to  have  the  best  beef  or  mutton  and  the  .sweetest  pork 
on  their  tables.  They  brought  over  hardy  .selections 
from  the  Siberian  stock,  placing  the  cattle  at  almost 
every  point  of  importance  for  trial.  The  result,  after 
years  of  patient  and  persistent  attention,  was  that  the 
herds  on  Kadiak  Island  throve  the  best  and  became  of 
real  service  in  assisting  to  maintain  the  settlement. 
Here  and  there  is  a  very  fine  ranging  ground  for  pasture, 
and  in  the  summer  there  is  the  greatest  abundance  of 
nutritious  grasses,  but  when  the  storms  of  October, 
freighted  with  snow,  accompanied  by  cold  and  piercing 
gales,  arrive  and  hold  their  own  until  the  following  May, 
the  sleek,  fat  herd  of  September  becomes  very  much 
worn  and  emaciated.  It  has  given  its  owner  an  undue 
amount  of  trouble  to  .shelter  and  feed.  Hay,  however, 
suitable  for  cattle,  or  at  least  to  keep  cattle  alive,  can  be 
cut  in  almost  any  quantities  desired  for  that  purpo.'^e, 
but  the  stress  of  weather  alone,  even  with  abundance  of 
this  feed,  depresses,  as  it  were,  and  enfeebles  the  vitality 
of  the  stock  so  that  the  herds  on  Kadiak  Island  have 
never  increased  to  anything  approximating  a  stock- 
grower's  drove,  rarely  exceeding  fifteen  or  twenty  head 


1 

ijafel 


hi 


08 


ALASKA. 


i 

I'    if 


;'r: 


at  the  most.  Notable  examples  of  small  flocks  of  sheep 
have  been  brought  up  since  the  transfer  and  turned  out  at 
Unalaska,  Unga  and  elsewhere  and  have  done  well.  The 
mutton  of  the  Alaskan  sheep,  when  it  is  rolling  in  its 
own  fat,  as  it  were,  is  pronounced  by  epicures  to  be  very 
fine;  but  the  severe  winters,  which  are  not  so  cold  as 
protracted,  when  the  weather  is  so  violent  that  the  ani- 
mals have  to  huddle  for  weeks  in  some  dark,  low  shelter, 
cause  a  sweating  or  heating  of  the  wool,  which  is  de- 
tached and  falls  oflf,  greatly  enfeebling  and  emaciating 
them  by  spring.  The  practice  of  the  traders  at  some 
places  now  is  to  bring  beef-cattle  up  in  the  spring  from 
San  Francisco,  turn  them  out  into  the  grazing  grounds 
on  the  Aleutian  Islands,  Kadiak,  and  even  to  the  north, 
where  they  speedily  round  out  and  flesh  up  into  the  very 
finest  beeves  by  the  middle  or  end  of  October,  when 
they  are  slaughtered." 

Horses  are  kept  at  Dyea,  and  some  have  found  their 
way  into  the  interior;*  a  few  have  also  been  kept  for 
years  on  Wood  Island,  where  a  field  of  twelve  acres  of 
oats  is  regularly  grown  for  their  u.se;  the  grain  fre- 
quently heads,  but  does  not  ripen,  and  the  crop  is  har- 
vested in  the  green  for  hay. 

The  vast  territory  of  Central  and  Northern  Alaska 
is  unfitted  for  cattle-raising  and  agriculture,  though  it 
produces  an  abundance  of  long,  fibrous  white  moss,  the 
natural  food  of  the  reindeer,  and  Dr.  Jackson  (Reports 
on  Introduction  of  Domestic  Reindeer  in  Alaska,  1896), 
taking  the  statistics  of  the  Scandinavian  Peninsula  as  a 
guide,  estimates  that  Arctic  aud  sub-Arctic  Alaska  can 
support  9,000,000  of  these  animals,  capable  of  furnishing 


♦A  few  horses  have  been  used  at  Forty-Mile  for  several 
years. 


ALASKA. 


69 


a  supply  of  food,  clothing  and  means  of  transportation 
to  a  population  of  a  quarter  of  a  million.  Every  part  of 
the  reindeer  has  economic  value ;  the  flesh  is  very  pal- 
atable, either  fresh  or  cured ;  the  uutanned  skin  is  the 
best  material  for  Arctic  clothing,  and  when  tanned  is 
much  esteemed  by  the  bookbinder,  upholsterer  and 
glove-maker ;  the  hair,  on  account  of  its  buoyancy,  is  ex- 
tensively used  in  the  manufacture  of  life-saving  appa- 
ratus, and  the  horns  and  hoofs  make  an  excellent  quality 
of  glue. 

Reindeer  are  also  useful  as  a  means  of  transporta- 
tion, and  as  such  are  preferable  to  dogs.  The  latter  are 
slow  and  must  be  burdened  with  their  own  food,  while  a 
trained  reindeer  will  travel  in  a  day's  time  twice  or  three 
times  the  distance  covered  by  a  dog-team,  and  at  the  end 
of  the  journey  can  find  in  Alaska  their  natural  food  in 
abundance  when  turned  out.  It  is  said,  however,  that 
the  moisture  continually  present  in  the  soil  induces  a 
hoof  disease,  which  operates  as  a  drawback  to  their  in- 
troduction. There  are  now  over  a  thousand  of  these  an- 
imals in  use  in  the  Territory,  and  steps  have  been  in- 
augurated to  increase  the  number. 

With  regard  to  the  forests  of  Alaska,  Mr.  Petroflf 
says : 

"  The  timber  of  Alaska  extends  over  a  much  larger 
area  than  a  great  many  surmise.  It  clothes  the  steep 
hills  and  mountain  sides  and  chokes  up  the  valleys  of 
the  Alexander  Archipelago  and  the  contiguous  mainland; 
it  stretches,  less  dense,  but  still  abundant,  along  that  in- 
hospitable reach  of  territory  which  extends  from  the 
head  of  Cross  Sound  to  the  Kenai  Peninsula,  where, 
reaching  down  to  the  westward  and  southwestward,  as 
far  as  the  eastern  half  of  Kadi?k  Island,  and  thence 


m 


■Ml'- 


70 


ALASKA. 


lil 


across  Shelikof  Strait,  it  is  found  on  the  mainland  and 
on  the  peninsula  bordering  on  the  same  latitude;  but  it 
is  confined  to  the  interior  opposite  Kadiak,  not  coming 
down  to  the  coast  as  far  eastward  as  Cape  Douglas. 
Here,  however,  it  impinges  on  the  coast,  or  Cook  Inlet, 
reaching  down  to  the  shores  and  extending  around  to 
the  Kenai  Peninsula.  From  the  interior  of  the  penin- 
sula above  referred  to  the  timber  line  over  the  whole  of 
the  interior  of  the  great  area  of  Alaska  will  be  found  to 
follow  the  coast  line  at  varying  distances  of  from  loo  to 
150  miles  from  the  seaboard,  until  that  section  of  Alaska 
north  of  the  Yukon  mouth  is  reached,  where  a  portion  of 
the  coast  of  Norton  Sound  is  directly  bordered  by  timber 
as  far  north  as  Cape  Denbigh.  From  this  point  to  the 
eastward  and  northeastward,  a  line  may  be  drawn  above 
the  Yukon  and  its  immediate  tributaries  as  the  northern 
limit  of  timber  of  any  considerable  extent." 

Of  these  trees,  the  greater  portion  are  of  the  ever- 
green .species,  the  spruce  family  largely  predominating. 
The  spruce  lumber,  however,  is  not  adapted  to  fine  fin- 
ishing on  account  of  the  exudation  when  slightly  heated 
of  a  .sticky,  resinous  gum,  which  is  difficult  to  remove. 
Throughout  the  region  where  the  spruce  flourishes  are 
to  be  found,  especially  along  the  water  courses,  small 
bunches  of  white  birch,  and  on  the  lowlands,  far  beyond 
the  limits  of  the  spruce,  the  alder  and  willow  thrive.  In 
nearly  all  the  timber  sections  of  the  Territory  is  found 
a  species  of  cottonwood,  which  often  grows  to  large  .size, 
but  west  of  the  141st  meridian  no  timber  grows  at  an 
altitude  greater  than  1,000  feet  above  the  sea  level. 

Concerning  the  varieties  and  value  of  the  timber  of 
Alaska,  Mr.  Petroflf  says : 

"  I.    Yellow  Cedar  (Oipri'ssns  Nulkanensis). — This  is 


A  TASK  A. 


71 


one  of  the  most  valuable  woods  on  the  Pacific  coast, 
combining  a  fine,  close  texture  with  great  hardness, 
durability  and  a  peculiar,  but  pleasant  odor.  The  Rus- 
sians named  it  '  dushnik  '  (scented  wood)  on  account  of 
the  last-named  qualities.  In  the  immediate  vicinity  of 
Sitka,  on  Baranof  and  adjoining  islands,  this  tree  was 
nearly  exterminated  by  the  Russians,  but  on  the  Kehk 
Archipelago  (Koo  Island),  and  on  Prince  of  Wales  Island 
and  a  few  others  of  the  Alexander  Archipelago,  near  the 
British  Columbian  frontier,  considerable  bodies  of  it  can 
still  be  found,  and  beyond  the  line,  in  the  Nasse  and 
Skeena  River  valleys,  it  is  also  abundant. 

"  2.  Sitka  Spruce  {Abies  Sitkensis).—  This  is  the  uni- 
versal forest  tree  of  Alaska  and  is  found  of  gigantic 
size  on  the  islands  of  the  Alexander  Archipelago  and  on 
the  shores  of  Prince  William  Sound.  Its  medium  growtli 
it  appears  to  attain  in  the  valleys  of  the  Yukon  and  the 
KuvSkokwim,  while  on  the  east  side  of  Cook  Inlet  and 
on  the  more  northern  uplands  it  is  quite  stunted  and 
dwarfed.  The  Sitka  spruce  is  most  closely  connected 
with  the  various  requirements  of  all  Alaskan  natives  in 
their  domestic  economy,  as  its  timber  is  used  in  the  con- 
struction of  nearly  every  dwelling  throughout  the  coun- 
try, and  even  those  tribes  which  inhabit  barren  coasts, 
far  removed  from  the  limits  of  coniferous  trees,  are  sup- 
plied with  it  through  means  of  freshets  and  ocean  cur- 
rents. The  .sappy  outer  portion  of  the  wood  furnishes 
splinters  and  torches  that  light  up  during  the  long 
months  of  winter  the  dark  dwellings  of  interior  tribes  of 
Tinneh  stock,  who  know  not  the  oil  lamp  of  their  Innuit 
neighbors.  The  same  material  is  also  u.sed  for  sledge 
runners  on  loose  but  crisp-frozen  snow,  over  which  iron 
or  steel  would  drag  with  difficulty,  as  over  deep,  coar.se 


rr^ 


mmm 


72 


ALASKA. 


sand.  The  Thlinket  and  the  Hyda  fashion  their  buoy- 
ant and  graceful  canoes,  both  large  and  small,  fram 
spruce  logs,  and  split  from  them  also  the  huge  planks 
used  in  the  construction  of  their  houses.  The  lumber 
manufactured  from  the  Sitkci  spruce  is  much  less  dura- 
ble than  the  yellow  cedar,  very  knotty,  and  consequently 
not  adapted  for  ship-building. 

"  3.  Hemlock  (//^•W  Mariensiana). — Though  this 
tree  generally  exceed)  i-  •  spruce  in  size,  it  is  of  rare  oc- 
currence, much  less  valuable  as  timber,  but  well  adapted 
for  fuel 

"  4.  Balsam  Fir  {Abies  Canadensis). — This  tree  is 
found  only  in  small,  scattered  bodies,  and  is  of  little 
value  as  timber,  but  the  natives  use  its  bark  for  tanning 
and  for  other  purposes. 

"  5.  Scrub  Pine  {Pinus  Contorio). — The  scrub  pine  is 
found  throughout  the  interior  of  Alaska  in  small,  scat- 
tered bodies  up  to  the  highest  altitude,  but  it  is  of  no 
value  as  timber. 

"  Thus,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  forests  of  Alaska  are 
altogether  coniferous,  as  the  small  bodies  of  birch  and 
the  alder  and  willow  thickets  on  the  lower  Yukon  and 
Kuskokwim  rivers  can  scarcely  be  considered  to  come 
under  this  head.  Aside  from  the  yellow  cedai ,  which  is 
rare,  the  timber-wealth  of  Alaska  consists  of  the  Sitka 
spruce,  which  is  not  only  abundant  and  large  (trees  of 
from  three  to  four  feet  in  diameter  being  quite  common 
in  Southeastern  Alaska  and  Prince  William  Sound),  but 
also  generally  accessible. 

"  To  give  even  an  approximate  estimate  of  the  area 
of  timbered  lands  in  Alaska  is  at  present  impossible,  in 
view  of  our  incomplete  knowledge  of  the  extent  of 
mountain  ranges,  which,  though  falling  within  the  tini- 


'r. 


'SfSSssI 


c. 


2 


■y. 
■y. 


•y. 


p 

? 


« 


'^ 


rh 


73 

y. 


H 
U 

w 


A L  I.SAM. 


73 


'ji 


H 
W 

r/3 


ber  limits,  must  be  deducted  from  the  superficial  area  of 
forest  covering. 

"  A  few  small  saw-mills  of  exceedingly  limited  capac- 
ity have  been  erected  at  various  points  in  Southeastern 
Alaska  to  supply  the  local  demand  of  trading-posts  and 
mining-camps;  but  finished  building  lumber  is  still 
largely  imported,  even  into  this  heavily  timbered  region. 
In  all  Western  Alaska  but  one  small  saw-mill  is  known 
to  exist,  which  is  on  Wood  Island,  St.  Paul  Harbor,  Ka- 
diak.  The  mill  was  first  set  up  to  supply  sawdust  for 
packing  ice,  but  since  the  collapse  of  that  industry,  its 
operations  have  been  spasmodic  and  not  worth  mention- 
ing. Lumber  from  Puget  Sound  and  British  Columbia 
mills  is  shipped  to  nearly  all  ports  in  Western  Alaska  for 
the  use  of  whites  and  half-breeds,  while  the  natives  in 
their  more  remote  settlements  obtain  planks  and  boards 
by  the  very  laborious  process  of  splitting  logs  with  iron 
or  ivory  wedges.  On  the  treeless  isles  of  the  Shumagin 
and  Aleutian  groups,  as  well  as  in  the  southern  settle- 
ments of  the  Alaskan  Peninsula,  even  fire-wood  is  im- 
ported from  more  favored  sections  of  the  Territory,  and 
commands  high  prices. 

"  The  drift  wood  washed  upon  the  shores  of  Behring 
Sea  and  the  Arctic  is  of  very  little  value  as  building  ma- 
terial, and  cannot  be  worked  into  lumber." 

In  his  report  for  the  fiscal  year  1891,  Governor  Knapp, 
of  Alaska,  speaking  of  the  fish  industry  of  the  Terri- 
tory, says  : 

"  Among  the  resourv^es  of  Alaska  are  the  products  of 
the  .sea.  The  native  population  hive  always  obtained 
much  of  their  food  supply  from  the  waters,  and,  in  a  less 
degree,  their  clothing  and  many  of  the  conveniences  of 
life.     Their  winter  supply  of  food  is  still  largely  made 


I  i  J 


«: 


74 


ALASKA. 


up  of  dried  fish,  sea-weed  and  fish-eggs,  while  fresh  fish 
are  eaten  at  all  seasons  of  the  year,  not  only  by  the  na- 
tives, but  by  all  classes  of  people,  and  the  abundance  of 
this  product  insures  the  most  thriftless  with  a  ready 
means  of  subsistence. 

"  Salmon  fishing  is  by  far  the  largest  and  most  im- 
portant industry.  Thirty-seven  canneries  and  seven  or 
more  salting  establishments  are  reported  as  in  operation 
in  1890.  The  aggregate  pack  of  the  canneries  was 
688,332  cases  of  four  dozen  one-pound  cans,  falling  a  lit- 
tle short  of  the  pack  of  1889.  The  amount  of  salted 
salmon  was  about  7,300  barrels,  a  little  more  than  the 
year  previous.  These  salmon-fisheries  represent  a  capi- 
tal of  about  $4,250,000,  and  they  give  employment  to 
about  2,000  white  laborers,  2,500  Chinamen  and  1,000 
natives,  and  require  in  their  business,  for  transportation 
and  their  work,  about  100  steam  vessels  and  500  fishing 
boats.  The  white  and  Chinese  laborers  do  not  usually 
remain  in  the  Territory  after  the  season  is  over.  Below 
is  given  a  comparative  statement  of  the  canned  product 
since  1 883 : 


YEAR.  TOTAL  PACK, 

CASES. 

1883 36,000 

1884 45,000 

1885 74,800 

1886 120,700 

1887 190,000 


YEAR.  TOTAL  PACK, 

CASKS. 

1888 439.293 

1889 702,993 

i8yo 688,332 


Total 2,297,118 

In  1896  the  product  of  the  different  canneries  was 
valued  at  $2,383,757,  and  the  salmon  pack  for  the  year 
amounted  to  949,645  cases  of  four  dozen  one-pound  cans 
to  the  case,  and  10,000  barrels,-'-  requiring  the  employ- 


•Report  of  Governor  Brady  for  1S97. 


ALASKA. 


ment  of  over  5,000  people,  who  earned  wages  amount- 
ing to  $130,000. 

Of  the  salmon  in  Alaskan  waters,  in  sufficient  quan- 
tities to  constitute  a  commercial  and  economic  resource, 
there  are  several  species,  including  the  red,  the  king,  the 
silver,  the  hump-back,  the  dog,  the  steel-head  and  the 
'*  Dolly  Varden "  varieties.  The  salmon  live  in  salt 
water,  but  ascend  the  streams  in  the  spring  of  the  year 
to  spawn  in  fresh  water.  Under  an  Act  of  Congress  ap- 
proved June  9,  1896,  the  erection  of  any  dam,  barricade, 
or  other  obstruction  in  the  streams  to  impede  their  prog- 
ress is  prohibited  under  penalty  of  a  fine  of  $250  for 
every  day  such  obstructions  are  maintained.  Govern- 
ment officers,  under  the  control  of  the  Treasur>-  De- 
partment, are  present  to  enforce  the  provisions  of  the 
law. 

There  are  two  fish-hatcheries,  one  at  Karluk.  where 
5,500,000  cggi^  were  .secured,  and  the  other  on  Etholiu 
Island,  which  produced  over  2,000,000  eggs. 

Next  in  importance  to  the  salmon-fishing  industry  is 
the  codfish  business,  which  has  been  carried  on  about 
the  Aleutian  Islands  and  in  Behring  Sea  since  1S65. 
The  catch  in  1890  amounted  to  a  total  of  1,138,000  fish, 
valued  at  $569,000.  Since  the  beginning  of  the  busi- 
ness in  1865,  there  have  been  taken  25,723,000  fish, 
valued  at  $ 1 2,86 1 ,650.  The  cod  banks  in  Alaskan  waters, 
though  known  to  be  of  wide  extent,  have  not  been  suf- 
ficiently surveyed  to  exactly  define  their  limits.  Shum- 
agin  Bank,  just  south  of  the  island  of  the  same  name, 
covers  a1:>out  4,400  scjuare  miles ;  Slime  Bank,  north  of 
Unimak  Island,  has  an  area  of  1,445  square  miles;  Alba- 
tross Bank,  .southeast  of  Kadiak,  extends  over  2.900 
square  miles;  Bainl  Bank,  north  of  the  Alaskan  Penin- 


II  ^ 


7fi 


ALAHKA. 


ii(i 


ill' 


V 


; 


III 


sula,  covers  an  area  of  9,200  square  miles,  while  the 
great  Portland  Bank,  northeast  of  Kadiak,  though  not 
surveyed,  is  of  great  area.  Over  all  the  cod  banks  there 
are  from  fifteen  to  fifty  fathoms  of  water,  with  fine,  gray 
sand  bottom. 

At  Kilisnoo  there  is  "  The  Alaska  Oil  and  Guano 
Company,"  giving  employment  to  about  100  men,  half 
of  whom  are  white,  the  remainder  Indians  and  China- 
men. They  have  vessels  and  appliances  for  taking  fish. 
In  1 89 1  the  product  of  this  factory  was  300,000  barrels 
of  oil,  800  tons  of  guano,  and  700  barrels  of  salt  salmon. 
The  oil  is  worth  about  30  cents  per  gallon  and  the  guano 
$30  per  ton.  In  1896  the  product  of  this  factory  was 
25,750  barrels,  90,650  gallons  of  oil,  550  tons  of  guano, 
700  half-barrels  of  salt  herring ;  total  value,  $38,000. 
The  chief  source  of  the  product  is  the  herring,  which  is 
rich  in  oil,  and  very  abundant  in  the  still  waters  at  differ- 
ent places  from  August  to  February.  Its  flesh  is  highly 
esteemed  as  food,  and  is  also  used  as  bait  for  taking  hali- 
but and  other  large  fish. 

Halibut  are  plentiful  throughout  the  entire  year  in 
Southern,  Central  and  Western  Alaskan  waters.  They 
range  in  weight  from  15  to  250  pounds,  those  weighing 
50  to  75  pounds  being  preferred. 

In  the  Yukon  are  found  the  grayling,  white  fish  and 
burbot  (known  in  Alaska  as  the  "  losh  ")  in  great  num- 
bers. In  Southeastern  Alaska  black  bass  are  abundant, 
and  pike  and  trout  are  found  in  nearly  all  the  streams. 
In  1893  the  investment  in  the  Alaskan  fishing  industry, 
including  cash  capital,  vessels,  buildings,  etc.,  amounted 
to  $2,609,650. 

The  whaling  business  has  been  carried  on  in  the 


I   >l 


ALASiKA. 


t  i 


^i 


waters  adjacent  to  Alaska  for  many  years.  Governor 
Knapp,  in  his  report  for  1892,  says: 

"  The  whaling  business,  in  which  48  vessels  are  en- 
gaged, resulted  in  a  catch  for  1891  of  12,228  barrels  of 
oil,  186,250  pounds  of  bone,  and  1,000  pounds  of  ivory. 
The  total  value  was  $1,218,293." 

In  the  eighteen  years  from  1874  to  1891,  inclusive, 
the  whale  catch  was  318,917  barrels  of  oil,  4,931,950 
pounds  of  bone,  and  272,410  pounds  of  ivory. 

With  regard  to  the  mineral  resources  of  Alaska,  we 
have  but  little  information,  and,  owing  to  the  difficulties 
attending  the  careful  survey  of  the  country,  much  time 
must  elapse  before  accurate  knowledge  can  be  obtained, 
or  any  great  development  expected. 

Gold,  silver,  copper,  lead  and  iron  have  been  found  ; 
extensive  coal  and  iron  fields  are  known  to  exist,  and  oil 
is  reported.  In  the  Copper  River  country  the  Indians 
display  articles  of  pure  copper,  and  the  metal  is  said  to 
be  very  abundant. 

According  to  Professor  J.  Edward  Spurr,  of  the 
United  States  Geological  Survey,  pure  native  silver  is 
frequently  found,  and  the  metal  is  widely  diffused  in 
combination  with  gold.  In  1896  the  silver  yield  of  the 
Territory  was  valued  at  $45,798.  The  Yukon  country 
also  produced  considerable  platinum.  The  gold  produc- 
tion will  be  referred  to  in  a  .separate  chapter. 


<  ii 


h 


fi 


ALASKA. 


7}> 


Chapter  VII. 


GOLD -DISCOVERY,  DISSEMINATION  AND 

PRODUCT. 


"  Heaven's  pavctneHt  here  is  stored — uubunned  heaps  of  hid- 
den treasure." 


Gold*  ha.s  been  found  in  greater  or  less  quantities  over 
a  wide  expanse  of  country  in  Alaska  and  adjacent  terri- 
torj'.  The  exact  date  of  its  discovery  is  uncertain.  A 
Russian  engineer  named  Doroshin  discovered  the  metal 
in  small  quantities  on  the  Kenai  Peninsula  in  1848  and 
continued  his  explorations  in  1850- r,  without,  however, 
finding  anything  of  sufficient  importance  to  attract 
attention. 

In  i860,  it  is  said,  an  employee  of  the  Hudson  Bay 
Company  stumbled  on  to  some  gold,  but  the  facts  were 
not  made  public  ;  possibly  the  fur  company  feared  an 
immigration  which  would  develop  the  country  and  de- 
stroy their  monopoly.  Certain  it  is  that  no  knowledge 
of  rich  deposits  existed  at  the  lime  the  United  States  ac- 
quired the  Territory,  and  Mr.  William  C.  Greenfield,  in 
United  States  Census  Reports  for  1890,  referring  to  the 
Yukon  River  district,  says  : 

*Golfl  is  valued  as  follows  : 

I  ounce  troy,  pure  gold,  is  worth $  20.67 

I  dwt.  troy,  pure  gold,  is  worth 1.03 

I  grain  troy,  pure  gold,  is  worth .04J 

I  ounce  avoirdupois,  pure  gold,  is  worth 18.84 

1  pound  avoirdupois,  pure  gold,  is  worth 3''i  37 

I  ton,  2,000  pounds,  pure  gold,  is  worth 602,737.20 


,,,: 


■,'iu 


^> 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


1^128     |2.5 

|50     ■^~        ■■■ 

1^  1^    12.2 


I.I     I.""  1^ 


1.8 


11-25  111.4    lil.6 


y 


V 


<^ 


^ 


/2 


o^        J^ 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


33  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)  873-4503 


I 


4 


IMF 


I 


80 


ALASKA. 


.  A 


iii 


"  Mining  cannot  be  called  a  success  in  the  Yukon  up 
to  the  present  time.  Since  the  first  excitement  in  1886, 
there  have  been  but  few  instances  of  individuals  taking 
more  than  $2,000  for  two  or  three  seasons'  work." 

Perhaps  the  first  white  prospector  to  penetrate  the  in- 
terior was  George  Holt,  who  crossed  the  mountains  for 
the  express  purpose  of  gold-hunting  in  1878;  but  little 
is  known  of  the  route  he  traveled,  except  that  he  de- 
scended the  chain  of  lakes  back  of  Dyea  and  entered  the 
Hootalinqua  River  country  by  way  of  the  Indian  trails. 
He  found  gold,  but  not  in  sufficient  quantity  to  encour- 
age him  in  further  effort. 

Lix-'utenant  Allen,  United  States  Army,  in  1885  found 
"color"  at  the  mouth  of  Copper  River,  and  for  many 
years  Indians  have  brought  out  of  the  Copper  River  dis- 
trict furs,  copper  and  gold,  but  the  region  has  not  been 
explored  by  white  men. 

Gold  was  discovered  near  Sitka  in  1879,  and  in  1880 
Joseph  Juneau  discovered  gold  near  the  town  which  now 
bears  his  name.  The  same  year  Edward  Bean  organized 
an  expedition,  which  set  out  from  Sitka,  crossed  over 
the  Chilkoot  Pass  to  Lake  lyindeman,  where  boats  were 
constructed  in  which  the  party  descended  the  Lewis 
River  as  far  as  the  Hootalinqua.  They  discovered  gold, 
but  only  in  such  small  quantities  that  men  could  not 
make,  on  an  average,  more  than  $2,15  per  day.  About 
this  time  numerous  small  parties  began  to  make  their 
way  over  the  somewhat  familiar  Chilkoot  triil  and  to 
push  further  and  further  into  the  interior,  down  the 
large  rivers  ard  up  their  tributaries.  All  of  them  found 
gold,  but  a  party  of  miners  in  1881  were  the  first  to  find 
it  in  really  pa>  ing  quantities  in  the  Yukon  Valley.  They 
went  to  the  mouth  of  the  Salmon  River  and  ascended 


ALASKA. 


81 


that  stream  for  200  miles  and  found  gold  on  every  bar. 
The  Lewis  River,  Stewart  River  and  Cassiar  Bar,  until 
recently  the  richest  deposits  in  the  Yukon  country,  were 
located  in  1885.  Miller  Creek  was  located  in  1892.  All 
these  Yukon  Valley  points  are  in  British  territory,  but 
in  1886  the  prospectors  carried  their  operations  across 
the  boundary  line  and  found  gold  in  Alaska  on  Forty- 
Mile  Creek  and  its  tributaries,  Glacier  Creek,  Poker 
Creek,  Davis  Creek,  etc.,  in  such  quantities  as  to  cause 
the  desertion  of  the  Canadian  fields  further  up  the  val- 
leys; Birch  Creek  was  prospected  with  good  results  in 
1893,  and  about  100  claims  were  staked  out  along  its 
course;  in  1895  Eagle  Creek,  its  tributary,  was  discov- 
ered. A  prolonged  drouth  in  the  summer  of  1896  caused 
a  suspension  of  work  in  the  Forty-Mile  district  for  want 
of  water.  Al'  these  American  diggings  continued  to  be 
worked  with  profit  until  the  sensational  discoveries  by 
George  W.  Carmach  in  August,  1896,  on  the  Klondike* 
River  and  its  tributaries,  made  that  hitherto  unheard-of 
region  the  center  of  the  worlds  mining  interest  and  at- 
tracted the  attention  of  all  civilized  countries.  Forty- 
mile  Creek  takes  its  name  from  the  fact  that  it  enters  the 
Yukon  about  that  dist&nce  below  Fort  Reliance,  an 
abandoned  trading-post.  It  will  always  be  interesting  as 
the  point  where  the  first  genuine  placer  gold-mining  ex- 
citement in  Alaska  started.  The  stream,  almost  if  not 
wholly  in  Alaska,  is  about  250  miles  long,  with  many 
tributaries,  all  bearing  gold,  it  is  said,  in  paying  quanti- 
ties. Sixty-Mile  Creek,  which  is  nearly  all  in  British 
territory,  enters  the  Yukon  about  50  miles  above  the 
mouth  of  the  Klondike,  and  has  given  good  yields. 

*Klondike  is  a  corruption  of  the  Indian  word  "  Troau-dik," 
or  "  Thronduik,"  meaning  plenty  of  fish. 


It 

my 


1«: 


mi 


-l/ 


82 


ALASKA. 


li  1 


At  nearly  every  point  in  the  Territory  where  search 
has  been  made  gold,  in  greater  or  less  quantities,  has 
been  found.  From  all  of  the  streams  so  far  prospected 
come  reports  of  gold  deposits ;  fine  dust  far  down  the 
streams,  growing  coarser  as  the  head-waters  are  ap- 
proached, leading  to  the  belief  that  rich  placer  deposits, 
if  not  the  "  mother  lode,"  are  to  be  found  somewhere  up 
the  gulches,  which  the  empiricism  and  endurance  of  the 
American  miner  will  combine  to  locate.*  The  data  at 
hand  seems  to  show  a  placer  gold-belt  covering  an  area 
of  over  700  square  miles,  extending  in  Alaska  for  300 
miles  westward  from  the  border  across  the  Yukon  Val- 
ley and  including  all  the  tributaries  of  that  stream.  Most 
of  this  area  remains  to  be  prospected ;  for  its  development 
and  extension,  if  any,  we  must  look  to  the  explorations 
sure  to  follow  the  present  interest  and  excitement.  Gold- 
bearing  quartz  in  ledges  has  also  been  found  in  different 
places,  and  there  have  been  extensive  stamp-mills  profita- 
bly operated  on  Douglass  Island  for  many  years,  where  the 
ore,  though  of  low  grade,  appears  inexhaustible.  The 
Cook's  Inlet  district  produced  $120,000  in  1896.  Mining 
districts  are  organized  on  Kadiak  Island  and  Portage  Bay. 

The  estimated  product  of  the  Yukon  placers  in  1890 
was  $50,000,  and  the  amount  was  doubled  the  following 
year.  The  product  of  Alaskan  creeks  in  1893  was 
$198,000;  in  1894  it  had  increased  to  409,000;  in  1895 
the  amount  was  given  as  $778,609,  of  which  $709,000 
was  from  the  Yukon  district.  The  production  of  the 
Yukon  district  for  1896,  including  United  States  and 
British  territory,  is  estimated  at  $1,400,000,  In  1897 
civilization  received  news  of  the  great  wealth  in  the 
Klondike  region,  and  estimates  of  the  gold  brought  out 

*Since  the  above  writing  comes  an  unverified  report  of  the 
discovery  of  the  "mother  lode." 


ALAfiKA. 


83 


varied  from  $6,000,000,  by  Mr.  R.  E.  Preston,  Director 
of  the  Mint  at  Washington,  to  $10,000,000,  by  H.  C. 
Mcintosh,  Governor  of  the  Northwest  Territory  (Brit- 
ish). Dr.  Sheldon  Jackson,  long  a  resident  of  Alaska, 
and  an  authority  upon  matters  concerning  it,  says  the 
newspaper  reports  of  its  vast  wealth  have  not  been  over- 
estimated, but  warns  people  against  rushing  into  the 
country  without  thorough  preparation  to  withstand  the 
hardships  and  privations. 

Of  the  Yukon  district,  Professor  J.  Edward  Spurr,  of 
the  United  States  Geological  Survey,  says  : 

"  The  Yukon  districts  lie  in  a  broad  belt  of  gold-pro- 
ducing rocks,  having  a  considerable  width,  and  extend- 
ing in  a  general  east- and- west  direction  for  several  hun- 
dred miles.  Throughout  this  belt  occui  quartz  veins 
which  carry  gold,  but,  so  far  as  yet  found  out,  the  ore  is 
of  low  grade,  and  a  large  proportion  of  the  veins  have 
been  so  broken  by  movements  in  the  rocks  that  they 
cannot  be  followed.  For  this  reason  the  mines  in  the 
bed  rock  cannot  be  worked,  except  on  a  large  scale  with 
improved  machinery,  and  even  such  operations  are  im- 
possible until  the  general  conditions  of  the  country  in 
reference  to  transportation  and  supplies  are  improved. 

"  Through  the  gold  bearing  rocks  the  streams  have 
cut  deep  gullies  and  canyons,  and  in  their  beds  the  gold 
which  was  contained  in  the  rocks  which  have  been 
worn  away  is  concentrated,  so  that  from  a  large  amount 
of  very  low-grade  rock  there  may  be  formed  in  places  a 
gravel  sufficiently  rich  in  gold  to  repay  washing.  All 
the  mining  which  is  done  in  this  country  therefore  con- 
sists in  the  washing  out  of  these  gravels. 

"  In  each  gulch  prospectors  are  at  liberty  to  stake  out 
claims  not  already  taken,  the  size  of  the  claim  being  de- 
termined by  vote  of  all  the  miners  in  each  gulch,  accord- 


fSM 


IB  I 

ill 


hm 


'Kfia 


ii 


"i'm 


i 

mm 


Ml, -4 


iilliiiilk 


m^'- 


84 


ALASKA. 


ing  to  the  richness  of  the  gravel.  The  usual  length  of  a 
claim  is  about  500  feet  along  the  stream,  and  the  total 
width  of  the  gulch  bed,  which  is  ordinarily  narrow. 
When  a  prospector  has  thus  staked  out  his  claim,  it  is  re- 
corded by  one  of  the  miners,  who  is  elected  by  his  fel- 
lows in  each  gulch  for  that  purpose,  and  this  secures  him 
sufficient  title.  The  miners'  laws  are  practically  the  en- 
tire government  in  these  districts,  for  the  remoteness 
prevents  any  systematic  communication  being  carried  on 
with  the  United  States.  All  questions  and  disputes  are 
settled  by  miners'  meetings,  and  the  question  in  dispute 
is  put  to  popular  vote. 

"  In  prospecting  the  elementary  method  of  panning 
is  used  to  discover  the  presence  of  gold  in  gravel,  but 
after  a  claim  is  staked  and  systematic  work  begun,  long 
sluice-boxes  are  built  of  boards,  the  miners  being  obliged 
to  fell  the  trees  themselves  and  saw  out  the  lumber  with 
whip-saws,  a  very  laborious  kind  of  work.  The  depth 
of  gravel  in  the  bottom  of  the  gulches  varies  from  i  foot 
up  to  20  or  30  feet,  and  when  it  is  deeper  than  the  latter 
figure  it  can  not  be  worked. 

"  The  upper  part  of  the  gravel  is  barren,  and  the  pay- 
dirt  lies  directly  upon  the  rock  beneath,  and  is  generally 
very  thin.  To  get  at  this  pay-dirt  all  the  upper  gravel 
must  be  shoveled  off,  and  this  preliminary  work  often 
requires  an  entire  season,  even  in  a  very  small  claim. 
When  the  gravel  is  deeper  than  a  certain  amount,  say  10 
feet,  the  task  of  removing  it  becomes  formidable.  In 
this  case,  the  pay-dirt  can  sometimes  be  got  at  in  the 
winter  season,  when  the  gravel  is  frozen  hard,  by  sink- 
ing shafts  through  the  gravel  and  drifting  along  the  pay- 
dirt." 

"  Prospecting  in  this  country,"  says  Mr.  Wilson 
(Guide  to  Yukon  Gold-Fields), "  is  very  difficult,  owing  to 


ALASKA. 


85 


the  character  of  the  surface,  the  general  formation  being 
soft,  the  hills  having  been  worn  smooth  by  glacial  ac- 
tion, which  left  a  layer  of  dirt  over  the  whole  country  to 
a  depth  of  from  5  to  1 5  feet.  This  is  frozen  the  whole 
year,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  inches  on  the  surface. 
The  method  of  prospecting  is  usually  carried  on  by  sink- 
ing a  number  of  holes  to  bed-rock  across  the  bed  of  the 
creek,  or  cross-cutting  it  by  a  tunnel  and  testing  the  dirt 
every  few  feet  by  panning,  thus  locating  the  pay- streak. 
After  a  creek  has  been  prospected,  the  glacial  drift  must 
be  removed.  The  trees  and  roots  are  taken  away  and  a 
stream  of  water  turned  on,  which,  with  the  help  of  the 
sun,  in  time  bares  the  pay-streak.  The  course  of  the 
water  is  then  turned  along  the  hillside,  a  dam  built  and 
sluice-boxes  erected.  These  are  made  with  corrugated 
bottoms,  which  catch  and  retain  the  gold.  They  are 
given  a  grade  regulated  by  the  coarseness  of  the  gold ; 
if  the  gold  is  fine,  the  grade  is  slight ;  if  coarse,  a  greater 
pitch  can  be  given,  which  is  preferable,  as  more  dirt  can 
be  handled.  The  lack  of  water  in  these  gulches  proves 
a  great  hindrance  in  many  cases.  The  seasons  are  dry, 
and  only  the  glacial  drip  of  the  hills  can  be  depended 
upon. 

"  A  method  lately  adopted,  by  which  raining  can  be 
done  in  winter,  has  proved  profitable,  besides  doing  away 
with  the  long  period  of  idleness.  This  is  called  burning, 
and  is  done  by  drifting,  melting  away  the  frost  by  fire 
and  taking  out  only  the  pay-dirt,  leaving  the  glacial  drift 
and  surface  intact.  The  pay-dirt  thus  removed  is  easily 
washed  in  the  sp^-iag,  when  water  is  plenty." 

When  the  thawing  process  reaches  the  pay-streak, 
a  noxious  gas  similar  ta  fire-damp  is  generated,  which 
must  be  removed  or  greatly  diluted  with  fresh  air  before 
entering  the  shaft. 


.mi 


tiisl 


■,<S5'4 

ill? 


Ina- fl 


^111 


[fir 


i     '  \. 


i 

1 

1 

1: 

nU'. 


ALASKA. 


87 


Chapter  VIII. 


ROUTES  TO  THE  GOIyD-FlEIyDS. 


"No  dawn,  no  dusk,  no  proper  time  of  day, 
No  road,  no  street,  no  t'other  side  the  way." 


-Hood. 


Alaksa  is  a  difficult  country  to  traverse,  even  in  the 
short  summer  season,  there  being  no  roads;  and  even  In- 
dian trails,  owing  to  the  small  population  of  natives,  are 
very  rare.  The  surface  is  rough  and  mountainous  in 
many  places,  and  on  the  more  even  portions  travel  is 
impeded  by  the  growth  of  thorny  cactus  and  knee-deep 
wet  moss  almost  everywhere  encountered. 

Men  who  contemplate  entering  the  gold  fields  should 
be  sober,  strong  and  healthy ;  they  should  be  practical 
men,  able  to  adapt  themselves  quickly  to  their  surround- 
ings. Special  care  should  be  taken  to  know  that  they 
have  sound  lungs,  that  they  are  free  from  rheumatism 
and  rheumatic  tendency,  and  that  their  joints,  especially 
the  knee  joints,  are  strong  and  have  never  been 
weakened^  by  injury,  synovitis  or  other  disease.  In 
temperament  they  should  be  of  a  cheerful,  hopeful  dis- 
position, willing  to  work.  Men  of  sullen,  morose  na- 
tures, although  they  may  be  industrious,  are  very  apt,  as 
soon  as  the  novelty  of  the  country  wears  ofi^  to  become 
dissatisfied,  when  small  reverses  induce  pessimism  and 
melancholy. 

It  will  be  wise  for  travelers  to  form  parties  of  about 
four  people,  as  such  an  arrangement  will  be  found  less 


m 

H. 

K'"  *'it 

% 

i^r 

fS^A 

I!  '  ^ 


88 


ALASKA. 


expensive  and  offers  other  advantages.  The  best  time  to 
start  is  about  the  middle  of  April,  and  navigation  on  the 
river  closes  about  the  middle  of  October. 

There  are  at  least  four  routes  to  the  gold-fields  wholly 
or  in  part  across  United  States  territory.  Besides, 
several  trails  used  by  the  Indians  are  available. 

The  first  by  ocean  steamer  from  Seattle  or  San  Fran- 
cisco to  St.  Michael  Island,  thence  by  river  steamer  up 
the  Yukon.  The  Yukon  is  navigable  from  its  mouth  to 
White  Hor.se  Rapids,  a  distance  of  over  i,6oo  miles. 

The  second  is  by  ocean  steamer  to  Juneau,  and 
farther  on  by  smaller  boat  to  Dyea ;  thence  by  land  over 
the  divide,  then  following  the  chain  of  lakes  and  rivers 
from  the  head  of  the  Yukon  basin  to  Dawson  City. 

The  third  is  by  the  Taku  Inlet. 

The  fourth  is  by  the  Stikine  River. 

Ocean  steamers  of  different  lines  land  passengers  and 
freight  at  Fort  Wrangell,  Juneau,  near  the  mouth  of  the 
Copper  River,  St.  Michael  and  other  points.  The  safe 
passages  for  vessels  between  the  islands  of  the  Aleutian 
chain  are  the  Amukta  (longitude  172°)  and  the  Unimak 
(longitude  165°). 

The  first  of  these  routes  is  the  least  difl&cult,  but 
is  much  the  longest  and  more  expensive  than  the 
others. 

I^eaving  Seattle  or  San  Francisco  on  a  well  ap- 
pointed ocean  steamer,  the  run  is  made  to  St.  Michael 
Island,  the  end  of  the  ocean  voyage,  in  about  fifteen 
days.  Vessels  can  not  go  to  St.  Michael  much  before 
the  end  of  June,  on  account  of  large  bodies  of  drifting 
ice  that  beset  the  waters  of  the  approach.  After  a  delay 
of  from  one  to  fifteen  days,  a  transfer  is  made  to  a  flat- 
bottomed  river  boat,    capable   of  carrying    about    150 


^ 


.o 


5! 
W 

w 
o 

X 

H 


O 


fA' '''Si 


■t" 


■Jttei:.- 


iipi 

Jisl 

n«!!r.I 


ipiiOii; 


VlW' 


III 


OS 


CD 


ALASKA.  89 

passengers  and  150  pounds  of  baggage  each  (no  more 
baggage  is  permitted),  and  another  voyage  of  from  two 
to  three  weeks  up  the  river  is  begun.  Tii.  distances 
between  principal  points  on  this  route,  as  given  oy  trans- 
portation companies  and  travelers,  are  as  follows : 

San  Francisco  to  Seattle ...  697  miles 

Seattle  "^o  St.  Michael 2,174  miles 

St.  ivlicliael  to  mouth  of  Yukon 80  miles 

Mouth  of  Yukon  to  Andreafski 70  miles 

Andreafski  to  An vik 1 50  miles 

Anvik  to  Nulato 300  miles 

Nulato  to  Novikakat 145  miles 

Novikakat  to  Tanana 80  miles 

Tunana  to  Fort  Yukon 450  miles 

Fort  Yukon  to  Circle  City 80  miles 

Circle  City  to  Forty-Mile 240  miles 

Forty-Mile  to  Dawson  City 52  miles 

Total 4.5 1 8  miles 

The  first  boat  of  the  season  leaves  San  Francisco 
about  May  ist  and  the  last  about  August  30th,  but,  owing 
to  low  water  in  the  Yukon  early  in  the  season,  late  boats 
are  not  likely  to  get  beyond  Fort  Yukon.  The  trip  re- 
quires from  thirty-five  to  forty  days  and  costs  about 
I200  00.  In  1897  only  three  vessels  plied  on  the  Yukon 
River,  but  it  is  understood  that  twenty  suitable  boats 
are  now  being  constructed  to  meet  the  increased  trade. 

The  second,  usually  referred  '  o  as  the  Juneau  Route, 
is  more  direct,  though  much  broken  by  the  different 
methods  of  transportation.  Its  possible  cheirpness  recom- 
mends it  to  those  of  small  means.  From  Seattle  by 
steamer,  which  makes  five  or  six  trips  a  month,  a  four- 
days  journey  brings  the  passenger  to  Juneau ;  this,  the 
principal  port  in  Alaska,  is  a  town  of  about  5,000  in- 
habitants, with  two  hotels,  good  shops,  a  theatre  and 
7 — 


^^1 


fpr: 


i:?:.     h? 


I  y 


M 


•il.i 


I'l- 


# 


,l>^' 


if 


M 


:i'\ 


!!ii 


inii 


I'P 


90 


ALASKA. 


electric  lights.  It  is  said  to  be  a  good  outfitting-point. 
From  Juneau  there  is  still  about  loo  miles  of  salt  water 
journey  to  Dyea,  at  the  head  of  Lynn  Canal,  one  of  the 
long,  narrow  inlets  so  common  on  the  Alaska  coast. 
This  part  of  the  trip  takes  twelve  hours.  There  is  at 
Dyea,  besides  a  trading-post,  which  offers  the  last 
chance  short  of  Fort  Selkirk  to  supply  forgotten  arti- 
cles, a  village  of  from  200  to  300  Chilkoot  Indians,  who 
make  a  business  of  packing  miners'  outfits  over  the 
mountains,  a  distance  of  from  twenty-seven  to  thirty-two 
miles,  according  to  choice  of  routes.  Some  white  con- 
tractors are  there  also,  who  maintain  a  pack-train  of 
horses  over  the  first  twelve  miles  of  the  distance.  Sleds 
and  dogs  to  pull  them  can  also  be  purchased;  single 
dogs  are  valued  at  from  $25  to  $125 ;  from  six  to  twelve 
dogs  are  hitched  to  a  sled  and  can  travel  about  fifteen 
miles  per  day  with  a  load  of  100  pounds  for  each  animal. 
The  only  dogs  suitable  for  this  work  are  those  found  in 
the  Territory.  Animals  imported  from  milder  climates 
soon  succumb  to  the  rigors  of  the  Alaska  winter.  Some 
men  draw  their  own  loaded  sleds  and  are  able  to  trans- 
port in  this  manner  by  doubling  up,  it  is  said,  from  500 
to  1,000  pounds  at  a  trip.  Upon  leaving  Juneau  the 
traveler  has  the  choice  of  three  routes,  viz. :  Chilkoot 
Pass,  which  has  been  quite  generally  used.  It  is  3,500 
feet  high,  with  a  sharp  pitch  of  about  600  feet  near  the 
crest,  in  which,  at  times,  every  step  must  be  cut  in  the 
ice,  though  sheep,  cattle  and  horses  have  occasionally 
been  taken  over  the  summit.*  Wood  has  to  be  carried 
for  any  fire  required  for  the  one  night  almot-t  certain  to 
be  spent  on  the  trail.     The  crest  of  this  pass  is  about 

♦Since  this  writing  the  War  Department  has  been  informed 
that  by  February  i,  1898,  a  man  named  Hugh  Wallace  wouid  have 
a  trolley  line  in  operation  over  the  Chilkoot  Pass. 


ALASKA. 


91 


ted 
to 

)Ut 

lued 
lave 


fifteen  miles  from  Dyea,  and  a  portion  of  the  road  has 
been  corduroyed.  In  summer  it  is  best  to  leave  Dyea 
about  6  o'clock  in  the  evening,  as  that  will  bring  the 
traveler  to  the  snow  near  the  crest  at  a  time  in  the  morn- 
ing when  there  will  probably  be  a  crust  thick  enough  to 
bear  a  man's  weight.  The  descent  toward  the  interior  is 
much  easier  than  the  ascent,  as  the  grade  is  not  so  steep. 
White  Pass,  or  Moore's  Pass,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  is 
i,ooo  feet  lower  than  Chilkoot  Pass,  is  passable  at  all  sea- 
sons of  the  year,  and  wood  is  everywhere  plentiful.  From 
Skagua,  the  starting-point,  there  is  a  toll-road  over  White 
Pass  which  has  been  very  recently  constructed  at  a  cost 
of  $ioo>ooo;  the  road  is  raid  to  be  practicable  for  wagons, 
but  the  rates  of  toll  have  not  yet  been  established.  Chil- 
kat  Pass,  3,000  feet  above  the  sea  and  about  45  miles 
from  the  coast,  sometimes  referred  to  as  the  Dalton  trail, 
is  also  available,  but  there  is  little  information  concern- 
ing it  beyond  the  fact  that  it  is  a  land  route  to  Fort  Sel- 
kirk and  is  supposed  to  be  about  150  miles  shorter  than 
the  distance  by  the  lakes  and  rivers. 

The  cost  of  freighting  across  the  mountains  has  been 
from  five  to  fifty  cents  per  pound,  but  if  the  rush  continues, 
as  is  quite  likely,  and  with  reason  to  expect  an  increase, 
the  prices v.ill  undoubtedly  rise  to  such  a  figure  that  more 
men  than  heretofore  will  be  compelled,  owing  to  lack  of 
funds,  to  do  their  own  packing.  One  hundred  pounds  is 
about  the  most  that  the  average  man  can  pack,  though  ic 
is  said  that  uome  Indians  make  good  time  with  twice  that 
weight.  Two  hundred  pounds  is  the  usual  load  for  the 
ordinary  pack  animal.  As  nothing  less  than  i  ,000  pounds 
will  include  an  outfit  for  one  man,  it  will  require  from 
thre.' weeks  to  one  month  for  him  to  pack  it  across  the 
mountain  himself. 

Once  over  either  the  Chilkoot  or  White  Pass,  the  de- 


m-)^ 


hi 


\Vau  ' 


[SJ. 


m 


■  'I! 


92 


ALASKA. 


!lli 


scent  of  the  lakes  and  rivers  to  the  gold-fields  begins. 
For  this  part  of  the  trip  a  boat  is  necessary  and  must  be 
either  purchased  or  constructed.  But  few,  so  far,  have 
been  for  sale,  though  it  is  said  parties  are  at  work  pre- 
paring a  supply ;  single  boats  cost  from  $275.00  to  $300.00. 
However,  the  tools  requisite  for  boat-building  are  so 
much  a  necessity  in  a  new  country  that  no  one  should 
think  of  starting  in  without  them.  Four  men  can,  with 
proper  tools,  if  handy  in  their  use,  take  the  standing 
spruce,  whip-saw  out  the  lumber  and  make  a  boat  large 
enough  to  carry  themselves  and  their  4,000  pounds  of 
baggage,  in  a  couple  of  weeks.  There  are  at  time  of 
writing*  two  pits  for  whip-sawing  at  Lake  [Lindeman, 
but  suitable  timber  is  scarce,  and  can  not  be  secured 
much  under  three  or  four  miles.  At  Lake  Bennett  there 
is  a  saw-mill,  operated  by  Americans,  and  lumber  is 
plentiful.  The  boat  usually  constructed  is  about  twenty- 
two  feet  long  and  four  and  a  half  to  five  feet  wide.  It 
must  be  strong  and  stiff  to  endure  the  storms  on  the 
lakes  and  the  tossing  about  it  will  receive  in  the  rapids. 
A  sail  should  be  provided  to  steady  the  boat  and  take  ad- 
vantage of  any  wind,  and  the  same  canvass  will  be  found 
in  many  ways  useful  in  camp.  There  will  be  times  when, 
owing  to  shallow  water,  ice  or  rapids,  the  boat  will  have 
to  be  lightened,  or  hauled  out  of  the  water  entirely,  and 
carried  along  with  the  baggage  to  the  next  navigable 
water.  This  is  called  portage  and  is  a  slow  and  laborious 
process,  well  calculated  to  test  the  patience  and  endur- 
ance of  the  travelers.  After  passing  through  Lake 
Lindeman  there  is  a  portage  of  about  a  mile,  around  a 
short,  rapid  and  dangerous  bit  of  water,  to  Lake  Bennett ; 
then,  following  Lake  Bennett  to  Lake  Tagish,  at  the  foot 
of  which  is  a  small  permanent  Indian  village,  and  Marsh 

♦November,  1897. 


I 


m-' 


ALASKA. 


93 


Lake  or  Mud  I^ake,  the  voyager  finds  himself  at  the  head 
of  Miles  Caiion,  where  begins  three  miles  of  indescrib- 
ably rough  water,  terminating  in  White  Horse  Rapids, 
where  the  waters  rush  through  the  narrow  gorge  at  a 
terrific  rate,  variously  estimated  at  from  fifteen  to  thirty 
miles  an  hour.  To  pass  these  rapids  it  is  customary  to 
unload  and  carry  most  of  the  freight  to  some  point  be- 
low and  then  let  down  the  boats  by  ropes,  keeping  close 
to  shore.  No  novice  in  water  craft  should  attempt  to 
pilot  his  boat  through  these  waters,  though  for  ex- 
perienced boatmen  they  are  said  not  to  be  especially 
dangerous.*  It  is  to  be  expected  that  the  demand  for 
their  services  will  bring  to  this  point  men  who  will  make 
a  business  of  taking  boats  through,  and  the  travelers  will 
have  to  decide  for  themselves  whether  they  will  portage 
around  the  rapids,  pay  the  pilot  charges,  or  take  the 
chances  of  losing  their  outfits  and  perhaps  their  lives. 
Further  down  the  river  will  be  encountered  Five  Finger 
Rapids,  and  three  miles  further  Rink  Rapids,  neither  of 
which  are  considered  very  dangerous.  Just  below  White 
Horse  Rapids  opens  to  view  Lake  Le  Barge,  35  miles 
long.  About  the  foot  of  this  lake,  on  the  left-hand  side, 
and  for  200  miles  down  the  Lewis  River,  is  one  of  the 
best  game  regions  known  in  the  Northwest,  where 
moose  and  mountain  sheep  a  year  ago,  and  in  all  pre- 
vious years,  abounded.  In  the  river's  course  will  be 
found  many  timbered  islands,  and  if  the  time  can  be 
spared,  a  week  or  two  might  be  well  spent  in  hunting,  to 
supply  meat  and  cutting  building  logs  for  rafting  down 
the  river,  when,  if  not  wanted  for  the  owner's  use,  they 
will  readily  sell  at  a  good  price  at  Dawson  City  or  other 
points. 

*Alfred  J.  Daly,  Assistant  United  States  AMorney  for  the 
District  of  Alaska. 


t4j 


m 


m 


::\ 


hllJ 


il"t 


ir.i 

Hi 

i 

!? 

■i 

'!' 

'3 
It 


fif 


04  -ILASfJTl. 

The  distances  from  Seattle,  by  way  of  Chilkoot  Pass 
(and  very  little  difiference  for  either  of  the  other  passes 
back  of  Dyea)  are,  according  to  figures  considered  reli- 
able, about  as  follows : 

Seattle  to  Juneau 899      miles 

Juneau  to  Haines 80      miles 

Haines  to  Dyea 26      miles 

Dyea  to  Sheep  Camp iij4  miles 

Sheep  Camp  to  crest  Chilkoot  miles 

Pass 3^  miles 

Crest  to  Codler  I^ake 4  miles 

Portage  to  Long  Lake 3^  miles 

Long  Lake 2}4  miles 

Portage  to  Deep  Lake .     ^  miles 

Deep  Lake i}4  miles 

Portage  to  Lake  Lindeman 2}4  miles 

Total,  Dyea  to  Lake  Linde- 
man   31^  miles 

Portage  to  Lake  Bennett i      mile 

Through  Lake  Bennett 30      miles 

Lake  Bennett  to  mouth  of  McClin- 

tock  River 45      miles 

Mouth  of  McClintock  River  to  White 

Horse  Rapids 28      miles 

White  Horse   Rapids  to   Lake    Le 

Barge 28      miles 

Through  Lake  Le  Barge 31      miles 

LakeLe  Barge  to  mouth  of  Hootalin- 

qua  River 33      miles 

Hootalinqua  River  to  Little  Salmon 

River 70     miles 

Little  Salmon  River  to  Five-Finger 

Rapids 61      miles 

Five-Finger  Rapids  to  Rink  Rapids  3      miles 
Rink   Rapids   to    mouth    of    Pelly 

River 56      miles 

Pelly  River  to  Upper  Ramparts. ...  120      miles 

Upper  Ramparts  to  Ogilvie 20      miles 

Ogilvie  to  Dawson  City,  about 100      miles 

Total 1 ,662^  miles 


ALASKA. 


95 


1 


h 


Mr.  William  Ogilvie,  I^and  Surveyor  for  the  Canadian 
Government,  makes  the  distance  from  the  head  of  canoe 
navigation  to  Dawson  City  575.70  miles.  From  San 
Francisco  to  Juneau  is  about  1,596  miles  by  water.  The 
trip  from  Juneau  to  Dawson  City  requires  from  23  to  28 
days  if  no  serious  delays  are  experienced. 

The  great  rush  through  Chilkoot  Pass  and  conse- 
quent blockading  of  the  way  has  led  to  the  investigation  of 
other  possible  routes  from  Juneau  to  the  head-waters  of 
the  Yukon.  One  of  the  ways  recommended  is  known  as 
the  Taku  Route.  The  entrance  to  Taku  Inlet,  from 
which  the  route  takes  its  name,  is  about  twelve  miles 
south  of  Juneau  and  is  navigable  to  ocean  vessels  for 
eighteen  miles,  to  the  mouth  of  the  Taku  River.  This 
river  is  navigable  for  canoes  at  all  stages  of  water  for  58 
miles,  to  the  mouth  of  Nakinah  River,  where  there  is  a 
portage  of  70  miles  in  a  northeasterly  direction  to  Lake 
Teslin.  From  here,  Dawson  City,  598  miles  distant,  can 
be  reached  by  boat  with  comparative  ease  and  the  dan- 
gerous Miles  Cafion  and  White  Horse  Rapids  are 
avoided.  The  total  distance  from  Juneau  to  Dawson  by 
> .  Taku  route  is  about  the  same  as  that  over  the 
passes  back  of  Dyea. 

The  fourth  route  is  the  Stikine  River  Route,  by  way 
of  that  river  to  Telegraph  Creek ;  thence  to  Lake  Teslin, 
where  it  joins  the  Taku  Route.  The  trail  has  already 
been  cut  through  from  Telegraph  Creek  to  Lake  Teslin, 
a  distance  of  150  miles,  and  is  said  to  be  practicable  for 
pack-trains,  and  with  some  work  done  on  it,  even  for 
wagons.  The  Stikine  River  is  navigable  for  the  entire 
140  miles,  to  the  mouth  of  Telegraph  Creek.  The  ap- 
proximate di.stances  from  Seattle  to  Dawson  City  over 
the  Stikine  Route  are  reported  to  be  as  follows . 


.•'■'111 


m 


!  8/'' 


ti 

; 

V. 

111 

VI 

(i  '  , 

d 

1 

!i'''  1    '■ 

96  ALASKA. 

Seattle  to  Fort  Wrangell 750  miles 

Fort  Wrangell  up  Stikine  River  to  Telegraph 

Creek 150  miles 

Tele2,xaph  Creek  to  Lake  Teslin  (overland) . .     150  miles 
Lake  Teslin  to  Dawson  City,  through  that 
lake  to  Hootalinqua,  Lewis  and  Yukon 
rivers 598  miles 

Total 1,648  miles 

A  route  by  the  way  of  the  Copper  River  Valley  and 
the  White  River  Valley  is  also  suggested.  Lieutenant 
Allen  reports  the  Copper  River  not  navigable,  though  it 
is  navigated  by  the  natives ;  he  ascended  its  left  bank  to 
the  mouth  of  the  Slana,  then  traveling  by  the  way  of 
Lake  Susldto  across  the  divide  (4,500  feet  above  the  sea) 
to  the  Tanana  River ;  that  stream  he  reached  in  approxi- 
mate latitude  63°  24',  and  longitude  about  143°  40',  as 
taken  from  his  chart  of  the  route.  From  this  place  he 
indicates  two  trails,  and  from  a  point  a  few  miles  down 
the  Tanana  a  third,  all  leading  toward  the  White  River. 
Or  the  trail  may  follow  up  the  Copper,  Chittyua  and 
Chittestone  rivers,  thence  across  the  Scoloi  Pass  to  the 
head-waters  of  the  White  River. 

Captain  P.  H.  Ray,  United  States  Army,  who  has 
been  sent  by  the  Government  into  the  Klondike  for  the 
purpose  of  making  recommendations  for  the  betterment 
of  affairs  there,  reports  "  a  practical  route  from  the  Tan- 
ana across  the  divide  to  the  head  of  Cook's  Inlet,  via  the 
head  of  Copper  River,"  and  expresses  the  opinion  that 
"as  soon  as  the  development  of  the  Territory  will 
justify,  this  will  be  the  shortest  and  most  practicable 
route  for  railroad  communication  with  the  open  sea. 
With  rail  communication  from  the  head  of  Cook's  Inlet 
to  the  Tanana  the  commerce  of  the  whole  Yukon  Valley 


ALASKA.  97 

could  be  controlled  by  routes  lying  wholly  in  our  own 
territory."  A  company  of  American  capitalists  is  con- 
sidering the  advisability  of  constructing  a  railroad  along 
this  route. 

There  is  also  a  trail  to  the  Tanana  by  way  of  the 
Copper  and  Slano  River  valleys  through  the  Mentasta 
Pass.  Trails  also  connect  the  Copper  River  and  Sush- 
nita  rivers,  and  the  latter  with  the  Kuskokwim.  The 
natives  have  regular  camping-stations  along  the  Copper 
River.  It  is  about  no  miles  from  the  head  of  canoe 
navigation  on  the  Copper  River  to  the  head  of  naviga- 
tion on  the  White  River. 

The  distance  by  steamer  from  Seattle  to  Copper 
River  is  1,150  miles,  and  from  the  mouth  of  Copper 
River  to  Dawson  would  be  between  500  and  550  miles, 
following  the  windings  of  the  streams  and  valleys. 
There  are  said  to  be  no  rapids  on  White  River  and 
plenty  of  timber  along  the  route.  Distances  by  this 
route  are  about  as  follows : 

Mouth  of  Copper  River  to  mouth  of  Chittyua 

River 115  miles 

Mouth  of  Chittyua  River  to  Scoloi  Pass 100  miles 

Scoloi  Pass  to  head  of  White  River 30  miles 

Head  of  White   River  (navigable   for   small 

boats) 300  miles 

545 
There  is  also  a  pass  back  of  Yakutat  Bay  reached  by 

crossing  over  to  and  following  up  the  Alsek  River  and 

crossing  over  to  the  White  River,  where  the  Copper 

River  route  is  joined.    There  is  an  Indian  trail  over  this 

route,  and  by  it  the  distance  from  Sitka  to  Dawson  is 

about  500  miles. 

From  a  point,  Unalaklik,  on  Norton  Sound,    where 

there  is  a  Swedish  Mission  (35  miles  direct,  or  55  miles 

by  the  coast,  from  St.  Michael),  there  is  a  trail  only  50 


?ii-:V 

il 

\  r 

>  s 

^^^H 

;  ^' 

'■ii^ 

'4i 

.!i- 

vy 

M 

'I  ■ 

'3' 


m 


II   l! 


IjhHV 


pi    1 


98  ALASKA. 

miles  long,  followed  by  lyieutenant  Allen,  by  the  way  of 
the  Unalaklik  and  Autokakat  rivers,  to  the  Yukon, 
which  it  strikes  nearly  400  miles  from  the  latter's 
mouth. 

In  addition  to  these  United  States  routes,  there  is  ak  « 
an  inland  Canadian  route,  which  is  said  to  possess  some 
advantages,  and  might  be  called  a  sort  of  "  back  door  " 
route.  It  follows  the  old  Hudson  Bay  Company's  main 
trail  to  the  north.  An  advantageous  starting-point 
would  bo  St.  Paul,  Minnesota.  In  going  by  this  route 
the  traveler  leaves  the  railroad  at  Edmonton,  Northwest 
Territory;  thence  overland  forty  miles  to  Athabaska 
I^anding  by  stage.  There  the  prospector  must  provide 
himself  with  a  canoe,  and  he  will  have  continuous  water 
passage  by  way  of  Athabaska  L,ake,  Great  Salt  I^ake  and 
down  the  Mackenzie  River  to  its  mouth.  From  the 
mouth  of  the  Mackenzie  the  Peel  River  is  ascended,  and 
then  by  portage  across  the  Rocky  Mountains  to  the 
Stewart  River,  which  opens  the  way  to  the  Klondike. 
The  distances  on  this  route,  as  given  by  the  Hudson 
Bay  Company  and  taken  from  railroad  time-tables,  are  as 
follows : 

St.  Paul  to  Edmonton 1,232  miles 

Edmonton  to  Athabaska  Landing 40  miles 

Athabaska  Landing  to  Fort  McMurray 240  miles 

Fort  McMurray  to  Fort  Chippewa 185  miles 

Fort  Chippewa  to  Smith  Landing 102  miles 

Smith  Landing  to  Fort  Smith 16  miles 

Fort  Smith  to  Fort  Resolution 194  miles 

Fort  Resolution  to  Fort  Providence 168  miles 

Fort  Providence  to  Fort  Simpson 161  miles 

Fort  Simpson  to  Fort  Wrigley 136  miles 

Fort  Wrigley  to  Fort  Norman 1 84  miles 

Fort  Norman  to  Fort  Goodhope 174  miles 


Te 
La 


ove 


ALASKA.  99 

Fort  Goodhope  to  Fort  McPherson 282  miles 

Fort  McPherson  to  Dawson  City  (estimated)      250  miles 

Total 3,364  miles 

There  are  several  portages  on  this  route,  it  is  said, 
ranging  in  distance  from  a  few  hundred  yards  in  length 
to  about  forty  miles.  Sixty  days  would  be  necessary  to 
reach  Fort  McPherson.  For  the  trip,  birch-bark  canoes 
of  almost  any  size  up  to  three  tons  burden  can  be  se- 
cured of  the  Indians  at  Athabaska ;  but  in  case  they  are 
used,  Indian  pilots  should  be  taken  along  to  manage  them 
and  keep  them  in  repair.  This  trip  requires  about  three 
months'  time  and  costs  in  the  neighborhood  of  $300,  ex- 
clusive of  tools,  food,  clothing,  etc. 

There  is  another  overland  Canadian  route  from  Ash- 
croft,  a  small  trading-station  on  the  Canadian  Pacific 
Railroad  about  250  miles  from  the  coast,  by  wagon  and 
pack-animals  over  the  old  telegraph  trail  tol^ake  Teslin, 
where  boats  must  be  secured  to  continue  the  journey  by 
water  to  the  Yukon  country. 

The  distances,  as  near  as  can  be  learned,  over  this 
route,  are : 

St.  Paul,  Minn.,  to  Ashcroft 1,571  miles 

Ashcroft  to  Soda  Creek 165  miles 

Soda  Creek  to  Quesnelle 60  miles 

Quesnelle  to  Hazleton 365  miles 

Hazleton  to  Nasse  River 50  miles 

Nasse  River  to  Telegraph  Creek 100  miles 

Telegraph  Creek  to  Lake  Teslin 1 20  miles 

Lake  Teslin  to  Dawson  City 598  miles 

Total 3,029  miles 

Various  schemes,  projecting  railroads,  trolley  lines, 
over-head  car   lines,  pack-horse    lines    and    improved 


K" 


i 


;i  ] 


,'f. 


100 


ALASKA. 


MU 


wagon  roads  to  the  Alaska  gold-fields,  are  talked  of,  but 
as  yet  few  of  them  have  assumed  anything  approaching 
definite  shape,  and  only  the  developments  of  the  future 
can  determine  what  will  result. 

The  exact  amount  of  money  required  to  get  a  pas- 
senger from  the  Pacific  Coast  to  the  Alaska  gold-fields 
can  not  be  definitely  stated,  as  so  much  depends  upon 
the  route  selected  and  the  individual's  idea  of  what  is 
necessary;  but  from  reports  and  estimates  from  a  variety 
of  the  best  sources,  it  seems  certain  that  there  will  be  re- 
quired at  least  $150  for  transportation  and  $100  more  if 
the  Yukon  River  route  is  selected;  $150  to  $200  for  a 
mining  outfit  aud  a  stock  of  provisions ;  then,  prudence 
would  suggest  at  least  $250  to  provide  against  possible 
misfortune. 

Heretofore  communication  between  the  outside 
world  and  the  interior  of  Alaska  has  been  uncertain  and 
expensive,  as  letters  were  carried  by  private  parties  at  a 
rate,  it  is  reported,  of  $1.00  per  letter,  but  the  Post 
OSice  Department*  has  established  monthly  service  for 
all  classes  of  mail  matter  between  Juneau  and  Circle 
Cit)'  (a  distance  of  over  900  miles),  and  through  coopera- 
tion with  the  Canadian  Government  an  international  ex- 
change has  been  established  between  Dyea  and  Dawson 
City,  with  one  round  trip  per  month.  The  coast  and 
river  steamers  carry  the  mail  to  and  from  the  usual 
points  touched.  The  extension  and  betterment  of  the 
service  is  contemplated  to  meet  the  requirement  of  any 
increased  population,  and  through  it  the  hardship  of 
enforced  non  intercourse  with  civilization  will  be  greatly 
relieved. 


*For  list  of  Post  Ofi5ces  in  Alaska  see  Appendix  G. 


ALASKA. 


101 


if 


Chapter  IX. 


MINERS'  OUTFITS  * 


"  There  is  wisdom  in  preparation,  for  sorrow  besets  the  path 
of  the  thoughtless." 


Equipment  for  mining  in  Alaska  is  an  important 
item,  but  little  understood  by  amateur  prospectors,  and 
the  character  of  its  composition  will  materially  affect 
results. 

It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  trip  to  the  gold- 
fields,  however  plentiful  the  metal  may  be,  must  result 
in  failure,  unless  the  miner's  health  be  preserved.     '  V, 
must  see  to  it  himself  that  his  body  is  well  and  warmly 
clad,  and  properly  nourished  with  wholesome  food. 

All  reports  agree  that  the  game  in  the  country  can 
in  no  way  be  depended  upon  as  a  safe  source  of  food- 
supply.  In  the  spring  of  the  year  water-fowl  appear  in 
considerable  abimdance.  Caribou,  moose  and  mountain 
sheep  and  a  few  bear  and  some  smaller  animals  are  oc- 
casionally met  with  at  all  seasons. 

Speaking  upon  this  subject,  Mr.  William  Ogilvie, 
who  has  spent  several  years  in  the  Yukon  country,  says : 
"  For  animal  food  there  are  the  caribou  and  the  moose, 
but  the  moose  are  never  within  30  or  40  miles  of  the 
mines,  so  that  it  takes  two  or  three  days'  going  from  the 
camps  to  hunt  them.  There  are,  too,  white  mountain 
sheep,   pure  white  in  color,  but  otherwise  resembling 

*See  Appendix  D. 


l^W 


' .  ■mi 


iiiiE 


102 


ALASKA. 


HI- 


mm : 

i 


fM 


very  much  in  appearance  those  once  found  in  more 
southern  latitudes,  but  with  a  finer  horn,  more  finely 
curved.  The  caribou,  although  they  roam  over  the  land 
in  vast  herds,  are  migratory  in  their  nature,  and  are  very 
rarely  found  two  successive  seasons  in  the  same  place. 
The  natural  products  of  the  country,  as  a  food-supply, 
may  be  said  to  be  valueless  when  compared  with  the  de- 
mand which  will  soon  exist  for  it  there.  It  might,  in- 
deed, be  said  that  all  food  will  have  to  be  imported.  In 
the  river  are  some  small  fish  resembling  the  grayling, 
and  the  salmon  annually  make  their  way  up  as  far  as  the 
canon,  some  2,000  miles  from  the  sea." 

In  summer  there  is  a  variety  and  abundance  of  native 
berries,  especially  cranberries  and  "salmon"  berries. 

Alaska  is,  generally  speaking,  a  healthy  country. 
The  diseases  most  frequently  met  with  in  the  Yukon 
country  are  dyspepsia,  anaemia,  scurvy,  caused  by  im- 
properly cooked  food,  sameness  of  diet,  overwork,  want 
of  fresh  vegetables,  over-heated  and  badly  ventilated 
houses ;  rheumatism,  pneumonia,  bronchitis,  inflamma- 
tion of  the  bowels,  or  bladder,  and  other  diseases 
brought  on  by  exposure  to  wet  and  cold ;  debility  and 
chronic  diseases  brought  on  by  excesses.  Venereal  dis- 
eases are  common,  especially  among  the  natives. 

For  healthy  persons,  pneumonia  and  scurvy  are  the 
most  dreaded.  The  cause  and  symptoms  of  pneumonia 
are  so  well  known  that  no  descriptions  are  necessary. 
Scurvy  results  from  the  excessive  dietary  of  cereals  and 
preserved  meats.  Fresh  vegetables  and  lime-juice  are 
preventives,   and  also  the  cure,*  but  they  act  slowly. 

♦Alkaline  salts,  such  as  carbonate  of  soda,  carbonate  of  pot- 
ash and  a  variety  of  others,  are  also  used  as  remedies,  but  they 
are  liable  to  deteriorate  and  become  worthless. 


J1^ 


ALASKA. 


103 


y- 


The  symptoms  of  scurvy  come  on  gradually,  being  rec- 
ognized by  failure  of  strength  and  exhaustion  at  slight 
exertion  ;  the  countenance  becomes  sallow  or  dusky,  the 
eyes  sunken,  and  constant  pains  are  felt  in  all  the  mus- 
cles. After  some  weeks,  utter  prostration  ensues ;  the 
mouth  and  gums  become  sore  and  the  teeth  drop  out ; 
the  breath  is  extremely  offensive;  finally,  dark  spots  and 
swellings  appear  on  the  body,  with  bleeding  irom  the 
raucous  membranes.  Then  painful  and  destructive  ul- 
cers break  out  on  the  limbs ;  finally,  diarrhoea,  or  pul- 
rao  lary  or  kidney  trouble,  may  prove  fatal.  But  even 
in  desperate  cases  a  return  to  a  diet  of  fresh  vegetables, 
or  even  lime-juice,  will  effect  a  cure.  lyime-juice  has 
driven  scurvy  from  the  ocean,  where  it  was  formerly  the 
dread  of  every  long  voyage. 

Old  miners  have  learned  from  experience  to  value 
health  more  than  gold,  and  they  therefore  spare  no  ex- 
pense in  procuring  the  best  and  most  varied  outfit  of 
food  that  can  be  obtained. 

The  severity  of  the  climate  will  call  for  extra  heavy 
clothing  and  increase  the  quantity  of  food  necessary. 
As  to  what  is  required,  it  is  better  to  be  guided  by  the 
testimony  of  tuose  who  have  been  there  than  to  rely 
upon  the  opinions  of  so-called  experts  at  home.  Opin- 
ions as  to  exactly  what  articles  constitute  an  outfit  are 
as  various  as  the  individuals  who  utter  them.  Hundreds 
of  men  who  have  had  experience  in  this  far  northern 
climate  have  made  up  what  they  consider  practical  lists 
of  food  necessaries,  which  have  appeared  in  the  public 
press,  and  any  one  of  them,  doubtless,  would  meet  the 
strict  requirements  of  necessity.  An  analysis  of  twenty 
or  more  of  such  lists  showed  that  individual  tastes  had 
largely  governed  in  the  choice  and  quantity  of  articles. 


ilV 


-If 

if 

■\  ■<,} 

■  m 

n 


I  I! 


El 


I  r 
■ill': 


Ihifljll^l 


104  ALASKA. 

Their  composi*^iou  differed  greatly,  and  varied  in  quantity 
from  three  and  one-half  to  five  and  one-half  pounds  per 
man  per  day.  In  selecting  food  articles  those  highly 
carbonaceous  in  character,  such  as  salt  pork,  beans, 
flour,  corn  meal,  oat  meal,  etc.,  should  predominate. 
With  the  scarcity  of  fresh  meat,  vegetables  and  fruit,  the 
danger  of  scurvy  is  increased,  and  antl  scorbutics  should 
be  provided  in  liberal  proportions.  Tea,  in  the  main,  is 
preferable  to  coffee,  owing  to  its  lightness  and  the  ease 
with  which  it  is  prepared.  One  pound  of  tea  is  about 
equal  for  drinking  purposes  to  seven  pounds  of  coffee, 
though  the  latter  possesses  some  food- value,  while  tea  is 
only  a  stimulant.  Chocolate  is  very  palatable  and  ex- 
ceedingly nourishing.  In  place  of  sugar,  saccharin  may, 
if  desired,  be  substituted,  one  ounce  of  saccharin  being 
equal  in  sweetening  power  to  thirty-three  and  one-half 
pounds  of  sugar.  The  only  advantage  gained,  however, 
by  such  substitution  would  be  a  reduction  in  weight  of 
baggage,  as  saccharin  only  sweetens,  while  sugar  f<ieds. 

The  Chicago  Record's  "Klondike  Guide"  states 
that: 

"  The  outfits  purchased  in  Seattle  by  twenty  experi- 
enced miners  on  their  way  to  the  Klondike  are  regarded 
as  models  by  miners  and  prospectors  who  have  returned 
from  that  region.  The  twenty  men  first  divided  them- 
selves into  parties  of  four  men  each,  intending  to  have 
a  boat  for  each  party,  as  well  as  a  tent  and  various 
smaller  articles.  The  main  items  of  their  outfits  are  as 
follows,  the  items,  when  not  otherwise  mentioned,  being 
for  one  man  : 

Bacon pounds,   150 

Flour pounds,  250 

Rolled  oats pounds,     25 

Beans pounds,  100 


i 

m 


pi  ? 


■'1 


%'j 


II 


!'!: 


•A 


V. 


Y. 


ALASKA.  106 

Tea pounds,  lo 

Coffee pounds,  lo 

Sugar pounds,  40 

Dried  potatoes pounds,  25 

Dried  onions pounds,       2 

Salt pounds,  10 

Pepper , pounds,       i 

Dried  fruit ; pounds,  75 

Baking  powder pounds,  4 

Soda pounds,       2 

Evaporated  vinegar pounds,         yi 

Compressed  soup ounces,  1 2 

Mustard can,       i 

Rice pounds,  40 

Matches  (for  4  men) tin,       i 

Stove  for  4  men, 

Gold  pan  for  each. 

Set  of  granite  buckets, 

lyarge  bucket, 

Knife, 

Fork, 

Spoon, 

Cup, 

Plate, 

Frying-pan, 

Coffee-  and  tea-pot. 

Scythe-stone, 

2  picks  and  i  shovel, 

1  whip-saw. 
Pack-strap, 

2  axes  for  4  men,  and  r  extra  handle, 

6  8-inch  files  and  2  taper  files  for  the  party. 

Drawing-knife,  brace  and  bits,  jack-plane  and  hammer, 

rip-saw,  pocket  rule,  for  the  party, 

200  feet  of  ^-inch  rope, 

8  pounds  of  pitch  and  5  pounds  of  oakum,  for  4  men, 
8 — 


Rii 


;  I  i 

■  \  it 


ii 


li: 


Ml 


: 


ill  'lii 

is?" 

Ill  [II 


IQQ  ALASKA. 

Nails,  5  pounds  each  of  6-,  8-,  lo-  and  i2-penny,  for  4  men, 

Shoemaker's  thread, 

Shoemaker's  awl, 

Gum  for  patching  gum  boots, 

Tent,  ID  X  12  feet,  for  4  men. 

Canvas  for  wrapping, 

2  oil  blankets  to  each  boat, 

5  yards  of  mosquito  netting  for  each  man, 

3  suits  heavy  underwear, 

1  heavy  Mackinaw  coat, 

2  pairs  heavy  Mackinaw  trousers, 
j4  dozen  pairs  heavy  wool  socks, 
)4  dozen  pairs  heavy  wool  mittens, 
2  heavy  undershirts, 

2  pairs  heavy  snow-proof  rubber  boots, 
2  pairs  shoes, 
2  pairs  blankets, 

4  towels, 

2  pairs  overalls, 

1  suit  oil  clothing, 

2  rubber  blankets. 

"  Besides  these  things,  each  man  procures  a  small  as- 
sortment of  medicines,  and  he  is  provided  with  several 
changes  of  summer  clothing.    The  following  is  a  list  of 
medicines  for  four  men : 
25  cents'  worth  Cascara  Sagrada  bark,* 
X  bottle  good  whiskey, 

3  boxes  carbolized  salve, 
I  bottle  of  arnica. 

"  The  above  outfit  costs,  in  round  figures,  as  follows  : 

Groceries $40.00 

Clothing 50.00 

Hardware 50.00 

Total $140.00 

"The  same  drug  in  form  of  tablets  is  preferable. 


ALASKA. 


107 


"  The  fare  to  Dyea  and  incidentals  brought  the  ex- 
penses of  these  twenty  prospectors  up  to  about  $175 
each.  They  believe  that  they  are  well  supplied  for  a 
year's  stay  in  the  land  of  the  midnight  sun." 

To  the  above  list,  carefully  prepared  as  it  is,  should 
be  added  colored  goggles,  to  prevent  snow-blindness 
from  the  intense  glare  ;  this  is  especially  necessary  in  the 
spring  of  the  year.  A  rifle,  and  perhaps  a  shot-gun  too, 
with  plenty  of  ammunition,  together  with  fish-lines  and 
hooks,  will  assist  materially  in  adding  to  and  vary- 
ing the  food-supply.  A  fur-lined  sleeping-bag  is  a  great 
comfort  in  cold  climates.  Water-proof  sacks  to  further 
protect  clothing  and  provisions  from  the  weather  will 
more  than  save  their  cost,  to  say  nothing  of  the  increased 
comfort  experienced  through  reaching  camp  with  dry 
equipage.  To  the  medicines  should  certainly  be  added 
one-half  ounce  quinine  sulphate,  four  ounces  Jamaica 
ginger,  four  ounces  laudanum,  some  lint  bandages  and 
bleeding -powder. 

The  traveler  should  be  provided  with  the  best  map 
obtainable  of  the  country  and  a  reliable  compass ;  the 
latter,  however,  must  be  used  with  caution,  as  the  varia- 
tion of  the  needle  is  from  30°  to  35°  to  the  east  in 
the  territory  most  likely  to  be  traversed  (Dyea  to 
Dawson). 

While  the  above  is  given  merely  as  a  suggestion, 
certain  it  is  that  no  par«;y  so  provided  would  run  much 
danger  of  suffering  through  lack  of  preparation. 

The  United  States  Army  emergency  ration  for  one 
man  for  one  day,  based  upon  the  scientific  principles 
governing  the  repair  of  waste  tissues,  includes  the  fol- 
lowing components : 


m 

iir, 

m 


'  I 


Hi 

II'  '^'t  I 


ill 


>  r 


1 


Hi!  i   ■■ 


:.  ■  f  ■  ■ 


li 

11  i 

i 

1    ! 

1 

!  i 

t 

'\ ' 

Hi) . 

hi 

108 


ALASKA. 


OUNCES. 

Hard  bread i6. 

Bacon lo. 

Pea  meal 4. 

Coflfee,  roasted  and  ground,  with  4  grains  saccha- 
rin (or  tea  ^  ounce,  with  4  grains  saccharin).     2. 

Salt 64 

Pepper 04 

Tobacco 5 

Net  weight,  with  coflfee 33- '  8 

Net  weight,  with  tea 31.68 

While  this  ration  is  capable  of  maintaining  the  hu- 
man body  in  a  healthy  condition,  under  severe  physical 
strain,  for  an  indefinite  period,  it  is  not  issued  for  an 
emergency  expected  to  last  more  than  five  days,  and  the 
quantity  intended  for  that  period  may  be  made  to  last 
twice  the  time,  without  material  deterioration  of  the 
body ;  its  continued  use,  without  the  addition  of  anti- 
scorbutics, would,  however,  tend  to  the  production  of 
scurvy. 

A  better  form  of  tent  than  the  10x12  rectangular 
afiFair  is  the  United  States  Army  conical  tent,  made  of 
I20unce  duck.  It  is  very  commodious,  easy  to  pitch, 
staunch  when  in  position,  and  is  so  arranged  that  the 
pipe  for  the  stove  ser\'es  as  the  center-pole.  Camp  cook- 
ing is  an  art  acquired  only  through  experience,  and  as 
some  sort  of  stove  seems  necessary,  it  would  be  well  to 
select  some  form  of  camp  cooking-stove  which  is  easily 
transported  and  will  answer  equally  well  out  of  doors 
or  in  a  tent  or  building.  All  the  articles  requisite  for 
mining  and  subsistence  could  possibly  be  purchased  at 
Dawson  City,  Forty-Mile  or  one  of  the  trading-posts,  but 
there  is  no  certainty  in  the  matter,  and  *f  reports  be 
true,  prices  there  range  from  two  to  five  times  the  prices 


ALASKA. 


109 


charged  for  the  same  articles  in  Seattle,  Juneau,  or  other 
Pacific  coast  outfitting  points.  The  foregoing  list  of 
supplies  is  prepared  for  those  intending  entering  the 
fields  by  way  of  the  passes  back  of  Dyea.  If  the  trip 
is  made  by  water,  the  oakum  and  pitch  may  be  omitted; 
also  some  of  the  tools. 

The  boats  that  run  up  the  Yukon  are  operated  by 
companies  who  have  storehouses  in  Circle  City,  Fort 
Cudahy,  Forty-Mile,  Dawson  City  and  other  points. 
These  transportation  and  trading  companies  will  not,  it 
is  said,  transport  food-supplies  for  their  passengers,  and 
for  that  reason  they  limit  baggage  to  150  pounds,  as  else- 
where stated,  and  the  traveler  is  obliged  to  buy  his  out- 
fit at  one  of  the  trading-stores  in  the  country.  It  is  un- 
derstood that  the  Commercial  Company  has  decided  to 
carry  freight  for  the  travelers  next  year,  which,  if  true, 
would  materially  lessen  the  expense  to  the  prospector. 

The  greatest  demand  for  any  particular  thing  on  the 
Juneau  route  seems  to  be  for  boats.  Heretofore,  pros- 
pectors have  had  to  build  their  own  boats  after  reaching 
the  head-waters  of  the  Yukon,  either  from  lumber  which 
they  carried  along,  or  which  they  whip-sawed  from  the 
standing  timber  for  the  purpose.  At  present  half  a  dozen 
companies  are  said  to  be  working  night  and  day  on 
knock-down  boats.  It  is  said  that  one  of  these  boats 
weighs  about  200  pounds,  costs  $18,  and  will  carry  a  ton 
of  freight.  They  are  so  constructed  that  they  can  be 
taken  apart  and  packed,  no  piece  being  longer  than 
seven  feet.  Another  builder  is  making  galvanized  iron 
boats,  the  sections  of  which  nest,  and  when  assembled 
are  held  together  by  small  bolts. 

Such  hardships  and  exposures  as  are  sure  to  be  met 
with  in  the  Alaskan  gold-fields  should  not  enter  into  the 


III 

EI. 


,.,1>r-:>  1- 


110 


ALASKA. 


life  of  a  civilized  woman,  but  as  there  are  already  several 
at  Dawson  City  and  other  points,  and  the  characteristic 
heroism  and  devotion  of  their  sex  are  sure  to  prompt 
others  to  attempt  the  journey,  either  with  their  husbands 
or  to  seek  fortune  single-handed,  a  word  relative  to  what 
should  constitute  their  proper  outfit  is  not  thought  to  be 
out  of  place.  In  addition  to  such  articles  as  are  neces- 
sary to  both  sexes,  the  following  are  suggested  particu- 
larly for  women's  comfort : 
A   medicine    chest,    filled   on    the   advice    of  a    good 

physician, 
I  small  pillow, 
I  fur  robe, 
I  warm  shawl, 

I  easy-fitting  fur  coat  with  hood, 
3  warm,  loose-woven  woolen  dresses,  with  skirts  to  the 

knees  only,  to  be  worn  with  bloomers, 
3  suits  of  heavy  all-wool  underwear, 

3  warm  flannel  night-dresses, 

4  pairs  knitted  woolen  stockings, 

1  pair  rubber  boots, 

2  pairs  fur  gloves, 

2  pairs  fur-seal  moccasins, 

2  pairs  wet-weather  moccasins,  called  in  the  country 
"  mukluks," 

1  small  roll  flannel,  for  in-soles,  wrapping  the  feet  and 

for  bandages, 

2  gingham  aprons  to  cover  the  entire  front  of  the  dress, 
2  light  shirt-waists  for  summer  wear, 

A  sewing  kit, 

Such  toilet  articles  as  are  absolutely  necessary,  includ- 
ing some  skin  unguent,  to  protect  the  face  in  the 
severe  cold. 


ALASKA. 


Ill 


i- 
le 


The  furs  may  be  purchased  on  entering  Alaska,  but 
wise  ones  advise  taking  them  along. 

The  ordinary  dress  may  be  worn  to  the  end  of  the 
steamboat  journey,  when  civilized  garb  will  have  to  be 
exchanged  for  one  designed  to  meet  the  special  require- 
ments of  a  peculiar  life.  Trunks  are  not  the  vehicles  to 
transport  baggage  in.  It  is  much  better  to  pack  efiFects 
in  strong,  soft  canvas  telescopes,  or  make  them  into 
bundles  covered  with  canvas,  and  in  all  cases  protected 
from  the  weather  by  oil-skin  blankets. 

Mr.  Harry  De  Windt,  the  explorer,  who  went  through 
the  Klondike  region  in  1896,  says: 

"  There  is  plenty  of  room  for  all  between  the  Klon- 
dike and  the  Cassiar.  I^et  the  gold- seekers  take  their 
time  and  make  prudent  preparation.  The  ultimate  re- 
sult will  doubtless  be  that  a  little-known  region  will  be 
dotted  with  thriving  cities,  and  the  shouts  of  triumph 
from  the  fortunate  few  will  drown  the  dying  wails  of  the 
many  who  fail." 

The  present  well-known  gold-fields  are  partly  in 
British  territory,  and  all  supplies  crossing  the  boundary 
line  are  subject  to  a  tariff  tax  by  the  Canadian  Govern- 
ment. It  is  understood  that  it  is  not  the  intention  to 
collect  duty  on  personal  outfits,  but  only  on  articles  im- 
ported for  commercial  purposes  and  on  machinery,  etc.; 
but,  as  the  undeniable  right  exists,  gold-seekers  must  be 
prepared  to  pay  to  the  Canadian  customs  officials  an  en- 
trance tax.  For  that  reason  there  is  inserted  a  table 
of  rates  for  the  principal  articles  composing  a  miner's 
outfit. 

Canadian  Customs  Rates. 

Shovels,  spades,  picks,  etc.,  25  per  cent. 
Horses,  25  per  cent. 


t 


m 

"■■■?* 


i-  -•  .1 


4- 
I'- 


mMKKB 

■^1 


Hi'fi 


mil 
^^!  use  ill 

I: 


112 


ALASKA. 


Axes,  hatchets  and  adzes,  25  per  cent. 

Blankets,  5  cents  per  pound  and  25  per  cent. 

Boats  and  ship  sails,  25  per  cent. 

Rubber  boots,  25  per  cent. 

Boots  and  shoes,  25  per  cent. 

Breadstuff's — viz.,  grain,  flour  and  meal  of  all  kinds,  20 

per  cent. 
Butter,  4  cents  per  pound. 
Candles,  28  per  cent. 
Cartridges  and  ammunition,  30  per  cent. 
Cheese,  3  cents  per  pound. 

Cigars,  cigarettes,  $2  per  pound  and  20  per  cent. 
Cloth  socks,  10  cents  per  dozen  pairs  and  35  per  cent. 
Knitted  goods  of  every  description,  35  per  cent. 
Ready-made  goods,  partially  of  wool,  30  per  cent. 
Water-proof  clothing,  35  per  cent. 
Coffee,  condensed,  30  per  cent. 
Coffee,  roasted,  2  cents  per  pound  and  10  per  cent. 
Coffee  substitutes,  2  cents  per  pound;  extracts,  3  cents 

per  pound. 
Condensed  milk,  3  cents  per  pound. 
Cotton  knitted  goods,  35  per  cent. 
Crowbars,  35  per  cent. 
Cutlery,  35  per  cent. 
Dogs,  20  per  cent. 
Drugs,  20  per  cent. 
Duck,  20  to  30  per  cent. 
Earthenware,  30  per  cent. 
Kdge  tools,  35  per  cent. 
Fire-arms,  20  per  cent. 
Fish-hooks  and  lines,  25  per  cent. 
Wheat  flour,  75  cents  per  barrel. 
Rye  flour,  50  cents  per  barrel. 


i, 


w 


» 


8d 


S 


w 


%' 


^ptT'S 


*'S 


'•<,-* 


I<1': 


» 


H 


H 


I 

H 
W 

V. 


J 
w 

o 
o 
pa 


A 


JUNEAU  WATER  FRONT. 


_,^'!p.; 


3B^9B 


I 


m 


i'i! 


iii 


.,11 


f!  M? 


ix 


^ 


J- 


y. 

I/. 


ILAfifffl. 


113 


Fruit,  dried,  25  per  cent. 

Fruits:  prunes,  raisins,  currants,  i  cent  per  pound. 

Fruits :  jellies,  jams  and  preserves,  3  cents  per  pound. 

Fur  caps,  muffs,  capes,  coats,  25  per  cent. 

Furniture,  30  per  cent. 

Galvanized  iron  or  tinware,  30  per  cent. 

Jerseys,  knitted,  35  per  cent. 

Lard,  2  cents  per  pound. 

Linen  clothing,  32^  per  cen.. 

Maps  and  charts,  20  per  cent. 

Meats,  canned,  25  per  cent. 

Meats,  in  barrel,  2  cents  per  pound. 

Oat  meal,  20  per  cent. 

Oilcloth,  30  per  cent. 

Pipes,  25  per  cent. 

Potatoes,  in  barrel,  15  cents  per  bushel. 

Powder,  mining  and  blasting,  2  cents  per  pound. 

Rice,  I  ^  cents  per  pound. 

Sacks  or  bags,  20  per  cent. 

Saw-niills,  portable.  30  per  cent. 

Sugar,  64  cents  per  100  pounds. 

vSurgical  instruments,  15  per  cent. 

Tents,  2,2 }4  per  cent. 


<  i 


m 


ii'~ 


II 


liH 


ALASKA. 


115 


APPENDIX  A. 


UNITKD  STATES  MINING  I.AWS. 


UNITED  STATES  MINING  LAWS  AND  REGUI,ATIONS 


THEREUNDER 


* 


Department  of  the  Interior, 

General  Land  Office, 

December  lo,  1891. 
Gentlemen:     Your  attention  is  invited  to  the  Re- 
vised Statutes  of  the  United  States  and  the  amendments 
thereto  in  regard  to 

MINING  IvAWS  AND  MINING  RESOURCE. 
Title  xxxii,  Chapter  6. 

Section  2318.  In  all  cases  lands  valuable  for 
roinerals  shall  be  reserved  from  sale  except  as  other- 
i^'ise  expressly  directed  by  law. 

Sec.  2319.  All  valuable  mineral  deposits  in  lands  be- 
longing to  the  United  States,  both  surveyed  and  unsur- 
veyed,  are  hereby  declared  to  be  free  and  open  to 
exploration  and  purchase,  and  the  lands  in  which  they 
are  found  to  occupation  and  purchase,  by  citizens  of  the 
United  States  and  those  who  have  declared  their  inten- 
tion to  become  such,  under  legulations  prescribed  by 
law,  and  according  to  the  local  customs  or  rules  of 
miners  in  the  several  mining  districts,  so  far  as  the  same 
are  applicable  and  not  inconsistent  with  the  laws  of  the 
United  States. 

Sec.  2320.     Mining-claims  upon  veins  or  lodes  of 

*Department  of  the  Interior,  General  Land  Office,  Washing- 
ton, May  16,  1893. — This  circular  is  reissued  for  the  information 
and  benefit  of  those  concerned. — S.  W.  Lanioreux,  Commis- 
sioner. 


n:i''m 


116 


ALASKA. 


')!  ■; 


ii 

ilf 


quartz  or  other  rock  in  place  bearing  gold,  silver,  cinna- 
bar, lead,  tin,  copper  or  other  valuable  deposits,  hereto- 
fore located,  tl'  be  governed  as  to  length  along  the 
vein  or  lode  j  customs,  regulations  and  laws  in 

force  at  the  date  their  location.  A  mining-claim  lo- 
cated after  the  tenia  day  of  May,  eighteen  hundred  and 
seventy-two,  whether  located  by  one  or  more  persons, 
may  equal,  but  shall  not  exceed,  one  thousand  five  hun- 
dred feet  in  length  along  the  vein  or  lode ;  but  no  loca- 
tion of  a  mining-claim  shall  be  made  until  the  discovery 
of  the  vein  or  lode  within  the  limits  of  the  claim  loca- 
ted. No  claim  shall  extend  n'ore  than  three  hundred 
feet  on  each  side  of  the  middle  of  the  vein  at  the  sur- 
face, nor  shall  any  claim  be  limited  by  any  mining  regu- 
lation to  less  than  twenty-five  feet  on  each  side  of  the 
middle  of  the  vein  at  the  surface,  except  where  adverse 
rights  existing  on  the  tenth  day  of  May,  eighteen  hun- 
dred and  seventy-two,  render  such  limitation  necessary. 
The  end-lines  of  each  claim  shall  be  parallel  to  each 
other. 

Sec.  2321.  Proof  of  citizenship,  under  this  chapter, 
may  consist  in  the  case  of  an  individual,  of  his  own 
affidavit  thereof;  in  the  case  of  an  association  of  per- 
sons, unincorporated,  of  the  afl&davit  of  their  authorized 
agent,  made  on  his  own  knowledge,  or  upon  information 
and  belief;  and  in  the  case  of  a  corporation  organized 
under  the  laws  of  the  United  States,  or  of  any  State  or 
Territory  thereof,  by  the  filing  of  a  certified  copy  of  their 
charter  or  certificate  of  incorporation. 

Sec.  2322.  The  locators  of  all  mining  locations 
heretofore  made  or  which  shall  hereafter  be  made,  on 
any  mineral  vein,  lode,  or  ledge,  situated  on  the  public 
domain,  their  heirs  and  assigns,  where  no  adverse  claim 
exists  on  the  tenth  day  of  May,  eighteen  hundred  and 
seventy-two,  so  long  as  they  comply  with  the  laws  of  the 
United  States,  and  with  State,  Territorial,  and  local 
regulations  not  in  conflict  with  the  laws  of  the  United 
States  governing  their  possessory  title,  shall  have  the  ex- 
clusive right  of  possession  and  enjoyment  of  all  the  sur- 
face included  within  the  lines  of  their  locations,  and  of 


^*ll 


#■ 


ALASKA. 


117 


of 


all  veins,  lodes  and  ledges  throughout  their  entire  depth, 
the  top  or  apex  of  which  lies  inside  of  such  surface-lines 
extended  downward  vertically,  although  such  veins, 
lodes  or  ledges  may  so  far  depart  from  a  perpendicular 
in  their  course  downward  as  to  extend  outside  the  verti- 
cal side-ilnes  of  such  surface  locations.  But  their  right 
of  possession  to  such  outside  parts  of  such  veins  or 
ledges  shall  be  confined  to  such  portions  thereof  as 
lie  between  vertical  planes  drawn  downward,  as  above 
described,  through  the  end-lines  of  their  locations,  so 
continued  in  their  own  direction  that  such  planes 
will  intersect  such  exterior  parts  of  such  veins  or  ledges. 
And  nothing  in  this  section  shall  authorize  the  lo- 
cator or  possessor  of  a  vein  or  lode  which  extends 
in  its  downward  course  beyond  the  vertical  lines  of  his 
claim  to  enter  upon  the  surface  of  a  claim  owned 
or  possessed  by  another. 

Ssc.  2323.  Where  a  tunnel  is  run  for  the  develop- 
ment of  a  vein  or  lode,  or  for  the  discovery  of  mines,  the 
owners  of  such  tunnel  shall  have  the  right  of  possession 
of  all  veins  or  lodes  within  three  thousand  feet  from  the 
face  of  such  tunnel  on  the  line  thereof,  not  previously 
known  to  exist,  discovered  in  such  tunnel,  to  the 
same  extent  as  if  discovered  from  the  surface;  and 
locations  on  the  line  of  such  tunnel  of  veins  or  lodes  not 
appearing  on  the  surface,  made  by  other  parties  after  the 
commencement  of  the  tunnel,  and  while  the  same  is  be- 
ing prosecuted  with  reasonable  diligence,  shall  be  in- 
valid ;  but  failure  to  prosecute  the  work  on  the  tunnel  for 
six  months  shall  be  considered  as  an  abandonment  of  the 
right  to  all  undiscovered  veins  on  the  line  of  such 
tunnel. 

Sec.  2324.  The  miners  of  each  mining-district  may 
make  regulations  not  in  conflict  with  the  laws  of 
the  United  States,  or  with  the  laws  of  the  State  or 
Territory  in  which  the  district  is  situated,  governing  the 
location,  manner  of  recording,  amount  of  work  necessary 
to  hold  possession  of  a  mining-claim,  subject  to  the 
following  requirements :  The  location  must  be  dis- 
tinctly marked  on  the  ground  so  that  its  boundaries  can 


l\ 


■■■ 


118 


ALASKA. 


be  readily  traced.  All  records  of  mining- claims  here- 
after made  shall  contain  the  name  or  names  of  the 
locators,  the  date  of  the  location,  and  such  a  description 
of  the  claim  or  claims  located  by  reference  to  some 
natural  object  or  permanent  monument  as  will  identify 
the  claim.  On  each  claim  located  after  the  tenth  day  of 
May,  eighteen  hundred  and  seventy-two,  and  until  a 
patent  has  been  issued  therefor,  not  less  than  one 
hundred  dollars'  worth  of  labor  shall  be  performed  or  im- 
provements made  during  each  year.  On  all  claims  located 
prior  to  the  tenth  day  of  May,  eighteen  hundred  and 
seventy-two,  ten  dollars'  worth  of  labor  shall  be  per- 
formed or  improvements  made  by  the  tenth  day  of 
June,  eighteen  hundred  and  seventy-four,  and  each  year 
thereafter,  for  each  one  hundred  feet  in  length  along  the 
vein  until  a  pat  nt  has  been  issued  therefor;  but  where 
such  claims  are  held  in  common,  such  expenditure 
may  be  made  upon  any  one  claim  ;  and  upon  a  failure  to 
comply  with  these  conditions,  the  claim  or  mine 
upon  which  such  failure  occurred  shall  be  open  to 
relocation  in  the  same  manner  as  if  no  location  of 
the  same  had  ever  been  made,  provided  that  the 
original  locators,  their  heirs,  assigns,  or  legal  repre- 
sentatives, have  not  resumed  work  upon  the  claim  after 
failure  and  before  such  location.  Upon  the  failure 
of  any  one  of  several  co-owners  to  contribute  his  propor- 
tion of  the  expenditures  required  hereby,  the  co-owners 
who  have  performed  the  labor  or  made  the  improve- 
ments may,  at  the  expiration  of  the  year,  give  such  de- 
linquent co-owner  personal  notice  in  writing  or  no- 
tice by  publication  in  the  newspaper  published  nearest 
the  claim,  for  at  least  once  a  week  for  ninety  days,  and  if 
at  the  expiration  of  ninety  days  after  such  notice 
in  writing  or  by  publication  such  delinquent  should  fail 
or  refuse  to  contribute  his  proportion  of  the  expenditure 
required  by  this  section,  his  interest  in  the  claim 
shall  become  the  property  of  his  co-owners  who  have 
made  the  required  expenditures. 

Sec.  2325.     A  patent  for  any  land  claimed  and  lo- 
cated for  valuable  deposits  may  be  obtained  in  the  fol- 


ALASKA. 


119 


.™ 


lowing  manner :  Any  person,  association,  or  corpora- 
tion authorized  to  locate  a  claim  under  this  chapter,  hav- 
ing claimed  and  located  a  piece  of  land  for  such  pur- 
poses, who  has  or  have  complied  with  the  terms  of  this 
chapter,  may  file  in  the  proper  land-office  an  application 
for  a  patent,  under  oath,  showing  such  compliance,  to- 
gether with  a  plat  and  field- notes  of  the  claim  or  claims 
in  common,  made  by  or  under  the  direction  of  the  United 
States  Surveyor-General,  showing  accurately  the  bound- 
aries of  the  claim  or  claims,  which  shall  be  distinctly 
marked  by  monuments  on  the  ground,  and  shall  post  a 
copy  of  such  plat,  together  with  a  notice  of  such  appli- 
cation for  a  patent,  in  a  conspicuous  place  on  the  land 
embraced  in  such  plat  previous  to  the  filing  of  the  appli- 
cation for  a  patent,  and  shall  file  an  affidavit  of  at  least 
two  persons  that  such  notice  has  been  duly  posted,  and 
shall  file  a  copy  of  the  notice  in  such  land  ofiice,  and 
shall  thereupon  be  entitled  to  a  patent  for  the  land,  in 
the  manner  following:  The  register  of  the  land-office, 
upon  the  filing  of  such  application,  plat,  field-notes,  no- 
tices and  affidr  /its,  shall  publish  a  notice  that  such  ap- 
plication has  been  made,  for  the  period  of  sixty  days,  in 
a  newspaper  to  be  by  him  designated  as  published  near- 
est to  such  claim;  and  he  shall  also  post  such  notice  in 
his  oflBce  for  the  same  period.  The  claimant  at  the  time 
of  filing  this  application,  or  at  any  time  thereafter,  within 
the  sixty  days  of  publication,  shall  file  with  the  register 
a  certificate  of  the  United  States  Surveyor-General  that 
five  hundred  dollars'  worth  of  labor  has  been  expended 
or  improvements  made  upon  the  claim  by  himself  or 
grantors;  that  the  plat  is  correct,  with  such  further  de- 
scription by  such  reference  to  natural  objects  or  perma- 
neat  monuments  as  shall  identify  the  claim,  and  furnish 
an  accurate  description,  to  be  incorporated  in  the  patent. 
At  the  expiration  of  the  sixty  days  of  publication,  the 
claimant  shall  file  his  affidavit,  showing  that  the  plat  and 
notice  have  been  posted  in  a  conspicuous  place  on  the 
claim  during  such  period  of  publication.  If  no  adverse 
claim  shall  have  been  filed  with  the  register  and  the  re- 
ceiver of  the  proper  land-office  at  the  expiration  of  the 


, :  te'j 


120 


ALASKA. 


sixty  days  of  publication,  it  shall  be  assumed  that  the 
applicant  is  entitled  to  a  patent  upon  the  payment  to  the 
proper  oflficer  of  five  dollars  per  acre,  and  that  no  adverse 
claim  exists ;  and  thereafter  no  objection  from  third  par- 
ties to  the  issuance  of  a  patent  shall  be  heard,  except  it 
be  shown  that  the  applicant  has  failed  to  comply  with  the 
terms  of  this  chapter. 

Sec.  2326.  Where  an  adverse  claim  is  filed  during 
the  period  of  publication,  it  shall  be  upon  oath  of  the 
person  or  persons  making  the  same,  and  shall  show  the 
nature,  boundaries  and  extent  of  such  adverse  claim,  and 
all  proceedings,  except  the  publication  of  notice  and 
making  and  filing  of  the  aflfidavit  thereof,  shall  be  stayed 
until  the  controversy  shall  have  been  settled  or  decided 
by  a  court  of  competent  jurisdiction,  or  the  adverse 
claim  waived.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  adverse  claim- 
ant, within  thirty  days  after  filing  his  claim,  to  commence 
proceedings  in  a  court  of  competent  jurisdiction,  to  de- 
termine the  question  of  the  right  of  possession,  and 
prosecute  the  same  with  reasonable  diligence  to  final 
judgment ;  and  a  failure  so  to  do  shall  be  a  waiver  of  his 
adverse  claim.  After  such  judgment  shall  have  been 
rendered,  the  party  entitled  to  the  possession  of  the 
claim,  or  any  portion  thereof,  may,  without  giving  further 
notice,  file  a  certified  copy  of  the  judgment-roll  with  the 
register  of  the  land-office,  together  with  the  certificate 
of  the  surveyor-general  that  the  requisite  amount  of 
labor  has  been  expended  or  improvements  made  thereon, 
and  the  description  required  in  other  cases,  and  shall  pay 
to  the  receiver  five  dollars  per  acre  for  his  claim,  together 
with  the  proper  fees,  whereupon  the  whole  proceedings 
and  the  judgment-roll  shall  be  certified  by  the  register  to 
the  Commissioner  of  the  General  Land  Office,  and  a 
patent  shall  issue  thereon  for  the  claim,  or  such  portion 
thereof  as  the  applicant  shall  appear,  from  the  decision 
of  the  court,  to  rightly  possess.  If  it  appears  from  the 
decision  of  the  court  that  several  parties  are  entitled  to 
separate  and  different  portions  of  the  claim,  each  party 
may  pay  for  his  portion  of  the  claim  with  the  proper 
fees,  andffilethe  certificate  and  description  by  the  sur- 


o 

W 


w 


VI 


Hi 

w 


H 


P3 


ilii 


illN: 


^!t| 


5  I 

H 
I 


■'i*^'-'» 


o 

PS 


:<iu 


ALASKA. 


121 


.S 

PES 

o 
pa 


pi 
W 

y. 


O 


veyor-general,  whereupon  the  register  shall  certify  the 
proceedings  and  judgment-roll  to  the  Commissioner  of 
the  General  Land  Office,  as  in  the  preceding  case,  and 
patents  shall  issue  to  the  several  parties  according  to 
their  respective  rights.  Nothing  herein  contained  shall 
be  construed  to  prevent  the  alienation  of  a  title  con- 
veyed by  a  patent  for  a  mining-claim  to  any  person 
whatever. 

Sec.  2327.  The  description  of  vein  or  lode  claims, 
upon  surveyed  lands,  shall  designate  the  location  of  the 
claim  with  reference  to  the  lines  of  the  public  surveys, 
but  need  not  conform  therewith ;  but  where  a  patent 
shall  be  issued  for  claims  upon  unsurveyed  lands,  the 
surveyor-general,  in  extending  the  surveys,  shall  adjust 
the  same  to  the  boundaries  of  such  patented  claim,  ac- 
cording to  the  plat  or  description  thereof,  but  so  as  in  no 
case  to  interfere  with  or  change  the  location  of  any  such 
patented  claim. 

Sec.  2328.  Applications  for  patents  for  mining-claims 
under  former  laws  now  pending  may  be  prosecuted  to  a 
final  decision  in  the  General  Land  Office;  biit  in  such 
cases  where  adverse  rights  are  not  aflfected  thereby,  pat- 
ents may  issue  in  pursuance  of  the  provisions  of  this 
chapter;  and  all  patents  for  mining-claims  upon  veins  or 
lodes  heretofore  issued  shall  convey  all  the  rights  and 
privileges  conferred  by  this  chapter  where  no  adverse 
rights  existed  on  the  tenth  day  of  May,  eighteen  hui- 
dred  and  seventy-two. 

Sec.  2329.  Claims  usually  called  "  placers,"  includ- 
ing all  forms  of  deposit,  excepting  veins  of  quartz,  or 
other  rock  in  place,  shall  be  subject  to  entry  and  patent, 
under  like  circumstances  and  conditions,  and  upon  simi- 
lar proceedings,  as  are  provided  for  vein  or  lode  claims ; 
but  where  the  lands  have  been  previously  surveyed  by 
the  United  States,  the  entry  in  its  exterior  limits  shall 
conform  to  the  legal  subdivisions  of  the  public  lands. 

Sec.  2330.     Legal  subdivisions  of  forty  acres  may  be 

subdivided  into  ten-acre  tracts ;  and  two  or  more  persons, 

or  associations  of  persons,  having  contiguous  claims  of 

any  size,  although  such  claims  may  be  less  than  ten  acres 
0 — 


:s3..'' 


I  I 


122 


ALASKA. 


each,  may  make  joint  entry  thereof;  but  no  location  of  a 
placf.r-claim,  made  after  the  ninth  day  of  July,  eighteen 
hundred  and  seventy,  shall  exceed  one  hundred  and  sixty 
acres  for  any  one  person  or  association  of  persons,  which 
location  shall  conform  to  the  United  States  surveys;  and 
nothing  in  this  section  contained  shall  defeat  or  impair 
any  bona  fide  pre-emption  or  homestead  claim  upon  agri- 
cultural lands,  or  authorize  the  sale  of  the  improvements 
of  any  bona  fide  settler  to  any  purchaser. 

Sec.  2331.  Where  placer- claims  are  upon  surveyed 
lands,  and  conform  to  legal  subdivisions,  no  further  sur- 
vey or  plat  shall  be  required,  and  all  placer-mining  claims 
located  after  the  tenth  day  of  May,  eighteen  hundred 
and  seventy-two,  shall  conform  as  near  as  practicable 
with  the  United  States  system  of  public-land  surveys, 
and  the  rectangular  subdivisions  of  such  surveys,  and  no 
such  location  shall  include  more  than  twenty  acres  for 
each  individual  claimant;  but  where  placer-claims  can 
not  be  conformed  to  legal  subdivisions,  survey  and  plat 
shall  be  made  as  on  unsurveyed  lands ;  and  where  by  the 
segregation  of  mineral  lands  in  any  legal  subdivision  a 
quantity  of  agricultural  land  less  than  forty  acres  re- 
mains, such  fractional  portion  of  agricultural  land  may 
be  entered  by  any  party  qualified  by  law,  for  homestead 
or  preemption  purposes. 

Sec.  2332.  Where  such  person  or  association,  they 
and  their  grantors,  have  held  and  worked  their  claims  for 
a  period  equal  to  the  time  prescribed  by  the  statute  of 
limitations  for  mining-claims  of  the  State  or  Territory 
where  the  .same  may  V)e  situated,  evidence  of  such  pos- 
session and  working  of  the  claims  for  such  period  shall 
be  sufficient  to  establish  a  right  to  a  patent  thereto  un- 
der this  chapter,  in  the  absence  of  any  adverse  claim ; 
but  nothing  in  this  chapter  shall  be  deemed  to  impair 
any  lien  which  may  have  attached  in  any  way  whatever 
to  any  mining-claim  or  property  thereto  attached  prior 
to  the  issuance  of  a  patent. 

Sec.  2333.  Where  the  same  person,  association,  or 
corporation  is  in  possession  of  a  placer-claim,  and  al.so  a 
vein  or  lode  included  within  the  boundaries  thereof  ap- 


ALASKA. 


123 


plication  shall  be  made  for  a  patent  for  the  placer-claim, 
with  the  statement  that  it  includes  such  vein  or  lode, 
and  in  such  a  case  a  patent  shall  issue  for  the  placer- 
claim,  subject  to  the  provisions  of  this  chapter,  including 
such  vein  or  lode,  upon  the  payment  of  five  dollars  per 
acre  for  such  vein  or  lode  claim,  and  twenty-five  feet  of 
surface  on  each  side  thereof.  The  remainder  of  the 
placer-claim,  or  any  placer-claim  not  embracing  any  vein 
or  lode-claim,  shall  be  paid  for  at  the  rate  of  two  dollars 
and  fifty  cents  per  acre,  together  with  ill  costs  of  pro- 
ceedings ;  and  where  a  vein  or  lode,  such  as  is  described 
in  section  twenty-three  hundred  and  twenty,  is  known 
to  exist  within  the  boundaries  of  a  placer-claim,  an  ap- 
plication for  a  patent  for  such  placer-claim  which  does 
not  include  an  application  for  the  vein  or  lode-claim  shall 
be  construed  as  a  conclusive  declaration  that  the  claimant 
of  the  placer-claim  has  no  right  of  possession  of  the 
vein  or  lode  claim ;  but  where  the  existence  of  a  vein  or 
lode  in  a  placer  claim  is  not  known,  a  patent  for  the 
placer-claim  shall  convey  all  valuable  mineral  and  other 
deposits  within  the  boundaries  thereof. 

Sec.  2334.  The  surveyor-general  of  the  United 
States  may  appoint  in  each  land-district  containing 
mineral  lands  as  many  competent  surveyors  as  shall 
apply  for  appointment  to  survey  mining-claims.  The 
expenses  of  the  survey  of  vein  or  lode  claims,  and 
the  survey  and  sub-division  of  placer-claims  into  smaller 
quantities  than  one  hundred  and  sixty  acres,  together 
with  the  cost  of  publications  of  notices,  shall  be  paid  by 
the  applicants,  and  they  shall  be  at  liberty  to  obtain  the 
same  at  the  most  reasonable  rates,  and  they  shall  also  be 
at  liberty  to  employ  any  United  States  deputy  surveyor 
to  make  the  survey.  The  Commissioner  of  the  General 
Land  Office  shall  also  have  power  to  establish  the  minu- 
mum  charges  for  surveys  and  publication  of  notices 
under  this  chapter;  and,  in  case  of  excessive  charges  for 
publication,  he  may  designate  any  newspaper  published 
in  a  land-district  where  mines  are  situated  for  the  publi- 
cation of  mining-notices  in  such  district,  and  fix  the  rates 
to  be  charged  by  such  paper;  and,   to  the  end  that 


^1 


'.#1 


JIMU' 


!-1*t*"''J'» 


ll'l 


J,  ,1, 


124 


ALASKA. 


the  Commissioner  maj'^  be  fully  informed  on  the  subject, 
each  applicant  shall  file  with  the  register  a  sworn 
statement  of  all  charges  and  fees  paid  by  such  ap- 
plicant for  publication  and  surveys,  together  with  all  fees 
and  money  paid  the  register  and  the  receiver  of  the  land- 
ofl&ce,  which  statement  shall  be  transmitted,  with  the 
other  papers  in  the  case,  to  the  Commissioner  of  the 
General  Land  Office. 

Sec.  2335.  All  afiidavits  required  to  oe  made  under 
this  chapter  may  be  verified  before  any  officer  author- 
ized to  administer  oaths  within  the  land-district  where 
the  claims  may  be  situated,  and  all  testimony  and  proofs 
may  be  taken  before  any  such  officer,  and,  when 
duly  certified  by  the  officer  taking  the  i.ame,  shall 
have  the  same  force  and  effect  as  if  taken  before 
the  register  and  recei^'er  of  the  land-office.  In  cases 
of  contest  as  to  the  mineral  or  agricultural  character 
of  land,  the  testimony  and  proofs  may  be  taken  as  herein 
provided  on  personal  notice  of  at  least  ten  days  to  the  op- 
posing party;  or  if  such  party  cannot  be  found,  then  by 
publication  of  at  least  once  a  week  for  thirty  days  in  a 
newspaper,  to  be  designated  by  the  register  of  the  land- 
office  as  published  nearest  to  the  location  of  such  land ; 
and  the  register  shall  require  proof  that  such  notice  has 
been  given. 

Sec.  2336.  Where  two  or  more  veins  intersect  or 
cross  each  other,  priority  of  title  shall  govern,  and  such 
prior  location  shall  be  entitled  to  all  ore  or  mineral  con- 
tained within  the  space  of  intersection;  but  the  subse- 
quent location  shall  have  the  right  of  way  through  the 
space  of  intersection  for  the  purposes  of  the  convenient 
working  of  the  mine.  And  where  two  or  more  veins 
unite,  the  oldest  or  prior  location  shall  take  the  \t':v  be- 
low the  point  of  union,  including  all  the  space  of  inter- 
section. 

Sec.  2337.  Where  non-mineral  land  not  contiguous 
to  the  vein  or  lode  is  used  or  occupied  by  the  proprietor 
of  such  vein  or  lode  for  mining  or  milling  purposes, 
such  non-adjacent  surface-ground  may  be  embraced  and 
included  in  an  application  for  a  patent  for  such  vein  or 


T 


ALASKA. 


125 


lode,  and  the  same  may  be  patented  therewith,  subject 
to  the  same  prelim'narj'  requirements  as  to  survey  and 
notice  as  are  applicable  to  veins  or  lodes ;  but  no  location 
hereafter  made  of  such  non-adjacent  land  shall  exceed 
five  acres,  and  payment  for  the  same  must  be  made  at 
the  same  rate  as  fixed  by  this  chapter  for  the  superfir-=>s 
of  the  lode  The  owner  of  a  quartz-mill  or  deduciidii 
works,  not  owning  a  mine  in  connection  therewith,  n'c.y 
also  receive  a  patent  for  his  mill-site,  as  provided  in  this 
section. 

Sec.  2338.  As  a  condition  of  sale,  in  the  absence  of 
necessary  legislation  by  Congress,  the  local  legislature  of 
any  State  or  Territory  may  provide  rules  for  work- 
ing mines,  involving  easements,  drainage  and  other 
necessary  means  to  their  complete  development ;  and 
those  conditions  shall  be  fully  expressed  in  the  patent. 

Sec.  2339.  Whenever,  by  priority  of  possession, 
rights  to  the  use  of  water  for  mining,  agricultural, 
manufacturing,  or  other  purposes,  have  vested  and  ac- 
crued, and  the  same  are  recognized  and  acknowledged 
by  the  local  customs,  laws  and  the  decisions  of  courts 
the  po.ssessors  and  owners  of  such  vested  rights  shall  be 
maintained  and  protected  in  the  same;  and  the  right  of 
way  for  the  construction  of  ditches  and  canals  for  the 
purposes  herein  specified  is  acknowledged  and  con- 
firmed ;  but  whenever  any  person,  in  the  construction  of 
any  ditch  or  canal,  injures  or  damages  the  possession  of 
any  settler  on  the  public  domain,  the  p-  rty  committing 
such  injury  or  damage  shall  be  liable  to  che  party  injured 
for  such  injury  or  damage. 

Sec.  2340.  AH  patents  granted,  or  pre-emption  or 
homesteads  allowed,  shall  be  .subject  tO  any  vested  and 
accrued  water-rights,  or  rights  to  ditches  and  reservoirs 
used  in  connection  with  such  water-rights,  as  may  have 
been  acquired  under  or  recognized  by  the  preceding  sec- 
tion. 

Sec.  2341.  Whenever,  up6n  the  lands  heretofore 
designated  as  mineral  lands,  which  have  been  excluded 
from  survey  and  sale,  there  have  been  homesteads  made 
by  citizens  of  the  United  States,  or  persons  who  have  dc- 


126 


ALASKA. 


fW^fl 


n 


!i  i'i  !i 

III 


clared  their  intention  to  become  citizens,  which  home- 
steads have  been  made,  improved  and  used  for  agri- 
cultural purposes,  and  upon  which  there  have  been 
no  valuable  mines  of  gold,  silver,  cinnabar  or  copper 
discovered,  and  which  are  properly  agricultural  lands, 
the  settlers  or  owners  of  such  homesteads  shall  have  a 
right  of  pre-emption  thereto,  and  shall  be  entitled  to  pur- 
chase the  same  at  the  price  of  one  dollar  and  twenty- five 
cents  per  acre,  and  in  quantity'  not  to  exceed  one  hun- 
dred and  sixty  acres ;  or  they  may  avail  themselves  of 
the  provisions  of  chapter  five  of  this  title,  relating  to 
"Homesteads." 

Sec.  2342.  Upon  the  survey  of  the  lands  described 
in  the  preceding  section,  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior 
may  designate  and  set  apart  such  portions  of  the  same  as 
are  clearly  agricultural  lands,  which  lands  .shall  there- 
after be  subject  to  preemption  and  .sale  as  other  public 
lands,  and  be  subject  to  all  the  laws  and  regulations  ap- 
plicable to  the  same. 

Skc.  2343.  The  President  is  authorized  to  establish 
additional  land  districts  and  to  appoint  the  necessary 
ofl&cers  under  existing  laws  wherever  he  may  deem  the 
same  necessary  for  the  public  convenience  in  executing 
the  provisions  of  this  chapter. 

Sec.  2344.  Nothing  contained  in  this  chapter  shall 
be  construed  to  impair,  in  any  way,  rights  or  interests  in 
mining  property  acquired  under  existing  laws;  nor  to 
afiect  the  provisions  of  the  act  entitled  "  An  act  granting 
to  A.  Sutro  the  right  of  way  and  other  privileges  to  aid 
in  the  con.struction  of  a  draining  and  exploring  tunnel  to 
the  Comstock  lode,  in  the  State  of  Nevada,"  approved 
July  twenty-five,  eighteen  hundred  and  sixty-six. 

Sec.  2345.  The  provisions  of  the  preceding  sections 
of  this  chapter  shall  not  apply  to  the  mineral  lands  situ- 
ated in  the  states  of  Michigan,  Wisconsin  and  Minne- 
sota, which  are  declared  free  and  open  to  explora- 
tion and  purchase,  according  to  legal  sub-divisions,  in 
like  manner  as  before  the  tenth  day  of  May,  eighteen 
hundred  and  seventy-two.  And  any  6o/ia  fide  entries  of 
such   lauds  within    the   states   named   since   the   tenth 


ALASKA. 


127 


of  May,  eighteen  hundred  and  seventy-two  may  be 
patented  without  reference  to  any  of  the  foregoing 
provisions  of  this  chapter.  Such  lands  shall  be  offered  for 
public  sale  in  the  same  manner,  at  the  same  minimum 
price  and  under  the  same  rights  of  pre  emptiou  as  other 
public  lands. 

Sec.  2346.  No  act  passed  at  the  first  session  of  the 
thirty-eighth  Congress,  granting  lands  to  states  or  cor- 
porations to  aid  in  the  construction  of  roads  or  for  other 
purposes,  or  to  extend  the  time  of  grants  made  prior  to 
the  thirtieth  da)'  of  January,  eighteen  hundred  and  sixty- 
five,  shall  be  so  construed  as  to  embrace  mineral 
lands,  which  in  all  cases  are  reserved  exclusively  to  the 
United  States,  unless  otherwi.se  .specially  provided  in  the 
act  or  acts  making  the  grant. 

REPEAI^  PROVIF     'NS. 
Title  lxxiv. 

Sec.  5595.  The  foregoing  seventy-three  'ties  em- 
brace the  statutes  of  the  United  States  geneial  and  per- 
manent in  their  nature  in  force  on  the  ist  day  of  .  »ecem- 
ber,  one  thousand  eight  hundred  and  seventy-three, 
as  revised  and  consolidated  by  commissioners  appointed 
under  an  act  of  Congress,  and  the  same  .shall  be  designa 
ted  and  cited  as  The  Revi.sed  Statutes  of  the  United 
States. 

Sec.  5596.  All  acts  of  Congress  passed  prior  to  said 
first  day  of  December,  one  thousand  eight  hundred 
and  .seventy-three,  any  portion  of  which  is  embraced  in 
any  section  of  said  revision,  are  hereby  repealed,  and  the 
.section  applicable  thereto  shall  be  in  force  in  lieu 
thereof;  all  parts  of  such  acts  not  contained  in  such 
revision,  having  been  repealed  or  superseded  by 
.subsequent  acts,  or  not  being  general  and  permanent 
in  their  n  .itre  :  Provided,  That  the  incorporation  into 
such  revision  of  any  general  and  permanent  provision, 
taken  from  an  act  making  appropriation.s,  or  from 
an  act  containin^^  other  provisions  of  a  private,  local 
or  temporary  character  shall  not  repeal  or  in  any  way 


;i^^' 


'II 
^1 


r\ 


128 


ALASKA. 


Aft 


'li' 


ill 


s 


aflFect  any  appropriation,  local  or  temporary  char- 
acter, contained  in  any  of  said  acts,  but  the  same  shall 
remain  in  force ;  and  all  acts  of  Congress  passed  prior  to 
said  last-named  day,  no  part  of  which  are  embraced 
in  said  revision,  shall  not  be  affected  or  changed  by  its 
enactment. 

Sec.  5597.  The  repeal  of  the  several  acts  embraced 
in  said  revision  shall  not  affect  any  act  done,  or  any  right 
accruing  or  accrued,  or  any  suit  or  proceeding  had 
or  commenced  in  any  civil  cause  before  the  said  repeal, 
but  all  rights  and  liabilities  under  said  acts  shall 
continue,  and  may  be  enforced  in  the  same  manner 
as  if  said  repeal  had  not  been  made;  nor  shall  said  repeal 
in  any  manner  affect  the  right  to  any  office  or  change  the 
term  or  tenure  thereof. 

Sec.  5598.  All  offenses  committed  and  all  penalties 
or  forfeitures  incurred  under  any  statute  embraced  in 
said  revision  prior  to  said  repeal,  may  be  prosecuted  and 
punished  in  the  same  manner  and  with  the  same  effect 
as  if  said  repeal  had  not  been  made. 

Sec.  5599.  All  acts  of  limitation,  whether  applicable 
to  civil  causes  and  proceedings,  or  to  the  prosecution  of 
offenses,  or  for  the  recovery  of  penalties  or  forfeitures 
embraced  in  said  revision  and  covered  by  .said  re- 
peal shall  not  be  affected  thereby,  but  all  suits,  proceed- 
ings or  pro.secutions,  whether  civil  or  criminal,  for  causes 
arising,  or  acts  done  or  committed  prior  to  said  repeal, 
may  be  commenced  and  prosecuted  within  the  same 
time  as  if  said  repeal  had  not  been  made. 

Sec.  5600.  The  arrangement  and  classification  of 
the  several  sections  of  the  revision  have  been  made 
for  the  purpose  of  a  more  convenient  and  orderly 
arrangement  of  the  same,  and  therefore  no  inference 
or  presumption  of  a  legislative  construction  is  to  be 
drawn  by  reason  of  the  Title  under  which  in\  particular 
section  is  placed. 

Sec.  560  [.  The  enactment  of  the  said  revision  is  not 
to  affect  or  repeal  any  act  of  Congress  passed  since 
the  first  day  of  December,  one  thousand  eight  hun- 
dred and  seventy- three,  and  all  acts  passed  since  that 


ALASKA. 


129 


date  are  to  have  full  effect  as  if  passed  after  the 
enactment  of  this  revision,  and  so  far  as  such  acts 
vary  from  or  conflict  with  any  provision  contained 
in  said  revision  they  are  to  have  effect  as  subse- 
quent statutes,  and  as  repealing  any  portion  of  the 
revision  inconsistent  therewith. 
Approved  June  22,  1874. 


AN  ACT  to  amend  the  act  entitled  "  An  act  to  promote  the  de- 
velopment of  the  niinin;;  resources  of  the  United  States," 
passed  May  tenth,  eighteen  hundred  and  seventy-two. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representa- 
tives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress  as- 
sembled, That  the  provisions  of  the  fifth  section  of  the 
act  entitled  "  An  act  to  promote  the  development  of  the 
mining  resources  of  the  United  States,"  passed  May 
tenth,  eighteen  hundred  and  seventy-two,  which  requires 
expenditures  of  labor  and  improvements  on  claims  lo- 
cated prior  to  the  passage  of  said  act  are  hereby  so 
amended  that  the  time  for  the  first  annual  expenditure 
on  claims  located  prior  to  the  passage  of  said  act  shall  be 
extended  to  the  first  day  of  January,  eighteen  hundred 
and  seventy-five. 

Approved,  June  6,  1874  (18  Stat,  61). 


AN  ACT  to  amend  section  two  thousand  three  hundred  and 
twenty-four  of  the  Revised  Statutes,  relating  to  the  develop- 
ment of  the  mining  resources  ol'  the  United  States. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representa- 
tives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress  as- 
sembled, That  section  two  thousand  three  hundred  and 
twenty-four  of  the  Revised  Statutes  be,  and  the  same  is 
hereby  amended  so  that  where  a  person  or  company  has 
or  may  run  a  tunnel  for  the  purpose  of  developing  a 
load  or  lodes,  owned  by  said  pi  rson  or  company,  the 
money  so  expended  in  .said  tunnel  shall  be  taken  and 
considered  as  expended  on  said  lode  or  lodes,  whether 
located  prior  to  or  since  the  passage  of  said  act,  and  such 
person  or  company  shall  not  be  required  to  perform  work 


IF 


.45 


,:il!i 


130 


ALASKA. 


n     ' 


on  the  surface  of  said  lode  or  lodes  in  order  to  hold  the 
same  as  required  by  said  act. 

Approved  February  ii,  1875  (18  Stat.,  315). 

AN  ACT  to  exclude  the  States  of  Missouri  and  Kansas  from  the 
provisions  of  the  act  of  Congress  entitled  "  An  act  to  pro- 
mote the  development  of  the  mining  resources  of  the  United 
States,"  approved  May  tenth,  eighteen  hundred  and  seventy- 
two. 

Be  it  inacled  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representa- 
tives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress  as- 
sembled, That  within  the  States  of  Missouri  and  Kansas 
deposits  of  coal,  iron,  lead,  or  other  mineral  be,  and  they 
are  hereby,  excluded  from  the  operation  of  the  act  en- 
titled "  An  act  to  promote  the  development  of  the  mining 
resources  of  the  United  States,"  approved  May  tenth, 
eighteen  hundred  and  seventy-two,  and  all  lands  in 
said  States  shall  be  subject  to  disposal  as  agricultural 
lands. 

Approved  May  5,  1876  (19  Stat  ,  52). 


I* 


i'l 


AN  ACT  authorizing  the  citizens  of  Colorado,  Nevada  and  the 
Territories  to  fell  and  remove  timber  on  the  public  domain 
for  mining  and  domestic  purposes. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representa- 
tives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress  as- 
sembled, That  all  citizens  of  the  United  States  and 
other  persons,  bona  fide  residents  of  the  State  of  Colo- 
rado or  Nevada,  or  either  of  the  Territories  of  New 
Mexico,  Arizona.  Utah,  Wyoming,  Dakota,  Idaho,  or 
Montana,  and  all  other  mineral  districts  of  the  United 
States,  shall  be  and  are  hereby,  authorized  and  permitted 
to  fell  and  remove  for  building,  agricultural,  mining,  or 
other  domestic  purposes,  any  timber  or  other  trees  grow- 
ing or  being  on  the  public  lands,  said  lands  being  min- 
eral, and  not  subject  to  entry  under  existing  laws  of  the 
United  States,  except  for  mineral  entry,  in  either  of  said 
States,  Territories  or  di.stricts  of  which  such  citizens  or 
persons  may  be  at  the  time  bona  fide  residents,  subject 


Wm^ 


ALASKA. 


131 


to  such  rules  and  regulations  as  the  Secretary  of  the  In- 
terior may  prescribe  for  the  protection  of  the  timber  and 
of  the  undergrowth  growing  upon  such  lands,  and  for 
other  purposes:  Provided,  The  provisions  of  this  act 
shall  not  extend  to  railroad  corporations. 

Sec.  2.  That  it  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  register  and 
the  receiver  of  any  local  land-office  in  whose  district  any 
mineral  land  may  be  situated  to  ascertain  from  time  to 
time  whether  any  timber  is  being  cut  or  used  upon  any 
such  lands,  except  for  the  purposes  authorized  by  this 
act,  within  their  respective  land  districts ;  and,  if  so,  they 
shall  immediately  notify  the  Commissioner  of  the  Gen- 
CT-al  Land  Office  of  that  fact ;  and  all  necessary  expenses 
incurred  in  making  such  proper  examinations  shall  be 
paid  and  allowed  such  register  and  receiver  in  making 
up  their  next  quarterly  accounts. 

Sec.  3.  Any  person  or  persons  who  shall  violate  the 
provisions  of  this  act,  or  any  rules  and  regulations  in 
pursuance  thereof  made  by  the  Secretary  of  the  In- 
terior, shall  be  deemed  guilty  of  a  misdemeanor,  and, 
upon  conviction,  shall  be  fined  in  any  sum  not  exceed- 
ing five  hundred  dollars,  and  to  which  may  be  added 
imprisonment  for  any  term  not  exceeding  six  months. 

Approved  June  3,  1878  (20  Stat.,  88). 

AN  ACT  to  amend  sections  twenty-three  hundred  and  twenty- 
four  and  twenty-three  hundred  and  twenty-five  of  the  Re- 
vised Statutes  of  the  United  States  concerning  mineral 
lands. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representa- 
tives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress  as- 
sembled. That  section  twenty-three  hundred  and  twenty- 
five  of  the  Revised  Statutes  of  the  United  States  be 
amended  by  adding  thereto  the  following  words:  ''Pro- 
vided, That  where  the  claimant  for  a  patent  is  not  a  resi- 
dent of  or  within  the  land-district  wherein  the  vein, 
lode,  ledge  or  deposit  sought  to  be  patented  is  located, 
the  application  for  patent  and  the  affidavits  required  to 
be  made  in  this  section  by  the  claimant  for  such  patent 
may  be  made  by  his,  her,  or  its  authorized  agent,  where 


m 


132 


ALASKA. 


said  agent  is  conversant  with  the  facts  sought  to  be  es- 
tablished by  such  affidavits :  And  provided,  That  this 
section  shall  apply  to  all  applications  now  pending  for 
patents  to  mineral  lands." 

Sbc.  2.  That  section  twenty-three  hundred  and 
twenty-four  of  the  Revised  Statutes  of  the  United  States 
be  amended  by  adding  the  following  words :  "  Provided, 
That  the  period  within  which  the  work  required  to  be 
done  annually  on  all  unpatented  mineral  claims  shall 
commence  on  the  firs'  day  of  January  succeeding  the 
date  of  location  of  such  claim,  and  this  section  shall  ap- 
ply to  all  claims  located  since  the  tenth  day  of  May, 
anno  Domini  eighteen  hundred  and  seventy-two." 

Approved  January  22,  1880  (21  Stat.,  61). 


AN  ACT  to  amend  section  twenty-three  hundred  and  twenty-six 
of  the  Revised  Statutes  relating  to  suits  at  law  affecting  the 
title  to  mining- claims. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representa- 
tives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress  as- 
sembled, That  if,  in  any  action  brought  pursuant  to  sec- 
tion twenty-three  hundred  and  twenty-six  of  the  Revised 
Statutes,  title  to  the  ground  in  controversy  shall  not  be 
established  by  either  party,  the  jury  shall  so  find,  and 
judgment  shall  be  entered  according  to  the  verdict.  In 
such  case  costs  shall  not  be  allowed  to  either  party,  and 
the  claimant  shall  not  proceed  in  the  land  office  or  be 
entitled  to  a  patent  for  the  ground  in  controversy  until 
he  shall  have  perfected  his  title. 

Approved  March  3,  1881  (21  Stat.,  505). 


AN  ACT  to  amend  section  twenty-three  hundred  and  twenty-six 
of  the  Revised  Statutes  in  regard  to  nrineral  lands  and  for 
other  purposes. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Seriate  and  House  of  Representa- 
tives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress  as- 
sembled, That  the  adverse  claim  required  by  section 
twenty-three  hundred   and  twenty-six  of  the   Revised 


ALASKA. 


133 


Statutes  may  be  verified  by  the  oath  of  any  duly  author- 
ized agent  or  attorney-in-fact  of  the  adverse  claimant 
cognizant  of  the  facts  stated ;  and  the  adverse  claimant, 
if  residing  or  at  the  time  being  beyond  the  limits  of  the 
district  wherein  the  claim  is  situated,  may  make  oath  to 
the  adverse  claim  before  the  clerk  of  any  court  of  record 
of  the  United  States  or  the  State  or  Territory  where  the 
adverse  claimant  may  then  be,  or  before  any  notary  pub- 
lic of  such  State  or  Territory. 

Sec.  2.  That  applicants  for  mineral  patents,  if  re- 
siding beyond  the  limits  of  the  district  wherein  the  claim 
is  situated,  may  make  any  oath  or  aflSdavit  required  for 
proof  of  citizenship  before  the  clerk  of  any  court  of 
record,  or  before  any  notary  public  of  any  State  or  Ter- 
ritory. 

Approved  April  26,  1882  (22  Stat.,  49). 


An  ACT  to  exclude  the  public  lands  in  Alabama  from  the  opera- 
tion of  the  laws  relating  to  mineral  lauds. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Settate  and  House  of  Representa- 
tives of  the  Lhiitcd  States  of  America  in  Congress  as- 
sembled, That  within  the  State  of  Alabama  all  public 
lands,  whether  mineral  or  otherwise,  shall  be  subject  to 
disposal  only  as  agricultural  lands  :  Provided,  however, 
That  all  lands  which  have  heretofore  been  reported  to 
the  General  Land  Office  as  containing  coal  and  iron  .shall 
first  be  offered  at  public  sale :  And  provided  further. 
That  any  bona  fide  entry  under  the  provisions  of  the 
homestead  law  of  lands  within  said  State  heretofore 
made  may  be  patented  without  reference  to  an  act  ap- 
proved May  tenth,  eighteen  hundred  and  seventy-two, 
entitled,  "An  act  to  promote  the  development  of  the 
mining  resources  of  the  Unit'  d  States,"  in  cases  where 
the  persons  making  application  for  such  patents  have  in 
all  other  respects  complied  with  the  homestead  law  re- 
lating thereto. 

Approved  March  3,  1883  (22  Stat.,  487). 


■■i  I 


134  ALASKA. 

AN  ACT  providing  a  civil  government  for  Alaska. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representa- 
tives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress  as- 
sembled,       *H-******* 

Sec.  8.  That  the  said  district  of  Alaska  is  hereby 
created  a  land  district,  and  a  United  States  land  office 
for  said  district  is  hereby  located  at  Sitka.  The  com- 
missioner provided  for  by  this  act  to  reside  at  Sitka  shall 
be  ex  officio  register  of  said  land  office,  and  the  clerk 
provided  for  by  this  act  shall  be  ex  officio  receiver  of 
public  moneys,  and  the  marshal  provided  for  by  this  act 
shall  be  ex  officio  surveyor-general  of  said  district  and 
the  laws  of  the  United  States  relating  to  mining  claims, 
and  the  rights  incident  thereto,  shall,  from  and  after  the 
passage  of  this  act,  be  in  full  force  and  effisct  in  said  dis- 
trict, under  the  administration  thereof  herein  provided 
for,  subject  to  such  regulations  as  may  be  made  by  the 
Secretary  of  the  Interior,  approved  by  the  President: 
Provided,  That  the  Indians  or  other  persons  in  said  dis- 
trict shall  not  be  disturbed  in  the  possession  of  any  lands 
actually  in  their  use  or  occupation  or  now  claimed  by 
them,  but  the  terms  under  which  such  persons  may  ac- . 
quire  title  to  such  lands  is  reserved  for  future  legislation 
by  Congress :  And  provided  further,  That  parties  who 
have  located  mines  or  mineral  privileges  therein  under 
the  laws  of  the  United  States  applicable  to  the  public 
domain,  or  who  have  occupied  and  improved  or  exer- 
cised acts  of  ownership  over  such  claims,  shall  not  be 
disturbed  therein,  but  shall  be  allowed  to  perfect  their 
title  to  such  claims  by  payment  as  aforesaid :  And  pro- 
vided also,  That  the  laud  not  exceeding  six  hundred  and 
forty  acres  at  any  station  now  occupied  as  missionary 
stations  among  the  Indian  tribes  in  said  section,  with  the 
improvements  thereon  erected  by  or  for  such  societies, 
shall  be  continued  in  the  occupancy  of  the  several  re- 
ligious societies  to  which  said  missionary  stations  re- 
spectively belong  until  action  by  Congress.  But  nothing 
contained  in  this  act  shall  be  construed  to  put  in  force 


AN 

tivesX 
sembl 

corn] 

Unit] 

town! 

per 


ALASKA. 


135 


ill  said  district  the  general  land  laws  of   the   United 
States. 

*^L'  *!*  hl^  •!«  «L(  «^ 

•l*  'I*  'y*  »y»  ^^  i^ 

Approved  May  17,  1884  (23  Stat.,  24). 


AN  ACT  making  appropriations  for  sundry  civil  expenses  of  the 
Government  for  the  fiscal  year  ending  June  thirtieth,  eight- 
een hundred  and  ninety-one,  and  for  other  purposes. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representa- 
tives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress  as- 
sembled^        "^^'^'^'^'^'^^ 

No  person  who  shall,  after  the  passage  of  this  act, 
enter  upon  any  of  the  public  lands  with  a  view  to  occu- 
pation, entry,  or  settlement  under  any  of  the  land  laws 
shall  be  permitted  to  acquire  title  to  more  than  three 
hundred  and  twenty  acres  in  the  aggregate,  under  all  of 
said  laws,  but  this  limitation  shall  not  operate  to  curtail 
the  right  of  anj'  person  who  has  heretofore  made  entry 
or  settlement  on  the  public  lands,  or  whose  occupation, 
entry,  or  settlement  is  validated  by  this  act :  Provided ^ 
That  in  all  patents  for  lands  hereafter  taken  up  under 
any  of  the  land  laws  of  the  United  States  or  on  entries 
or  claims  validated  by  this  act,  west  of  the  one  hundredth 
meridian  it  shall  be  expressed  that  there  is  reserved 
from  the  lands  in  said  patent  described  a  right  of  way 
thereon  for  ditches  or  canals  constructed  by  the  author- 
ity of  the  United  States.  ***** 

Approved  August  30,  1890  (26  Stat.,  371). 


AN  ACT  to  repeal  timber-culture  laws,  and  for  other  purposes- 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representa- 
tives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress  as- 
sembled,        ******** 

Sec.  16.  That  townsite  entries  may  be  made  by  in- 
corporated towns  and  cities  on  the  mineral  lands  of  the 
United  States,  but  no  title  shall  be  acquired  by  such 
towns  or  cities  to  any  vein  of  gold,  silver,  cinnabar,  cop- 
per or  lead,  or  to  any  valid  mining  claim  or  possession 


'  ? 


I 


p 

'.ill 

ii'- 


V:h 


136 


ALASKA. 


held  under  existing  law.  When  mineral  veins  are  pos- 
sessed within  the  limits  of  an  incorporated  town  or  city, 
and  such  possession  is  recognized  by  local  authority  or 
by  the  laws  of  the  United  States,  the  title  to  town  lots 
shall  be  subject  to  such  recognized  possession  and  the 
necessary  use  thereof  and  when  entry  has  been  made  or 
patent  issued  for  such  townsites  to  such  incorporated 
town  or  city,  the  possessor  of  such  mineral  vein  may  enter 
and  receive  patent  for  such  mineral  vein  locations,  and  of 
all  surface  ground  appertaining  thereto  :  Provided,  That 
no  entry  shall  be  made  by  such  mineral-vein  claimant  for 
surface  ground  where  the  owner  or  occupier  of  the  sur- 
face ground  shall  have  had  possession  of  the  same 
before  the  inception  of  the  title  of  the  mineral-vein 
applicant. 

Sec.  17.  That  reservoir  sites  located  or  selected  and 
to  be  located  and  selected  under  the  provisions  of  "An 
act  making  appropriations  for  sundry  civil  expenses  of 
the  Government  for  the  fiscal  year  ending  June  thirtieth, 
eighteen  hundred  and  eighty-nine,  and  for  other  pur- 
poses," and  amendments  thereto,  shall  be  restricted  to 
and  shall  contain  only  so  much  land  as  is  actually  neces- 
sary for  the  construction  and  maintenance  of  reservoirs, 
excluding  so  far  as  practicable  lands  occupied  by  actual 
settlers  at  the  date  of  the  location  of  said  reservoirs,  and 
that  the  provisions  of  "An  act  making  appropriations 
for  sundry  civil  expenses  of  the  Government  for  the 
fiscal  year  ending  June  thirtieth,  eighteen  hundred  and 
ninety-one,  and  for  other  purposes,"  which  reads  as  fol- 
lows, viz :  "  No  person  who  shall  after  the  passage  of 
this  act  enter  upon  any  of  the  public  lands  with  a  view 
to  occupation,  entry  or  settlement  under  any  of  the  land 
laws  shall  be  permitted  to  acquire  title  to  more  than 
three  hundred  and  twenty  acres  in  the  aggregate  under 
all  said  laws,"  shall  be  construed  to  include  in  the  maxi- 
mum amount  of  lands  the  title  to  which  is  permitted  to 
be  acquired  by  one  person  only  agricultural  lands  and 
not  include  lands  entered  or  sought  to  be  entered  under 
mineral  land  laws. 

JfS  5fi  ^{C  ^f^  >)<  ^ 

Approved  March  3,  1891  (26  Stat.,  1095). 


o 


w 

7i 


so 


11 

1 

"-*  . 

r  ■    * «    '  - 

\ 

.  K 

■..,',-. "ie., ..- 

1 

m 

'  ■■^" ■'*':1^ 

HI 

■Bl' ' '^ ' tlum^^r 

. 

'i-Sim 

■I 

1 

. : 1 .: _ii 

1  I  *'■ 
1 1 «!: 


f 


II 


f 


■Ji 


ALAf^KA. 


137 


MINERAL   LANDS  OPEN   TO   EXPLORATION,    OCCUPATION, 

AND   PURCHASE. 

I.  It  will  be  perceived  that  by  the  foregoing  provisions 
of  law  the  mineral  lands  in  the  public  domain,  surveyed 
or  unsurveyed,  are  open  to  exploration,  occupation  and 
purchase  by  all  citizens  of  the  United  States  and  all 
those  who  have  declared  their  intentions  to  become 
such. 


■II 


■n 


7. 


STATUS  OF   LODE-CLAIMS   LOCATED   PRIOR    TO    MAY     ID, 

1872. 

2.  By  an  examination  of  the  several  sections  of  the 
Revised  Statutes  it  will  be  seen  that  the  status  of  lode- 
claims  located  previous  to  the  loth  of  May,  1872,  is  not 
changed  with  regard  to  their  extent  along  the  lode  or 
width  of  szir/ace. 

3.  Mining  rights  acquired  under  such  previous  loca- 
tions are,  however,  enlarged  by  such  Revised  Statutes  in 
the  following  respect,  viz  :  The  locators  of  all  such  pre- 
viously taken  veins  or  lodes,  their  heirs  an<I  assigns,  so 
long  as  the)'  comply  with  the  laws  of  Congress  and  with 
State,  Territorial  or  local  regulations  not  in  conflict 
therewith,  governing  mining  claims,  are  invested  with 
the  exclusive  possessory  right  of  all  the  surface  in- 
cludt-l  within  the  lines  of  their  veins,  lodes  or  ledges 
throughout  their  entire  depth>  the  top  or  apex  of 
which  lies  inside  of  such  surface  lines  extended  down- 
ward vertically,  although  such  veins,  lodes  or  ledges  may 
so  far  depart  from  a  perpendicular  in  their  course  down- 
ward as  to  extend  outside  the  verticle  side-lines  of  such 
locations  at  the  surface,  it  being  expressly  provided, 
however,  that  the  right  of  possession  to  such  outside 
parts  of  said  veins  or  ledges  shall  be  confined  to  such 
portions  thereof  as  lie  between  vertical  planes  drawn 
downward,  as  aforesaid,  through  the  end  lines  of  their 
locations  so  continued  in  their  own  direction  that  such 
planes  will  intersect  such  exterior  parts  of  such  veins, 
lodes  or  ledges  ;  no  right  being  granted,  however,  to  the 
10 — 


'1 


I  "^\3 


^?4l 


hi 


m 


138 


ALASKA. 


1 1 


I 


Ih 


claimant  of  such  outside  portion  of  a  vein  or  ledge  to 
enter  upon  the  surface  location  of  another  claimant. 

4.  It  is  to  be  distinctly  understood,  however,  that  the 
law  limits  the  possessory  right  to  veins,  lodes  or  ledges, 
oiA^r  than  the  one  named  in  the  original  location,  to 
such  as  were  not  adversely  claimed  on  May  10,  1872,  and 
that  where  such  other  vein  or  ledge  was  so  adversely 
claimed  at  that  date,  the  right  of  the  party  so  adverselj' 
claiming  is  in  no  way  impaired  by  the  provisions  of  the 
Revised  Statutes. 

5.  In  order  to  hold  the  possessory  title  to  a  mining 
claim  located  prior  to  May  10,  1872,  and  for  which  a 
patent  has  not  been  issued,  the  law  requires  that  ten 
dollars  shall  be  expended  annually  in  labor  or  improve- 
ments on  each  claim  of  one  hundred  feet  on  the  course 
of  the  vein  or  lode  until  a  patent  shall  have  been  issued 
therefor ;  but  where  a  number  of  such  claims  are  held 
in  common  upon  the  same  vein  or  lode,  the  aggregate 
expenditure  thit  would  be  neces.sary  to  hold  all  the 
claims,  at  the  rate  of  ten  dollars  per  hundred  feet,  may 
be  made  upon  any  one  claim;  a  failure  to  comply  with  this 
requirement  in  any  one  year  subjecting  the  claim  upon 
which  such  failure  occurred  to  relocation  by  other  par- 
ties, the  same  as  if  no  previous  location  thereof  had  ever 
been  made,  unless  the  claimants  under  the  original  loca- 
tion shall  have  resumed  work  thereon  after  such  failure 
and  before  such  re-location.  The  first  annual  expendi- 
ture upon  claims  of  this  class  should  have  been  per- 
formed subsequent  to  May  10,  1872,  and  prior  to  January 
1,  1875.  From  and  after  January  i,  1875,  the  required 
amount  must  be  expended  annually  until  patent  issues. 
By  decision  of  the  honorable  Secretary  of  the  Interior, 
dated  March  4,  1879,  such  annual  expenditures  are  not 
required  subsequent  to  entry,  the  date  of  issuing  the 
patent  certificate  being  the  d  ite  contemplated  by  statute. 

6.  Upon  the  failure  of  any  one  of  several  co  owners 
of  a  vein,  lode  or  ledge,  which  has  not  been  entered,  to 
contribute  his  proportion  of  the  expenditures  necessary 
to  hold  the  claim  or  claims  so  held  in  ownership  in  com- 
mon, the  co-owners,  who  have  performed  the  labor  or 


B     5 


ALASKA. 


139 


made  the  improvements  as  required  by  said  Revised 
Statutes,  may,  at  the  expiration  of  the  year,  give  such 
delinquent  co-owner  personal  notice  in  writing,  or  notice 
by  publication  in  the  newspaper  published  nearest  the 
claim  for  at  least  once  a  week  for  ninety  days ,  and  if 
upon  the  expiration  of  ninety  days  after  such  notice  in 
writing,  or  upon  the  expiration  of  one  hundred  and 
eighty  days  after  the  first  newspaper  publication  of  no- 
tice, the  delinquent  co-owner  sh?li  have  failed  to  con- 
tribute his  proportion  to  meet  such  expenditures  or  im- 
provements, his  interest  in  the  claim  by  law  passes  to 
his  co-owners  who  have  made  the  expenditures  or  im- 
provements as  aforesaid.  Where  a  claimant  alleges 
ownership  of  a  forfeited  interest  under  the  foregoing 
provision,  the  sworn  statement  of  the  publisher  as  to  the 
facts  of  publication,  fjiving  dates  and  a  printed  copy  of 
the  notice  published,  should  be  furnished,  and  the  claim- 
ant must  swear  that  the  delinquent  co  owner  failed  to 
contribute  his  proper  proportion  within  the  period  fixed 
by  the  statute. 

PATENTS   FOR   VEINS    OR    LODES    HERETOFORE    ISSUED. 

7.  Rights  under  patents  for  veins  or  lodes  heretofore 
granted  under  previous  legislation  of  Congress  are  en- 
larged by  the  Revised  Statutes  so  as  to  invest  the  pat- 
entee, his  heirs  or  assigns,  with  title  to  all  veins,  lodes 
or  ledges  throughout  their  entire  depth  the  top  or 
apex  of  which  lies  within  the  end  and  side  boundary 
lines  of  his  claim  on  lies  the  surface,  as  patented, 
extended  downward  vertically,  although  such  veins, 
lodes  or  ledges  may  so  far  depart  from  a  perpen- 
dicular in  their  course  downward  as  to  extend  out- 
side the  verticle  side-lines  of  the  claim  at  the  sur- 
face. The  right  of  possession  to  such  outside  parts 
of  such  veins  or  ledges  to  be  confined  to  such  portions 
thereof  as  lie  between  verticle  planes  drawn  downward 
through  the  end  lines  of  the  claims  at  the  surface,  so 
continued  in  their  own  direction  that  .such  planes  will 
intersect  such  exterior  parts  of  such  veins  or  ledges  ;  it 
being  expressly  provided,  however,  that  all  veins,  lodes 


I 


I  f: 


\    \    r-X-v^ 

1     .M': 

'       % 

ii 

^ 

E^i\ 

1! 

'.■,.».Ji.  ^.;       , 


i  m 


'P^ 


140 


ALASKA. 


or  ledges,  the  top  or  apex  of  which  lies  inside  such  sur- 
face locations,  o/Acr  than  the  one  named  in  the  patent, 
which  were  adversely  claimed  on  the  \oth  of  May,  1872, 
are  excluded  from  such  conveyance  by  patent. 

8.  Applications  for  patents  for  mining-claims  pend- 
ing at  the  date  of  the  act  of  May  10,  1872,  may  be  prose- 
cuted to  final  decision  in  the  general  Land  Office,  and 
where  no  adverse  rights  are  affected  thereby  patents  will 
be  issued  in  pursuance  of  the  provisions  of  the  Revised 
Statutes. 

MANNKR  OF  LOCATING  CLAIMS  ON  VEINS  OR  LODES 
AFTER  MAY  ID,  1 872. 

9.  From  and  after  the  loth  May,  1872,  any  person 
who  is  a  citizen  of  the  United  States,  or  who  has 
declared  his  intention  to  become  a  citizen,  may  lo- 
cote,  record  and  hold  a  mining  claim  of  fifteen  Imn- 
dred  linear  ject  along  the  course  of  any  mineral  vein 
or  lode  subject  to  location ;  or  an  association  of  per- 
sons, severally  qualified  as  above,  may  make  joint  lo- 
cation of  such  claim  of  fifteen  hundred  feett  but  in 
no  event  can  a  location  of  a  vein  or  lode  made  subse- 
quent to  May  10,  1872,  exceed  fifteen  hundred  feet  along 
the  course  thereof,  whatever  may  be  the  number  of  per- 
sons composing  the  association. 

10.     With  regard  to  the  extent  of  surface-ground  ad- 
joining a  vein  or  lode  and  claimed  for  the  convenient 
working    thereof,    the   Revised   Statutes   provide   that 
the  lateral  extent  of  locations  of  veins  or  lodes  made 
after  May  10,  1872,  shall  in  no  case  exceed  three  hundred 
Jeet  on   each   side  of   the  middle  of  the  vein  at  the  sur- 
face,  and   that   no   such   surface   rights   shall   be   limi- 
ted  by   any   mining   regulations   to   less   than   twenty- 
five   feet   on   each  side   of  the   middle   of  the  vein  at 
the  surface,  except  where  adverse  rights  existing  on  the 
loth    May,    1S72,    may   render   such    limitation    neces- 
sary ;   the   end  lines   of  such   claims  to  be  in  all  cases 
parallel  to  each  other.     Said  lateral  measurements  can- 
not  extend   beyond   three   hundred   feet  on  either  side 
of  the  middle  of  the  vein  at  the  surface,  or  such  distance 


ALASKA. 


141 


Jk 


as  is  allowed  by  local  laws.  For  example :  400  feet  can- 
not be  taken  on  one  side  and  200  feet  on  the  other.  If, 
however,  300  feet  on  each  side  are  allowed,  and  by 
reason  of  prior  claims  but  100  feet  can  be  taken  on  one 
side,  the  locator  will  not  be  restricted  to  less  than 
300  feet  on  the  other  side;  and  when  the  locator 
does  not  determine  by  exploration  where  the  middle 
of  the  vein  at  the  surface  is  his  discovery  shaft  must  be 
assumed  to  mark  such  point. 

11.  By  the  foregoing  it  will  be  perceived  that  no 
lode-claim  located  after  the  loth  May,  1872,  can  exceed 
a  parallelogram  fifteen  hundred  feet  in  length  by  six 
hundred  feet  in  width,  but  whether  surface-ground  of 
that  width  can  be  taken  depends  upon  the  local  regula- 
tions or  State  or  Territorial  laws  in  force  in  the  several 
mining  districts;  and  that  no  such  local  regulations 
or  State  or  Territorial  laws  shall  limit  a  vein  or  lode 
claim  to  less  than  fifteen  hundred  feet  along  the  course 
thereof,  whether  the  location  is  made  by  one  or  more  per- 
sons, nor  can  surface  rights  be  limited  to  less  than  fifty 
feet  in  width,  unless  adverse  claims  existing  on  the  loth 
day  of  May,  1872,  render  such  lateral  limitation  neces- 
sary. 

12.  It  is  provided  by  the  Revised  Statutes  that 
the  miners  of  each  district  may  make  rules  and  regula- 
tions not  in  conflict  with  the  laws  of  the  United  States, 
or  of  the  .state  or  territory  in  which  such  di.stricts 
are  respectively  situated,  governing  the  location,  man- 
ner of  recording  and  amount  of  work  nece.ssary  to 
hold  possession  of  a  cluim.  They  likewise  require  that 
the  location  shall  be  so  distinctly  marked  on  the  ground 
that  its  boundaries  may  be  readily  traced.  This  is  a  very 
important  matter  and  locators  cannot  e.xercise  too  much 
care  in  defining  their  locations  at  the  outset,  inasmuch  as 
the  i.iw  requires  that  all  records  of  mining  locations 
made  subsequent  to  May  10,  1872.  shall  contain  the 
name  or  names  of  the  locators,  the  date  of  the  lo- 
cation ar.d  such  a  description  of  the  claim  or  claims 
located  by  reference  to  some  natural  object  or  permanent 
monument,  as  will  identify  the  claim. 


hi    'm. 


if 


142 


ALASKA. 


13.  The  statutes  provide  that  no  lode-claim  shall 
be  recorded  until  after  the  discovery  of  a  vein  or 
lode  within  the  limits  of  the  claim  located,  the  ob- 
ject of  which  provision  is  evidently  to  prevent  the 
appropriation  of  presumed  mineral  ground  for  specula- 
tive purposes  to  the  exclusion  of  dona  fide  prospectors, 
before  sufficient  work  has  been  done  to  determine 
whether  a  vein  or  lode  really  exists. 

14.  The  claimant  should,  therefore,  prior  to  locating 
his  claim,  unless  the  vein  can  be  traced  upon  the 
surface,  sink  a  shaft  or  run  a  tunnel  or  drift  to  a 
sufficient  depth  therein  to  discover  and  develop  a 
mineral-bearing  vein,  lode  or  crevice ;  should  determine, 
if  posssble,  the  general  course  of  such  vein  in  either  di- 
rection from  the  point  of  discovery,  by  which  direction 
he  will  be  governed  in  marking  the  boundaries  of  his 
claim  on  the  surface.  His  locati'^n  notice  should  give 
the  course  and  distance  as  nearly  as  practicable  from 
the  discovery-shaft  on  the  claim  to  .some  permanent, 
well-known  points  or  objects,  such,  for  instance,  as  stone 
monuments,  blazed  trees,  the  confluence  of  streams, 
point  of  intersection  of  well-known  gulches,  ravines 
or  roads,  prominent  buttes,  hills,  etc.,  which  may  be 
in  the  immediate  vicinity  and  which  will  serve  to 
perpetuate  and  fix  the  locus  of  the  claim  and  render 
it  susceptible  of  identification  from  the  description 
thereof  given  in  the  record  of  locations  in  the  dis- 
trict and  should  be  duly  recorded. 

15.  In  addition  to  the  foregoing  data  the  claimant 
should  state  the  names  of  adjoining  claims,  or,  if  none 
adjoin,  the  relative  positions  of  the  nearest  claims; 
should  drive  a  post  or  erect  a  monument  of  stones 
at  each  corner  of  his  surface-ground,  and  at  the  point  of 
discovery  or  discovery  shaft  should  fix  a  post,  stake  or 
board,  upon  which  should  be  designated  the  name 
of  the  lode,  the  name  or  names  of  the  locators,  the  num- 
ber of  feet  claimed  and  in  which  direction  from  the 
point  of  discovery;  it  being  essential  that  the  loca- 
tion notice  filed  for  record,  in  addition  to  the  fore- 
going description  should  state  whether  the  entire  claim 


\ 


ALASKA. 


143 


of  fifteen  hundred  feet  is  taken  on  one  side  of  the  point 
of  discovery  or  whether  it  is  partly  upon  one  and  partly 
upon  the  other  side  thereof,  and  in  the  latter  case,  how 
many  feet  are  claimed  upon  each  side  of  such  discovery- 
point. 

1 6.  Within  a  reasonable  time,  say  twenty  days,  after 
the  location  shall  have  been  marked  on  the  ground, 
or  such  time  as  is  allowed  by  the  local  laws,  notice 
thereof,  accurately  describing  the  claim  in  manner  afore- 
said, should  be  filed  for  record  with  the  proper  recorder 
of  the  district,  who  will  thereupon  issue  the  usual  certifi- 
cate of  location. 

17.  In  order  to  hold  the  possessory  right  to  a  loca- 
tion made  since  May  10,  1872,  not  less  than  one  hundred 
dollars'  worth  of  labor  must  be  performed,  or  improve- 
ments made  thereon  annually  until  entry  shall  have  been 
made.  Under  the  provisions  of  the  act  of  Congress  ap- 
proved January  22,  1880,  the  first  annual  expenditure 
becomes  due  and  must  be  performed  during  the  calendar 
year  succeeding  that  in  which  the  location  was  made. 
Expenditure  made  or  labor  performed  prior  to  the 
first  day  of  January  succeeding  the  date  of  location 
will  not  be  considered  as  a  part  of  or  applied  upon 
the  first  annual  expenditure  required  by  law.  Failure  to 
make  the  expenditure  or  perform  the  labor  required  will 
subject  the  claim  to  relocation  by  any  other  party  having 
the  necessary  qualifications,  unless  the  original  locator, 
his  heirs,  assigns  or  legal  representatives  have  resumed 
work  thereon  after  such  failure  and  before  such  reloca- 
tion. 

18.  The  expenditures  recjuired  upon  mining  claims 
may  be  made  from  the  surface  or  in  running  a  tunnel  for 
the  development  of  such  claims,  the  act  of  February  11, 
1875,  providing  that  where  a  person  or  company  has,  or 
may  run  a  tunnel  for  the  purpose  of  developing  a  lode 
or  lodes  owned  by  said  person  or  company,  the  money  so 
expended  in  said  tunnel  shall  be  taken  and  considered 
as  expended  on  said  lode  or  lodes,  and  such  person  or 
company  shall  not  be  required  to  perform  work  on  the 
surface  of  said  lode  or  lodes  in  order  to  hole  the  same. 


t:      I 


i  ■:  la 


1   ■">: . 


m 


].■ 


■^111' 


144 


ALASKA. 


Kii   ,    r 


il^J 


19.  The  importance  of  attending  to  these  details  in 
the  matter  of  location,  labor  and  expenditure  will  be  the 
more  readily  perceived  when  it  is  understood  that  a 
failure  to  give  the  subject  proper  attention  may  invali- 
date the  claim. 

TUNNEI,  RIGHTS. 

20.  Section  2323  provides  that  where  a  tunnel  is 
run  for  the  development  of  a  vein  or  lode,  or  for  the  dis- 
covery of  mines  the  owners  of  such  tunnels  shall 
have  the  right  of  possession  of  all  veins  or  lodes  within 
three  thousand  feet  from  the  face  of  such  tunnel  on  the 
line  thereof,  not  previously  known  to  exist,  discovered 
in  such  tunnel,  to  the  same  extent  as  if  discovered  from 
the  surface;  and  locations  on  the  line  of  such  tunnel  or 
veins  or  lodes  not  appearing  on  the  surface,  made  by 
other  parties  after  the  commencement  of  the  tunnel,  and 
while  the  same  is  being  prosecuted  with  reasonable  dili- 
gence, shall  be  invalid ;  but  failure  to  prosecute  the  work 
on  the  tunnel  for  six  months  shall  be  considered  as  an 
abandonment  of  the  right  to  all  undiscovered  veins  or 
lodes  on  the  line  of  said  tunnel. 

The  eflfect  of  this  is  simply  to  give  the  proprietors  of 
a  mining  tunnel  run  in  good  faith  the  possessory  right  to 
fifteen  hundred  feet  of  any  blind  lodes  cut,  discovered  or 
intersected  by  .such  tunnel,  which  were  not  previously 
known  to  exist,  within  three  thousand  feet  from  the  face 
or  point  of  commencement  of  such  tunnel,  and  to  pro- 
hibit other  parties,  after  the  commencement  of  the  tun- 
nel, from  prospecting  for  and  making  locations  of  lodes 
on  the  /Ine  thereof  and  within  said  distance  of  three 
thousand  feet,  unless  such  lodes  appear  upon  the  surface 
or  were  previously  known  to  exist. 

22.  The  term  "  face,"  as  used  in  .said  section,  is  con- 
strued and  held  to  mean  the  first  working-face  formed  in 
the  tunnel,  and  to  signify  the  point  at  which  the  tunnel 
actually  enters  cover ;  it  being  from  this  point  that  the 
three  thousand  feet  are  to  be  counted,  upon  which  pros- 
pecting is  prohibited  as  aforesaid. 

23.    To  avail  themselves  of  the  benefits  of  this  pro- 


i   'iii 


ALASKA. 


145 


vision  of  law  the  proprietors  of  a  mining  tunnel  will  be 
required  at  the  time  they  enter  cover,  as  aforesaid,  to 
give  proper  notice  of  their  tunnel  location  by  erecting  a 
substantial  post,  board  or  monument  at  the  face  or  point 
of  commencement  thereof,  upon  which  should  be  posted 
a  good  and  sufficient  notice,  giving  the  names  of  the  par- 
ties or  company  claiming  the  tunnel-right ;  the  actual  or 
proposed  course  or  direction  of  the  tunnel;  the  height 
and  width  thereof  and  the  course  and  distance  from  such 
face  or  point  of  commencement  to  some  permanent  well- 
known  objects  in  the  vicinity  by  which  to  fix  and  deter- 
mine the  locus  in  manner  heretofore  set  forth  applicable 
to  locations  of  veins  or  lodes,  and  at  the  time  of  posting 
such  notice  they  shall,  in  order  that  miners  or  prospec- 
tors may  be  enabled  to  determine  whether  or  not  they 
are  within  the  lines  of  the  tunnel,  establish  the 
boundary  lines  thereof,  by  stakes  or  monuments  placed 
along  such  lines  at  proper  intervals,  to  the  terminus 
of  the  three  thousand  feet  from  the  face  or  point  of  com- 
mencement of  the  tunnel,  and  the  lines  so  marked  will 
define  and  govern  as  to  the  specific  boundaries  within 
which  prospecting  for  lodes  not  previously  known  to 
exist  is  prohibited  while  work  on  the  tunnel  is  being 
prosecuted  with  reasonable  diligence. 

24.  At  the  time  of  posting  notice  and  marking  out 
the  lines  of  the  tunnel,  as  aforesaid,  a  full  and  correct 
copy  of  such  notice  of  location  defining  the  tunnel  claim 
must  be  filed  for  record  with  the  mining  recorder  of  the 
district,  to  which  notice  must  be  attached  the  sworn 
statement  or  declaration  of  the  owners,  claimants  or  pro- 
jectors of  such  tunnel,  setting  forth  the  facts  in  the  case  ; 
stating  the  amount  expended  by  themselves  and  their 
predecessors  in  interest  in  prosecuting  work  thereon; 
the  extent  of  the  work  performed,  and  that  it  is  dofia  fide 
their  intention  to  prosecute  work  on  the  tunnel  so  loca- 
ted and  described  with  reasonable  diligence  for  the  de- 
velopment of  a  vein  or  lode,  or  for  the  discovery  of  mines, 
or  both,  as  the  case  may  be.  This  notice  of  location 
must  be  duly  recorded,  and,  with  the  said  sworn  state- 


I-     .T     \ 


Ill  :• 


146 


ALASKA. 


!l! 


ment  attached,  kept  on  the  recorder's  files  for  future 
reference. 

25.  By  a  compliance  with  the  foregoing  much  need- 
less diflBculty  wiil  be  avoided,  and  the  way  for  the  adjust- 
ment of  legal  rights  acquired  in  virtue  of  said  section 
2323  will  be  made  much  more  easy  and  certain. 

26.  This  ofl5ce  will  take  particular  care  that  no  im- 
proper advantage  is  taken  of  this  provision  of  law  by 
parties  making  or  professing  to  make  tunnel  locations, 
ostensibly  for  the  purpose  named  in  the  statute,  but 
really  for  the  purpose  of  monopolizing  the  lands  lying 
in  front  of  their  tunnels  to  the  detriment  of  the  mining 
interests  and  to  the  exclusion  of  dona  fide  prospectors 
or  miners,  but  will  hold  such  tunnel  claimants  to  a  .strict 
compliance  with  the  terms  of  the  statutes;  and  a  reasonable 
diligence  on  their  part  in  prosecuting  the  work  is  one  of 
their  essential  conditions  of  their  implied  contract.  Neg- 
ligence or  want  of  due  diligence  will  be  construed  as 
working  a  forfeiture  of  their  right  to  all  undiscovered 
veins  on  the  line  of  such  tunnel. 

MANNER   OF   PROCEEDING   TO  OBTAIN   GOVERNMENT  TI- 
TLE TO  VEIN   OR  LODE   CLAIMS. 

27.  By  section  2325  authority  is  given  for  granting 
titles  for  mines  by  patent  from  the  Government  to  any 
person,  association,  or  corporation  having  the  necessary 
quahfications  as  to  citizenship  and  holding  the  right  of 
possession  to  a  claim  in  compliance  with  law. 

28.  The  claimant  is  required  in  the  first  place  to  have 
a  correct  survey  of  his  claim  made  under  authority  of  the 
surveyor-general  of  the  State  or  Territory  in  which  the 
claim  lies ;  .such  survey  to  show  with  accuracy  the  ex- 
terior surface  boundaries  of  the  claim,  which  boundaries 
are  required  to  be  distinctly  marked  by  monuments  on 
the  ground.  Four  plats  and  one  copy  of  the  original 
field  notes,  in  each  case,  will  be  prepared  by  the  sur- 
veyor-general ;  one  plat  and  the  original  field  notes  to  be 
retained  in  the  oflfice  of  the  surveyor-general,  one  copy 
of  the  plat  to  be  given  the  claimant  for  posting  upon  the 


f 


ALASKA. 


14:7 


claim,  one  plat  and  a  copy  of  the  field  notes  ■  o  be  given 
the  claimant  for  filing  with  the  proper  register,  to  be 
finally  transmitted  by  that  officer,  with  other  papers  in 
the  case,  to  this  office,  and  one  plat  t  j  be  sent  by  the  sur- 
veyor-general to  the  register  of  the  proper  land  district  to 
be  retained  on  his  files  for  future  reference.  As  there  is 
no  resident  surveyor-general  for  the  State  of  Arkansas, 
applications  for  the  survey  of  mineral  claims  in  said 
State  should  be  made  to  the  Commissioner  of  this 
office,  who,  und  r  the  law,  is  ex  oJ)icio  the  U.  S.  surveyor- 
general. 

29.  The  claimant  is  then  required  to  post  a  copy  of 
the  plat  of  such  survey  in  a  conspicuous  place  upon  the 
claim,  together  with  notice  of  his  intention  t  apply  for 
a  patent  therefor,  which  notice  will  give  the  date  of  post- 
ing, the  name  of  the  claimant,  the  name  of  the  claim, 
mine,  or  lode ;  the  mining  district  and  county ;  whether 
the  location  is  of  record,  and,  if  so,  where  the  record 
may  be  found;  the  number  of  feet  claimed  along  the 
vein  and  the  presumed  direction  thereof;  the  number  of 
feet  claimed  on  the  lode  in  each  direction  from  the  point 
of  discovery,  or  other  well-defined  place  on  the  claim  ; 
the  name  or  names  of  adjoining  claimants  on  the  same 
or  other  lodes;  or,  if  none  adjoin,  the  names  of  the 
nearest  claims,  etc. 

30.  After  posting  the  said  plat  and  notice  upon  the 
premises,  the  claimant  will  file  with  the  proper  register 
and  receiver  a  copy  of  such  plat  and  the  field  notes  of 
survey  of  the  claim,  accompanied  by  the  affidavit  of  at 
least  two  credible  witnesses,  that  such  plat  and  notice 
are  posted  conspicuously  upon  the  claim,  giving  the  date 
and  place  of  such  posting;  a  copy  of  the  notice  so 
posted  to  be  attached  to,  and  form  a  part  of  said  affidavit. 

31.  Accompanying  the  field  notes  so  filed  must  be  the 
sworn  statement  of  the  claimant  that  he  has  the  possess- 
ory right  to  the  premises  therein  described,  in  virtue  of 
a  compliance  by  himself  (and  by  his  grantors,  if  he  claims 
by  purchase)  with  the  mining  rules,  regulations  and  cus- 
toms of  the  mining  district.  State  or  Territory  in  which 
the  claim  lies,  and  with  the  mining  laws  of  Congress;  such 


m 


'     '"Si 


1'^ 


148 


ALASKA. 


n 


11  li 


II: 


'  m 


I 


sworn  statement  to  narrate  briefly,  but  as  clearly  as  pos- 
sible, the  facts  constituting  such  compliance,  the  origin 
of  his  possession  and  the  basis  of  his  claim  to  a  patent. 

32.  This  affidavit  should  be  supported  by  appropriate 
evidence  from  the  mining  recorder's  office  as  to  his  pos- 
sessory right,  as  follows,  viz  :  Where  he  claims  to  be  the 
locator,  or  a  locator  in  company  with  others  who  have 
since  conveyed  their  interest  in  the  location  to  him,  a 
full,  true  and  correct  copy  of  such  location  should  be 
furnished,  as  the  same  appears  upon  the  mining  records; 
such  copy  to  be  attested  by  the  seal  of  the  recorder,  or 
if  he  has  no  seal,  then  he  should  make  oath  to  the  same 
being  correct,  as  shown  by  his  records.  Where  the  ap- 
plicant claims  only  as  a  purchaser  for  valuable  con.sidera- 
tion,  a  copy  of  the  location  record  must  be  filed  under 
seal  or  upon  oath  as  aforesaid,  with  an  abstract  of  title 
from  the  proper  recorder,  under  seal  or  oath  as  afore- 
said, brought  down  as  near  as  practicable  to  date  of  filing 
the  application,  tracing  the  right  of  possession  by  a  con- 
tinuous chain  of  conve)'^ances  from  the  original  locators 
to  the  applicant,  also  certifying  that  no  conveyances  af- 
fecting the  title  to  the  claim  in  question  appear  of  record 
in  his  office  other  than  those  set  forth  in  the  accompany- 
ing abstract. 

33.  In  the  event  of  the  mining  records  in  any  case 
having  been  destroyed  by  fire  or  otherwise  lo.st,  affidavit 
of  the  fact  should  be  made,  and  secondary  evidence  of 
possessory  title  will  be  received,  which  may  consist  of 
the  affidavit  of  the  claimant,  supported  by  those  of  any 
other  parties  cognizant  of  tiie  facts  relative  to  his  loca- 
tion, occupancy,  possession,  improvements,  etc.;  and  in 
such  case  of  lost  records,  any  deeds,  certificates  of  loca- 
tion or  purchase,  or  other  evidence  which  may  be  in  the 
claimant's  possession  and  tend  to  establish  his  claim, 
should  be  filed. 

34.  Upon  the  receipt  of  these  papers  the  register  will, 
at  the  expense  of  the  claimant(who  must  furnish  the 
agreement  of  the  publisher  to  hold  applicant  for  patent 
alone  responsible  for  charges  of  publication),  publish  a 
notice  of  such  application  for  the  period  of  sixty  days  in 


ir 


ALASKA. 


149 


a  newspaper  published  nearest  to  the  claim,  and  will  post 
a  copy  of  such  notice  in  his  office  for  the  same  period. 
When  the  notice  is  published  in  a  weekly  newspaper  ten 
consecutive  insertions  are  necessary ;  when  in  a  daily 
newspaper  the  notice  must  appear  in  each  issue  for  sixty- 
one  consecutive  issues,  the  first  day  of  issue  being  ex- 
cluded in  estimating  the  period  of  sixty  days. 

35.  The  notices  so  published  and  posted  must  be  as 
full  and  complete  as  possible,  and  embrace  all  the  data 
given  in  the  notice  posted  upon  the  claim. 

36.  Too  much  care  can  not  be  exercised  in  the  prep- 
aration of  these  notices,  inasmuch  as  upon  their  accuracy 
and  completeness  will  depend,  in  a  great  measure,  the 
regularity  and  validity  of  the  whole  proceeding. 

37.  In  the  publication  of  final-proof  notices  the  reg- 
ister has  no  discretion  under  the  law  to  designate  any 
other  than  the  newspaper  "  nearest  the  land  "  for  such 
purpose  when  such  paper  is  a  newspaper  of  general 
circulation.  But  he  will  in  all  case?  designate  the  news- 
paper of  general  circulation  that  is  published  nearest 
the  land,  geographically  measured.  When  two  or  more 
papers  are  published  in  the  same  town,  nearest  the  land, 
he  may  select  the  one  which,  in  his  honest  and  impar- 
tial judgment  as  a  public  officer,  will  be.st  subserve  the 
purpose  of  the  law  and  the  general  interests  of  the 
public. 

38.  Newspaper  charges  must  not  exceed  the  rates 
established  by  this  office  for  the  publication  of  legal 
notices. 

39.  The  claimant,  either  at  the  time  of  filing  these 
papers  with  the  register  or  at  any  time  during  the  sixty 
days'  publication,  is  required  to  file  a  certificate  of  the 
surveyor-general  that  not  less  than  five  hundred  dollars' 
worth  of  labor  has  been  expended  or  improvements 
made  upon  the  claim  by  the  applicant  or  his  grantors ; 
that  the  plat  filed  by  the  claimant  is  correct ;  that  the 
field  notes  of  the  survey,  as  filed,  furnish  such  an  accu- 
rate description  of  the  claim  as  will,  if  incorporated  into 
a  patent,  serve  to  fully  identify  the  premises,  and  that 
such  reference  is  made   therein   to  natural  objects  or 


% 


«;■ 


' 


150 


ALAfiKA. 


permanent  monuments  as  will  perpetuate  and  fix  the 
locus  thereof. 

40.  It  will  be  the  more  convenient  way  to  have  this 
certificate  indorsed  by  the  surveyor-general,  both  upon 
the  plat  and  field  notes  of  survey  filed  by  the  claimant 
as  aforesaid. 

41.  After  the  sixty  days'  period  of  newspaper  publica- 
tion has  expired  the  claimant  will  furnish  from  the  office 
of  publication  a  sworn  statement  that  the  notice  was 
published  for  the  statutory  period,  giving  the  first  and 
last  day  of  such  publication,  and  his  own  affidavit  s,how- 
ing  that  the  plat  and  notice  aforesaid  remained  conspicu- 
ously posted  upon  the  claim  sought  to  be  patented  dur- 
ing said  sixty  days'  publication,  giving  the  dates. 

42.  Upon  the  filing  of  this  affidavit  the  register  will, 
if  no  adverse  claim  was  filed  in  his  office  during  the 
period  of  publication,  permit  the  claimant  to  pay  for  the 
land  according  to  the  area  given  in  the  plat  and  field 
notes  of  survey  aforesaid,  at  the  rate  of  five  dollars  for 
each  acre  and  five  dollars  for  each  fractional  part  of  an 
acre,  the  receiver  is.suing  the  usual  duplicate  receipt 
therefor.  The  claimant  will  also  make  a  sworn  .state- 
ment of  all  cliarges  and  fees  paid  by  him  for  publication 
and  surveys,  together  with  all  fees  and  money  paid  the 
register  and  receiver  of  the  land  office;  after  which  the 
whole  matter  will  be  forwarded  to  the  Commissioner  of 
the  General  Land  Office  and  a  patent  issued  thereon  if 
found  regular. 

43.  In  sending  up  the  papers  in  the  case  the  register 
must  not  omit  certifying  to  the  feict  that  the  notice  was 
posted  in  his  office  for  the  full  period  of  sixty  days,  .such 
certificate  to  .state  distinctly  when  such  posting  was  done 
and  how  long  continued. 

44.  The  consecutive  series  of  numbers  of  mineral 
entries  must  be  continued,  whether  the  same  are  of  lode 
or  placer  claims  or  mill-sites. 

45.  The  surveyors-general  should  designate  all  sur- 
veyed raineral  claims  by  a  progressive  series  of  numbers, 
beginning  with  survey  No.  37,  irrespective  as  to  whether 
they  are  situated  on  surveyed  or  unsurveyed  lands,  the 


**%*■ 


ALASKA. 


151 


claim  to  be  so  designated  at  date  of  issuing  the  order 
therefor,  in  addition  to  the  loca'  I'ssignation  of  the  claim; 
it  being  required  in  all  cases  thai  the  plat  and  field  notes 
of  the  survey  of  a  claim  must,  in  addition  to  the  refer- 
ence to  permanent  objects  in  the  neighborhood,  describe 
the  /ocus  of  the  claim,  witli  reference  to  the  lines  of  pub- 
lic surveys,  by  a  line  connecting  a  corner  of  the  claim 
with  the  nearest  public  corner  of  the  United  »States  sur- 
veys, unless  such  claim  be  on  unsurveyed  lands  at  a 
distance  of  more  than  two  miles  from  such  public  cor- 
ner, in  which  latter  case  it  should  be  connected  with  a 
United  States  mineral  monument.  Such  connecting  line 
must  not  be  more  than  i7vo  miles  in  length  and  should  be 
measured  on  the  ground  direct  between  the  points,  or 
calculated  from  actually  surveyed  traverse  lines  if  the 
nature  of  the  country  should  not  permit  direct  measure- 
ment- If  a  regularly  established  survey  corner  is  within 
two  miles  of  a  claim  situated  on  unsurveyed  lands,  the 
connection  should  be  made  with  such  corner  in  prefer- 
ence to  a  connection  with  a  United  States  mineral  monu- 
ment. The  connecting  line  must  be  surveyed  by  the 
deputy  mineral  surveyor  at  the  time  of  his  making  the 
particular  survey,  and  be  made  a  part  thereof. 

46.  Upon  the  approval  of  the  survey  of  a  mining 
claim  made  upon  surveyed  lands,  the  surveyor-general 
will  prepare  and  transmit  to  the  local  land  office  and  to 
this  office  a  diagram  tracing  showing  the  portions  of  le- 
gal 40-acre  sub-divisions  made  fractional  by  reason  of  the 
mineral  survey,  designating  each  of  such  portions  by  the 
proper  lot  number,  beginning  with  No.  i  in  each  section 
and  giving  the  area  of  each  lot. 

47.  The  survey  and  plat  of  mineral  claims,  required 
by  section  2325,  Revised  Statutes  of  the  United  States, 
to  be  filed  in  the  proper  land  office,  with  application  for 
patent,  must  be  made  sub.sequent  to  the  recording  of  the 
location  of  the  mine;  and  when  the  original  location  is 
made  by  survey  of  a  United  vStates  deputy  surveyor  .such 
location  survey  can  not  be  substituted  for  that  required 
by  the  statute,  as  above  indicated. 

48.  The  surveyor-general  should  derive  his  informa- 


152  ALABKA. 

tion  upon  which  to  base  his  certificate  as  to  the  value  of 
labor  expended  or  improvements  made  from  his  deputy 
who  makes  the  actual  survey  and  examination  upon  the 
premises,  and  such  deputy  should  specify  with  particu- 
larity and  full  detail  he  character  and  extent  of  such 
improyements. 

49.  The  following  particulars  should  be  observed  in 
the  survey  of  every  mining  claim  : 

(i)  The  exterior  boundaries  of  the  claim  should  be 
represented  on  the  plat  of  survey  and  in  the  field  notes. 

(2)  The  intersection  of  the  lines  of  the  survey  with 
the  lines  of  conflicting  prior  surveys  should  be  noted  in 
the  field-noles  and  represented  upon  the  plat. 

(3)  Conflicts  with  uusurveyed  claims,  where  the  ap- 
plicant for  survey  does  not  claim  the  area  in  conflict, 
should  be  shown  by  actual  survey. 

(4)  The  total  area  of  the  claim  embraced  by  the  ex- 
terior boundaries  should  be  stated,  and  also  the  area  in 
conflict  with  each  intersecting  .survey,  substantially  as 
follows : 

Acres. 

Total  area  of  claim 1050 

Area  in  conflict  with  survey  No.  302 1.56 

Area  in  conflict  with  survey  No.  948 2.33 

Area  in  conflict  with  Mountain  Maid  lode  mining 

claim,  uusurveyed   i  .48 

It  does  not  follow  that  because  mining  surveys  are  re- 
quired to  exhibit  all  conflicts  with  prior  surveys  the  areas 
of  conflict  are  to  be  excluded.  The  field-notes  and  plat 
are  made  a  part  of  the  application  for  patent,  and  care 
should  be  taken  that  the  description  does  not  inad- 
vertently exclude  portions  intended  to  be  retained.  It  is 
better  that  the  application  for  patent  should  state  the 
portions  to  be  excluded  in  express  ternii>.  A  survey  exe- 
cuted, as  in  the  example  given,  will  enable  the  applicant 
for  patent  to  exclude  such  conflicts  as  may  seem  de- 
sirable. For  in.stance,  the  conflict  with  survey  No.  302 
and  with  the  Mountain  Maid  lode  claim  might  be  ex- 
cluded and  that  with  survey  No.  948  included. 

50.  The  rights  granted   to  locators  under  section 


w 


m 


u 


a 


1 


i!!  3j 


ALASKA. 


153 


s 

1 


•J 

•A 

I 

w 

r- 


2322,  Revised  Statutes,  are  restricted  to  such  locations 
on  veins,  lodes  or  ledges  as  may  be  "situated  on  the  pub- 
lic domain''  In  applications  for  lode  claims  where  the 
survey  conflicts  with  a  prior  valid  lode  claim  or  entry  and 
the  ground  in  conflict  is  excluded,  the  applicant  not  only 
has  no  right  to  the  excluded  ground,  but  he  has  no  right 
to  that  portion  of  any  vein  or  lode  the  top  or  apex  of 
which  lies  within  such  excluded  ground,  unless  his  loca- 
tion was  prior  to  May  10,  1872.  His  right  to  the  lode 
claimed  terminates  where  the  lode,  in  its  onward  course 
or  strike,  intersects  the  exterior  boundry  of  such  exclu- 
ded ground  and  passes  within  it. 

51.  The  end  line  of  his  survey  should  not,  therefore, 
be  established  beyond  such  intersection,  unless  it  .should 
be  necessary  so  to  do  for  the  purpose  of  including  ground 
held  and  claimed  under  a  location  which  was  made  upon 
public  land  and  valid  at  the  time  it  was  made.  To  in- 
clude such  ground  (which  may  possibly  embrace  other 
lodes)  the  end  line  of  the  survey  may  be  established 
within  the  conflicting  survey,  but  the  line  must  be  so  run 
as  not  to  extend  any  farther  into  the  conflicting  survey 
than  may  be  necessary  to  make  such  end  line  parallel  to 
the  other  end  line  and  at  the  same  time  embrace  the 
ground  so  held  and  claimed.  The  useless  practice  in 
such  cases  of  extending  both  the  side  lines  of  a  survey 
into  the  conflicting  survey  and  establi.shing  an  end  line 
wholly  within  it,  beyond  a  point  necessary  under  the  rule 
just  stated,  will  be  discontinued. 

PLACER  CLAIMS. 

52.  The  proceedings  to  obtain  patents  for  cIcMuis 
usually  called  placers,  including  all  forms  of  deposit,  ex- 
cepting veins  of  quartz  or  other  rock  in  place,  are  simi- 
lar to  the  proceedings  prescribed  for  obtaining  patents 
for  vein  or  lode  claims ;  but  where  said  placer  claim  shall 
be  upon  surveyed  lands,  and  conforms  to  legal  sub-di- 
visions, no  furtlier  survej'  or  plat  will  be  required,  and 
all  placer  mining  claims  kvated  after  May  10,  1872,  shall 
conform  as  nearly  as  practicable  with  the  United  States 

system  of  public-land  surveys  and  the  rectangular  .subdi- 
11 — 


>"i* 


154 


ALASEi. 


.  „  «,>eh  location  shall  in- 
visions  of  such  =««Sv'rc  J?or  e*h  individual  cla.m- 
clude  more  than 'wentj  acres  i  confor.ned  to  le- 

,nt  but  where  placer  ':''"'°\'=^';,,° hall  be  made  as  on 
tl-  s^Xdivisions,  -rvey  and  Plat^sha^^.^^^  , 

P,,  sub-divisions  survey    plat -^^  ^^^^^„t,  p„„ded  the 
.  inJ'e^  having  already  been  fully  gn  en,  ^^^^ 

STotherwise,  as  may  be  necessary. uv^^^^    ^,^j^^  being 

divi'^onofVty-acre  legal  sub^v.s»^ 

,Uich  is  »''^"X  fcSmf  both  from  one  another  and 

i^STntSring  agncultural  Ian  s.  ^ 

S^It  is  held,  *"«=f°  ^'a^e  lots  in  mining  districts 
..-nctionofthelawthese  ten-acre  10  i„tents  and 

I'ould  be  considered  and  dealt  vvmi  t         ^^        i.cant 

S  fn^ry^^-S.  ate^tbe  isual  proceeding,  w.hout 
further  survey  or  plat.  ^.owever,  the  notice  given 

56.  In  cases  of  ^J^,  ^^J^,^;^  specific  and  accurate  n 
of  the  application  «;f%^^,'^acre  tracts  may  be  -ib-di- 
description,  and  as  the  fo^t>  acre  ^^  ^^  ^f 

vtded^nto  ien-acre  ^«^^^f  ^^^^/Xlograms  five  by  twenty 
ten  by  ten  chains,  or  ^.^  ^f  ^^J^parallel  and  at  right 
chains,  so  long  as  the  l^^^^^^^Juc  surveys,  it  will  be 
^^^^^^  fnd  Vication  state  specifi- 


ALASKA. 


165 


cally  what  ten-acre  lots  are  sought  to  be  patented,  in  ad- 
dition to  the  other  daia  required  in  the  notice. 

57.  Where  the  ten- acre  sub-division  is  in  the  form 
of  a  square  it  may  be  described,  for  instance,  as  the 
"  SE.  J  of  the  SW.  J  of  NW.  i"  or,  if  in  the  form  of  a 
parallelogram,  as  aforesaid,  it  may  be  described  as  the 
"  W.  i  of  the  W.  i  of  the  SW.  J  of  the  NW.  J  (or  the  N. 

^  of  the  S.  i  of  the  NE.  \  of  the  SE.  J)  of  section , 

township ,  range ,"  as  the  case  may  be  ;  but, 

in  addition  to  this  description  of  the  land,  the  notice 
must  give  all  the  other  data  that  is  required  in  a  mineral 
application,  by  which  parties  may  be  put  on  inquiry  as 
to  the  premises  sought  to  be  patented.  The  proofs  sub- 
mitted with  applications  for  claims  of  this  kind  must 
show  clearly  the  character  and  the  extent  of  the  im- 
provement:, upon  the  premises. 

Inasrruch  as  the  surveyor-general  has  no  duty  to  per- 
form iu  connection  with  the  entry  of  a  placer  claim  of  le- 
gal sub-divisions,  the  proof  of  improvements  must  show 
their  value  to  be  not  less  than  ^ve  hundred  dollars  and 
that  they  were  made  by  the  applicant  for  patent  or  his 
grantors.  The  annual  expenditure  to  the  amount  of 
$100,  required  by  section  2324,  Revised  Statutes,  must 
be  made  upon  placer  claims  as  well  as  lode  claims. 

58.  Applicants  for  patent  to  a  placer  claim,  who  are 
also  in  po.ssession  of  a  known  vein  or  lode  included 
therein,  must  state  in  their  application  that  the  placer 
includes  such  vein  or  lode.  The  published  and  posted 
notices  must  also  include  such  statement.  If  \cins  or 
lodes  lying  within  a  placer  location  are  owned  by  other 
parties,  the  fact  should  be  distinctly  stated  in  the  appli- 
cation for  patent  and  in  all  the  notices.  But  in  all  cases 
whether  the  lode  is  claimed  or  excluded,  it  must  be  sur- 
veyed and  marked  upon  the  piat ;  the  field  notes  and  plat 
giving  the  area  of  the  lode  claim  or  claims  and  the  area 
of  the  placer  separately.  It  should  be  remembered  that 
an  application  which  oraits  to  include  an  application  for 
a  known  vein  or  lode  therein,  must  be  construed  as 
a  conclusive  declaration  that  the  applicant  has  no  right 
of  possession  to  the  vein  or  lode.    Where  there  is  no 


ISO' 


ALASKA. 


Hi  WM9i  :y. 


known  lode  or  vein,  the  fact  must  appear  by  the  affidavit 
of  two  or  more  witnesses, 

59.  By  section  2330  it  is  declared  that  no  location  of 
a  placer  claim  made  after  July  9,  1870,  shall  exceed  one 
hundred  and  sixty  acres  for  any  one  person  or  associa- 
tion of  persons,  which  location  shall  conform  to  the  Uni- 
ted States  surveys. 

60.  Section  2331  provideii  that  all  placer-raining 
claims  located  after  May  10,  1872,  shall  conform  as 
nearly  as  practicable  with  the  United  States  systems  of 
public  surveys  and  the  sub  divisions  of  such  surveys, 
and  no  such  locations  shall  include  more  than  twenty 
acres  for  each  individual  claimant. 

61.  The  foregoing  provisions  of  law  are  construed  to 
mean  that  after  the  9th  day  of  July,  1870,  no  location  of 
a  placer  claim  -^an  be  made  to  exceed  one  hundred  and 
sixty  acres,  whatever  may  be  the  number  of  locators, 
associated  together,  or  whatever  the  local  regulations  of 
the  district  may  allow ;  and  that  from  and  after  May  10, 
1872,  no  location  made  by  an  individual  can  exceed 
twenty  acres,  and  no  location  made  by  an  association  of 
individuals  can  exceed  one  hundred  and  sixty  acres, 
which  location  of  one  hundred  and  sixty  acres  can  not 
be  made  by  a  less  number  than  eight  do?ia  fide  locators ; 
and  no  local  laws  or  mining  regulations  can  restrict 
a  placer  location  to  less  than  twenty  acres,  although  the 
locator  is  not  compelled  to  take  so  much. 

62.  The  regulations  hereinbefore  given  as  to  the 
manner  of  marking  locations  on  the  ground  and  placing 
the  same  on  record  must  be  observed  in  the  case  of 
placer  locations  so  far  as  the  same  are  applicable,  the 
law  requiring,  however,  that  where  placer  claims  are 
upon  surveyed  public  lands  the  locations  must  hereafter 
be  made  to  conform  to  legal  sub-divisions  thereof  as  near 
as  practicable. 

63.  The  first  care  in  recognizing  an  application  for 
patent  upon  a  placer  claim  must  be  exercised  in  deter- 
miniLg  the  exact  cla.ssification  of  the  lands.  To  this 
end  the  clearest  evidence  of  which  the  case  is  capable 
should  be  presented. 


ALA8KA. 


157 


(i)  If  the  claim  be  all  placer  ground,  that  fact  must 
be  stated  in  the  application  and  corroborated  by  ac- 
companying proofs;  if  of  mixed  placers  and  lodes  it 
should  be  so  set  out,  with  a  description  of  all  known 
lodes  situated  within  the  boundaries  of  the  claim.  A 
specific  declaration,  such  as  is  required  by  section  2333, 
Revised  Statutes,  must  be  furnished  as  to  each  lode 
intended  to  be  claimed.  All  other  known  lodes  are,  by 
the  silence  of  the  applicant,  excluded  by  law  from  all 
claim  by  him  of  whatsoever  nature,  possessory  or  other- 
wise. 

(2)  Section  2395,  Revised  Statutes  (sub-division  7), 
requires  the  surveyor  to  "  note  in  his  field  books  the  true 
situation  of  all  mines,  salt  licks,  salt  springs  and  mill 
seats  which  comes  to  his  knowledge;"  also  "all  water- 
courses over  which  the  lines  he  runs  may  pass."  It 
further  requires  him  to  "note  the  quality  of  the  lands." 
These  descriptive  notes  are  required  by  sub-division  8  to 
be  incorporated  in    he  plat  by  the  surveyor-general. 

(3)  If  these  duties  have  been  performed,  the  public 
surveys  will  furnish  a  reasonable  guide  to  the  district 
officers  and  to  claimants  in  prosecuting  their  applica- 
tions. But  experience  has  shown  that  great  neglect  has 
resulted  from  inattention  to  the  law  in  this  respect,  and 
the  regular  plats  are  of  very  little  value  in  the  matter. 
It  will,  therefore,  be  required  in  the  future  that  deputy 
surveyors  shall,  at  the  expense  of  the  parties,  make  (nil 
examination  of  all  placer  claims  surveyed  by  them  and 
duly  note  the  facts  as  specified  in  the  law,  stating  the 
quality  and  composition  of  the  soil,  the  kind  and  amount 
of  timber  and  other  vegetation,  the  locus  and  size 
of  streams  and  such  other  matters  as  may  appear  upon 
the  surface  of  the  claim.  This  examination  should  in- 
clude the  character  and  extent  of  all  surface  and  under- 
ground workings,  whether  placer  or  lode,  for  mining  pur- 
poses. 

(4)  In  addition  to  these  data,  which  the  law  requires 
to  be  shown  in  all  cases,  the  deputy  should  report  with 
reference  to  the  proximity  of  centers  of  trade  or  resi- 
dence ;  also  of  well-known  systems  of  lode  deposit  or  of 


Jm 


158 


ALASKA. 


"     -till 

m 


individual  lodes.    He  f-»'tf  °S'mtni!rg"h°er 

K^ade  Vrcf^^a^ufirsif^ation  and  loc.Uou 

^iSTe^^^cfto  thet:;  -  aPPj-^VrVeponed  by  the 
™  (5)  This  examination  should  be  P_^^^,  ^^^  ^  ,y 
deouty  under  oath  to  'he  surveyo  ^      ^^^^^^  ^  ,„^. 

°iesr;to%:::J^-tirastoti.cha^^^^^^^^ 

ra«d."fnt^-s  f<^:^i::;V^^^:^-^'^ry  in  each 
additional  proofs  as  may  oe 

'=*^-  MII.1.-SITES. 

M.C  thiit  "  where  non-mineral 
64.  Section  ^337  prov.des  'h^Sode  is  ^^  „ 

as  to  survey  and  "f'f  ,f;J^fter  made  of  such   non- 
tiles;  but  "°,Xxeed  five  a^es,  and  fy"'"','? 
adiacent  land  shall  exceeu  ^^  ^^^^  ^y  tms 

the  same  must  be  made  at  t^^^/'^^^^^^     ^he  owner  of  a 

I'l^^tfeSri^d  tVcVntVous  thereto,  for 


\ 


ALASKA. 


150 


mining  or  milling  purposes,  not  exceeding  the  quantity 
allowed  for  such  purpose  by  section  2337,  United  States 
Revised  Statutes,  or  prior  laws,  under  which  the  land 
was  appropriated,  the  proprietors  of  such  vein  or  lode 
may  file  in  the  proper  land-office  their  application  for  a 
patent,  under  oath,  in  manner  already  set  forth  herein, 
which  application,  together  with  the  plat  and  field-notes, 
may  include,  embrace  and  describe,  in  addition  to  the 
vein  or  lode,  such  non-contiguous  mill-site,  and  after  due 
proceedings  as  to  notice,  etc.,  a  patent  will  be  issued  con- 
veying the  same  as  one  claim. 

66.  In  making  the  survey  in  a  case  of  this  kind  the 
lode  claim  should  be  described  in  the  plat  and  field-notes 
as  "Sur.  No.  37,  A,"  and  the  mill-.site  as  "  Sur.  No.  37, 

No.  86 8 

B,"  or  whatever  may  be  its  appropriate  numerical  desig- 
nation ;  the  course  and  distance  from  a  corner  of  the 
mill-site  to  a  corner  of  the  lode  claim  to  be  invariably 
given  in  such  plat  and  field-notes,  and  a  copy  of  the  plat 
and  notice  of  application  for  patent  must  be  con- 
spicuously po.sted  upon  the  mill-site  as  well  as  upon  the 
vein  or  lode  for  the  .statutory  period  of  .sixty  days.  In 
making  the  entry  no  separate  receipt  or  certificate  need 
be  issued  for  the  mill-site,  but  the  whole  area  of  both  lode 
and  mill-site  will  be  embraced  in  one  entry,  the  price  be- 
ing five  dollars  for  each  acre  and  fractional  part  of  an 
acre  embraced  by  such  lode  and  mill-site  claim. 

67.  In  case  the  owner  of  a  quartz  mill  or  reduction- 
works  is  not  the  owner  or  claimant  of  a  vein  or  lode,  the 
law  permits  him  to  make  application  therefor  in  the 
same  manner  presciibed  herein  for  mining  claims,  and 
after  due  notice  and  proceedings,  in  the  absence  of  a 
valid  adverse  filing,  to  enter  and  receive  a  patent  for  his 
mill-site  at  said  price  per  acre. 

68.  In  every  case  there  must  be  .satisfactory  proof 
that  the  land  claimed  as  a  mill-site  is  not  mineral  in 
character,  which  proof  may,  where  the  matter  is  un- 
que.stioned,  consist  of  the  sworn  statement  of  two  or 
more  persons  capable  from  acquaintance  with  the  land 
to  testify  understandingly. 


V] 


v^ 


/: 


c^,      .">    ^^> 


V 


/A 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0     V^  ^ 


■^    ate 


2.2 


I.I 


1.8 


IL25  11.4   III  1.6 


Photographic 

Sciences 

Corporation 


// 


.0--.V4-5-      I 


/, 


^ 


It 


33  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER  N.Y.  MS80 

(716)  872-4503 


.V4 


I 


.vJ-         J 


^^^^^mm^mmmmmmimmm 


160 


ALASKA. 


:>'! 


POSSESSORY  RIGHT. 

69.  With  regard  to  the  proofs  necessary  to  establish 
the  possessory  rights  to  a  mining  claim,  section  2332 
provides  that  "  where  such  person  or  association,  they 
and  their  grantors,  have  held  and  worked  their  claims 
for  a  period  equal  to  the  time  prescribed  by  the  statute 
of  limitations  for  mining  claims  of  the  State  or  Terri- 
tory where  the  same  may  be  situated,  evidence  of  such 
possession  and  working  of  the  claims  for  such  period 
shall  be  sufficient  to  establish  a  right  to  a  patent  thereto 
under  Ihis  chapter,  in  the  absence  of  any  adverse 
claim." 

70.  This  provision  of  law  will  greatly  lessen  the 
burfi«n  of  proof,  more  especially  in  the  case  of  old  claims 
located  many  years  since,  the  records  of  which,  in  many 
cases,  have  been  destroyed  by  fire,  or  lost  in  other  ways, 
during  the  lapse  of  time,  but  concerning  the  possessory 
right  to  which  all  controversy  or  litigation  has  long  been 
settled. 

71.  When  an  applicant  desires  to  make  his  proof  of 
possessory  right  in  accordance  with  this  provision  of 
law,  he  will  not  be  required  to  produce  evidence  of  loca- 
tion, copies  of  conveyances,  or  abstracts  of  title,  as  in 
other  cases,  but  will  be  required  to  furnish  a  duly  certi- 
fied copy  of  the  statute  of  limitations  of  mining  claims 
for  the  State  or  Territory,  together  with  his  sworn  state- 
ment giving  a  clear  and  succinct  narration  of  the  facts 
as  to  the  origin  of  his  title,  and  likewise  as  to  the  con- 
tinuation of  his  poss  ^ssion  of  the  mining  ground  covered 
by  his  application;  the  area  thereof;  the  nature  and  ex- 
tent of  the  milling  that  has  been  done  thereon;  whether 
there  has  been  any  opposition  to  his  possession,  or  liti- 
gation with  regard  to  his  claim,  and,  if  so,  when  the 
same  ceased;  whether  such  cessation  was  caused  by  com- 
promise or  by  judicial  decree,  and  any  additional  facts 
within  the  claimant's  knowledge  having  a  direct  bearing 
upon  his  possession  and  dona  fides  which  he  may  desire 
to  submit  in  support  of  his  claim. 

72.  There  .should  likewise  be  filed  a  certificate,  under 


I 

illi 


ALASKA. 


161 


seal  of  the  court  having  jurisdiction  of  mining  cases 
within  the  judicial  district  embracing  the  claim,  that  no 
suit  or  action  of  any  character  whatever  involving  the 
right  of  possession  to  any  portion  of  the  claim  applied  for 
is  pending,  and  that  there  has  been  no  litigation  before 
said  court  affecting  the  title  to  said  claim  or  any  part 
thereof  for  a  period  equal  to  the  time  fixed  by  the  statute 
of  limitations  for  mining-claims  in  the  State  or  Territory 
as  aforesai(^,  other  than  that  which  has  been  finally 
decided  in  favor  of  the  claimant. 

73.  The  claimant  should  support  his  nairative  of 
facts  relative  to  his  possession,  occupancy  and  improve- 
ments by  corroborative  testimony  of  any  disinterested 
person  or  persons  of  credibility  who  may  be  cognizant 
of  the  facts  in  the  case  and  are  capable  of  testifying  un- 
derstandingly  in  the  premises. 

74.  As  a  condition  for  the  making  of  application  for 
patent  according  to  section  2325,  there  must  be  a  pre- 
liminary showing  of  work  or  expenditure  upon  each  lo- 
cation, either  by  showing  the  full  amount  sufficient  to 
the  maintenance  of  possession  under  section  2324  for  the 
pending  year;  or,  if  there  has  been  failure,  it  should  be 
shown  that  work  has  been  resumed  so  as  to  prevent  re- 
location by  adverse  parties  after  abandonment. 

The  "pending  year"  means  the  calendar  year  in 
which  application  is  made,  and  has  no  reference  to  a 
showing  of  work  at  date  of  the  final  entry. 

75.  This  preliminary  showing  may,  where  the  matter 
is  unquestioned,  consist  of  the  affidavit  of  two  or  more 
witnesses  familiar  with  the  facts. 


my 
iiiSi : 

1: 


PROOF   OF   CITIZENSHIP   OF    MINING    CLAIMANTS. 

76.  The  proof  necessary  to  establish  the  citizenship 
of  applicants  for  mining  patents  must  be  made  in  the 
following  manner:  In  case  of  an  incorporated  company, 
a  certified  copy  of  their  charter  or  certificate  of  incorpo- 
ration must  be  filed.  In  case  of  an  association  of  persons 
unincorporated,  the  affidavit  of  their  duly  authorized 
agent,  made  upon  his  own  knowledge  or  upou  informa- 


'Vi  ''    ■ 


m 


,)  .f 


m 


i;:i^ 


f'i:|| 


162 


ALASKA. 


tion  and  belief,  setting  forth  the  residence  of  each  per- 
son forming  such  association,  must  be  submitted.  This 
affidavit  must  be  accompanied  by  a  power  of  attorney 
from  the  parties  forming  such  association,  authorizing 
the  person  who  makes  the  affidavit  of  citizenship  to 
act  for  them  in  the  matter  of  their  application  for 
patent. 

77.  In  case  of  an  individual  or  an  association  of  indi- 
viduals who  do  not  appear  by  their  duly  authorized 
agent,  showing  whether  he  is  a  native  or  naturalized 
citizen,  when  and  where  born,  and  his  residence. 

78.  In  case  an  applicant  has  declared  his  intention  to 
become  a  citizen  or  has  been  naturalized,  his  affidavit 
must  show  the  date,  place,  and  the  court  before  which 
he  declared  his  intention,  or  from  which  his  certificate 
of  citizenship  issued,  and  present  residence. 

79.  The  affidavit  of  the  claimant  as  to  his  citizenship 
may  be  taken  before  the  register  or  receiver,  or  any 
other  officer  authorized  to  administer  oaths  within  the 
land  district;  or,  if  the  claimant  is  residing  beyond  the 
limits  of  the  district,  the  affidavit  may  be  taken  before 
the  clerk  of  any  court  of  record  or  before  any  notary 
public  of  any  State  or  Territory. 

80.  If  citizenship  is  established  by  the  testimony  of 
disinterested  persons,  such  testimony  may  be  taken  at 
any  place  before  any  person  authorized  to  administer 
oaths,  and  whose  official  character  is  duly  verified. 


ADVERSE  CI^AIMS. 

81.  Section  2326  and  the  act  of  April  26,  1882,  pro- 
vide for  adverse  claims,  fix  the  time  within  which  they 
shall  be  filed  to  have  legal  effect,  and  prescribe  the  man- 
ner of  their  adjustment,  etc. 

82.  An  adverse  mining  claim  must  be  filed  with  the 
register  and  receiver  or  the  Land  Office  where  the  appli- 
cation for  patent  was  filed,  or  with  the  register  and  re- 
ceiver of  iihe  district  in  which  the  land  is  situated  at  the 
time  of  filing  the  adverse  claim.  It  must  be  on  the  oath 
of  the  adverse  claimant,  or  it  may  be  verified  by  the  oath 


ALASKA. 


163 


of  any  duly  authorized  agent  or  attorney-in-fact  of  the 
adverse  claimant,  cognizant  of  the  facts  stated. 

83.  Where  an  agent  or  attorney-in-fact  verifies  the 
adverse  claim,  he  must  distinctly  swear  that  he  is  such 
agent  or  attorney,  and  accompany  his  afi&davit  by  proof 
thereof. 

84.  The  agent  or  attorney-in-fact  must  make  the  affi- 
davit in  verification  of  the  adverse  claim  within  the  land 
district  where  the  claim  is  situated. 

85.  The  adverse  notice  must  fully  set  forth  the  na- 
ture and  extent  of  the  interference  or  conflict ;  whether 
the  adverse  party  claims  as  a  purchaser  for  valuable  con- 
sideration or  as  a  locator ;  if  the  former,  a  certified  copy 
of  the  original  location,  the  original  conveyance,  a  duly 
certified  copy  thereof,  or  an  abstract  of  title  from  the 
office  of  the  proper  recorder  should  be  furnished,  or  if 
the  transaction  was  a  merely  verbal  one  he  will  narrate 
the  circumstances  attending  the  purchase,  the  date 
thereof  and  the  amount  paid,  which  facts  should  be  sup- 
ported by  the  affidavit  of  one  or  more  witnesses,  if  any 
were  present  at  the  time,  and  if  he  claims  as  a  locator 
he  must  file  a  duly  certified  copy  of  the  location  from 
the  office  of  the  proper  recorder, 

86.  In  order  that  the  "doundartes  "  and  "  extent "  of 
the  claim  may  be  shown,  it  will  be  incumbent  upon  the 
adverse  claimant  to  file  a  plat  showing  his  entire  claim, 
its  relative  situation  or  position  with  the  one  against 
which  he  claims,  and  the  extent  of  the  conflict.  This 
plat  must  be  made  from  an  actual  survey  by  a  United 
States  deputy  surveyor,  who  will  officially  certify  thereon 
to  its  correctness;  and  in  addition  there  must  be  at- 
tached to  such  plat  of  survey  a  certificate  or  sworn  state- 
ment by  the  surveyor  as  to  the  approximate  value  of  the 
labor  performed  or  improvements  made  upon  the  claim 
by  the  adverse  party  or  his  predecessors  in  interest,  and 
the  plat  must  indicate  the  position  of  any  shafts,  tunnels 
or  other  improvements,  if  any  such  exist,  upon  the  claim 
of  the  party  opposing  the  application,  and  by  which 
party  said  improvements  were  made :  Provided,  however, 
That,  if  the  application  for  patent  describes  the  claim 


■i:;i 


•I  ; ! 


K     11 


'  )     I'*'  i  5-^ 


164 


ALASKA. 


by  legal  subdivisions,  the  adverse  claimant,  if  also 
claiming  by  legal  subdivisions,  may  describe  his  ad- 
verse claim  in  the  same  manner  without  further  survey 
or  plat, 

87.  Upon  the  foregoing  being  filed  within  the  sixty 
days  as  aforesaid,  the  register,  or  in  his  absence  the  re- 
ceiver, will  give  notice  in  writing  to  doih  parties  to  the 
contest  that  such  adverse  claim  has  been  filed,  informing 
them  that  the  party  who  filed  the  adverse  claim  will  be 
required  within  thirty  days  from  the  date  of  such  filing 
to  commence  proceedings  in  a  court  of  competent  juris- 
diction to  determine  the  question  of  right  of  possession, 
and  to  prosecute  the  same  with  reasonable  diligence  to 
final  judgment,  and  that,  should  such  adverse  claimant 
fail  to  do  so,  his  adverse  claim  will  be  considered  waived 
and  the  application  for  patent  be  allowed  to  proceed 
upon  its  merits. 

88.  When  an  adverse  claim  is  filed  as  aforCvSaid,  the 
register  or  receiver  will  indorse  upon  the  same  the  pre- 
cise date  of  filing,  and  preserve  a  record  of  the  date  of 
notifications  issued  thereon ;  and  thereafter  all  proceed- 
ings on  the  application  for  patent  will  be  suspended, 
with  the  exception  of  the  completion  of  the  publication 
and  posting  of  notices  and  plat,  and  the  filing  of  the 
necessary  proof  thereof,  until  the  controversy  shall  have 
been  adjudicated  in  court,  or  the  adverse  claim  waived  or 
withdrawn. 

89.  Where  an  adverse  claim  has  been  filed  and  suit 
thereon  commenced  within  the  statutory  period  and  final 
judgment  determining  the  right  of  possession  rendered 
in  favor  of  the  applicant,  it  will  not  be  sufiicient  for  him 
to  file  with  the  register  a  certificate  of  the  clerk  of  the 
court,  setting  forth  the  facts  as  to  such  judgment,  but  he 
must,  before  he  is  allowed  to  make  entry,  file  a  certified 
copy  of  the  judgment,  together  with  the  other  evidence 
required  by  section  2326,  Revised  Statutes. 

90.  Where  such  suit  has  been  dismissed  a  certificate 
of  the  clerk  of  the  court  to  that  eflfect  or  a  certified  copy 
of  the  order  of  dismissal  will  be  sufiicient. 

91.  In  no  case  will  a  relinquishment  of  the  ground  in 


i 

i 


ALASKA. 


165 


controversy,  or  other  proof,  filed  with  the  register  or  re- 
ceiver be  accepted  in  lieu  of  the  evidence  required. 

92.  Where  an  adverse  claim  has  been  filed,  but  no  suit 
commenced  against  the  applicant  for  patent  within  the 
statutory  period,  a  certificate  to  that  eflfect  by  the  clerk 
of  the  State  court  having  jurisdiction  in  the  case, 
and  also  by  the  clerk  of  the  circuit  court  of  the  Uni- 
ted States  for  the  district  in  which  the  claim  is  situated, 
will  be  required. 

93.  A  party  who  is  not  an  applicant  for  patent  under 
section  2325,  Revised  Statutes,  or  the  assignee  of  such 
applicant,  is  not  entitled  to  make  entry  under  said 
section,  and  in  no  case  will  the  name  of  such  party  be  in- 
serted in  the  certificate  of  entry.  This  regulation  has  no 
reference  to  proceedings  under  section  2326. 

94.  Any  party  applying  to  make  entry  as  trustee  must 
disclose  fully  the  nature  of  the  trust  and  the  name  of  the 
cestui  que  trust;  and  such  trustee,  as  well  as  the 
beneficiaries,  must  furnish  satisfactory  proof  of  citizen- 
ship ;  and  the  names  of  beneficiaries,  as  well  as  that 
of  the  trustee,  must  be  inserted  in  the  final  certificate  of 
entry. 

95.  No  entry  will  be  allowed  until  the  register  has 
satisfied  himself,  by  a  careful  examination,  that  proper 
proofs  have  been  filed  upon  all  the  points  indicated 
in  official  regulations  in  force,  and  that  they  show  a 
sufl&cient  bona  fide  compliance  with  the  laws  and  such 
regulations. 

96.  The  administration  of  the  mining  laws  as  pre- 
scribed by  these  regulations  will  be,  so  far  as  applicable, 
a,dopted  for  and  extended  to  Alaska. 

(i)  The  exofficio  register,  receiver  and  surveyor- 
general,  while  acting  as  such,  and  their  clerks  and 
deputy  surveyors,  will  be  deemed  subject  to  the  laws  and 
regulations  governing  the  oflBcial  conduct  and  responsi- 
bilities of  similar  oiBicers  and  persons  under  general 
statutes  of  the  United  States. 

(2)  The  Commissioner  of  the  General  Land  Office 
will  exercise  the  same  general  supervision  over  the  exe- 
cution of  the  laws  as  are  or  may  be  exercised  by  him  in 
other  mineral  districts, 


k-iil 


t 


*  !' 


m 


iA  .Mi 


l;!^ 


'''}■■. 

£n' 

i|i|:^-ii 

166 


ALASKA. 


APPOINTMENT  OF    DEPUTY  SURVEYORS    OF   MINING 
CI^AIMS— CHARGES  FOR  SURVEYS  AND  PUB- 
LICATIONS— FEES  OF  REGISTERS 
AND  RECEIVERS,  ETC. 

97.  Section  2334  provides  for  the  appointment  of  sur- 
veyors of  mineral  claims,  authorizes  the  Commissioners 
of  the  General  I«and  Office  to  establish  the  rates  to  be 
charged  for  surveys  and  for  newspaper  publications. 

Under  this  authority  of  law  the  following  rates  have 
been  established  as  the  maximum  charges  for  newspaper 
publications  in  mining  cases : 

(i)  Where  a  daily  newspaper  is  designated,  the 
charge  shall  not  exceed  seven  dollars  for  each  ten  lines 
of  space  occupied,  and  where  a  weekly  newspaper  is 
designated  as  the  medium  of  publication  five  dollars  for 
the  same  space  will  be  allowed.  Such  charge  shall  be 
accepted  as  full  payment  for  publication  in  eachissuc  of 
the  newspaper  for  the  entire  period  required  by  law. 

It  is  expected  that  these  notices  shall  not  be  so 
abbreviated  as  to  curtail  the  description  essential  to  a 
perfect  notice,  and  the  said  rates  established  upon 
the  understanding  that  they  are  to  be  in  the  usual  body- 
type  used  for  advertisements. 

(2)  For  the  publication  of  citations  in  contests  or 
hearings  involving  the  character  of  lands,  the  charges 
shall  not  exceed  eight  dollars  for  five  publications  in 
weekly  newspapers,  or  ten  dollars  for  publications  i  n 
daily  newspapers  for  thirty  days. 

98.  The  surveyors-general  of  the  several  districts  will, 
in  pursuance  of  said  law,  appoint  u\  each  land  district  as 
many  competent  deputies  for  the  survey  of  mining  claims 
as  may  seek  such  appointment ;  it  being  distinctly  under- 
stood that  all  expenses  of  these  notices  and  surveys  are 
to  be  borne  by  the  mining  claimants  and  not  by  the  Uni- 
ted States ;  the  system  of  making  deposits  for  mineral  sur- 
veys, as  required  by  previous  instructions,  being  hereby 
revoked  as  regards  y?f/(i zf<7rit ;  the  claimant  having  the 
option  of  employing  any  deputy  surveyor  within  such 
district  to  do  his  work  in  the  field. 


I 

1 


ALASKA. 


167 


99.  With  regard  to  the  platting  of  the  claim  and 
other  office  work  in  the  surveyor-general's  office,  that 
officer  will  make  an  estimate  of  the  cost  thereof,  which 
amount  the  claimant  will  deposit  with  any  assistant  Uni- 
ted States  Treasurer,  or  designated  depository  in  favor 
of  the  United  States  Treasurer.to  be  passed  to  the  credit 
of  the  fund  created  by  "  individual  depositors  for  surveys 
of  the  public  lands,"  and  file  with  the  surveyor-general 
duplicate  certificates  of  such  deposit  in  the  usual  manner. 

100.  The  surveyors- general  will  endeavor  to  appoint 
mineral  deputy  surveyors,  so  that  one  or  more  may  be  lo- 
cated in  each  mining  district  for  the  greater  convenience 
of  miners. 

loi.  The  usual  oaths  will  be  required  of  these  depu- 
ties and  their  assistants  as  to  the  correctness  of  each  sur- 
vey executed  by  them. 

The  duty  of  the  deputy  mineral  surveyor  ceases  when 
he  has  executed  the  survey  and  returned  the  field  notes 
and  preliminary  plat  thereof  with  his  report  to  the  sur- 
veyor-general. He  will  not  be  allowed  to  prepare  for  the 
mining  claimant  the  papers  in  support  of  an  application 
for  patent,  or  otherwise  perform  the  duties  of  an  attorney 
before  the  land  office  in  connection  with  a  mining  claim. 

The  surveyor-general  and  local  land  officers  are 
expected  to  report  any  infringement  of  this  regulation  to 
this  office. 

102.  The  law  requires  that  each  applicant  shall  file 
with  the  register  and  receiver  a  sworn  statement  of  all 
charges  and  fees  paid  by  him  for  publication  of  notice 
and  for  survey,  together  with  all  fees  and  money  paid  the 
register  and  receiver,  which  sworn  statement  is  required 
to  be  transmitted  to  this  office  for  the  information  of  the 
Commissioner. 

103.  Should  it  appear  that  excessive  or  exorbitant 
charges  have  been  made  by  any  surveyor  or  any 
publisher,  prompt  action  will  be  taken  with  the  view  of 
correcting  the  abuse. 

104.  The  fees  payable  to  the  register  and  receiver  for 
filing  and  acting  upon  applications  for  mineral-land 
patents  are  five  dollars  to  each  officer,  to  be  paid  by  the 


I 

M 

Iti 


•i  ' 


>#i 


,,jhb:i?.;." 
I  1  TOi:::--  : 


afftii"' 


m' 


II 


\--''i 


;i'i 


168 


ALASKA. 


applicant  for  patent  at  the  time  of  filing,  and  the  like 
sum  of  five  dollars  is  payable  to  each  officer  by  an  ad- 
verse claimant  at  the  time  of  filing  his  adverse  claim. 
(Sec.  2238,  R.  S.,  paragraph  9.) 

105.  All  fees  or  charges  under  this  law  may  be  paid 
in  United  States  currency. 

106.  The  register  and  receiver  will,  at  the  close  of 
each  month,  forward  to  this  office  an  abstract  of  mining 
applications  filed,  and  a  register  of  receipts,  accompanied 
with  an  abstract  of  mineral  lands  sold  and  an  abstract  of 
adverse  claims  filed. 

107.  The  fees  and  purchase  money  received  by 
registers  and  receivers  must  be  placed  to  the  credit  of 
the  United  States  in  the  receiver's  monthly  and  quar- 
terly account,  charging  up  in  the  disbursement  account 
the  sums  to  which  the  register  and  receiver  may  be  re- 
spectively entitled  as  fees  and  commissions,  with  limita- 
tions in  regard  to  the  legal  maximum. 

PROCEEDINGS  BEFORE  THE  REGISTER  AND  RECEIVER 

AND  SURVEYOR-GENERAL  IN  CONTESTS  AND 

HEARINGS    TO    ESTABLISH    THE 

CHARACTER  OF  LANDS. 

108.  The  "  Rules  of  Practice  in  cases  before  the  Uni- 
ted States  district  land  offices,  the  General  Land  Office, 
and  the  Department  of  the  Interior,"  approved  August 
13.  1885,  will,  as  far  as  applicable,  govern  in  all  cases 
and  proceedings  arising  in  contests  and  hearings  to  de- 
termine the  mineral  or  non-mineral  character  of  lands. 

109.  The  only  tracts  of  public  land  that  will  be  with- 
held from  entry  as  agricultural  land  on  account  of  its 
mineral  character  will  be  such  as  are  returned  by  the 
surveyor-general  as  mineral ;  and  even  the  presumption 
which  is  supported  by  such  return  may  be  overcome  by 
testimony  taken  at  a  regular  hearing. 

no.  Hearings  to  determine  the  character  of  land,  as 
practically  distinguished,  are  of  two  kinds  : 

(i)  Where  lands  which  are  sought  to  be  entered  and 
patented  as  agricultural  are  alleged  by  affidavit  to  be 


w 


I 
ir. 

T. 


X 


V 


3 
3- 


M 


, 


/; 


O 
H 
C/3 


tfi 


W 


t/2 


•r. 


WW 
C.  • 


tn 


(Mil! 


Q 


--us 


O 


cfi 


o 
w 


H 


wr 


""OS 

►J 

<< 


ILASZl. 


1G9 


mineral,  or  when  sought  as  mineral,  their  non-mineral 
character  is  alleged. 

The  proceedings  relative  to  this  class  are  in  the  na- 
ture of  a  contest  between  two  or  more  knowu  i    rties. 

(2)  When  lands  are  returned  as  inineral-  by  !he  sur- 
veyor-general. 

When  such  lands  are  sought  to  be  eri  red  i^s  agri- 
cultural notice  must  be  given  by  publication  for  thirty 
days  w'tt   posting  in  the  local  office  for  the  same  period. 

111.  At  the  hearings  under  either  of  tK^  aforesaid 
■'lasses  the  claimants  and  witnesses  will  be  thoroughly 
examined  with  regard  to  the  character  of  the  land ; 
whether  the  same  has  been  thoroughly  prospected  ; 
whether  or  not  there  exists  within  the  tract  or  tracts 
claimed  any  lode  or  vein  of  quartz  or  other  rock  in 
place,  bearing  gold,  silver,  cinnabar,  lead,  tin  or  copper, 
or  other  valuable  deposit  which  has  ever  been  claimed, 
located,  recorded  or  worked ;  whether  such  work  is 
entirely  abandoned  or  whether  occasionally  resumed  ; 
if  such  lode  does  exist,  by  whom  claimed,  under  what 
designation  and  in  which  sub-division  of  the  land  it  lies ; 
whether  any  placer  mine  or  mines  exist  upon  the  land  ; 
if  so,  what  is  the  character  thereof— whether  of  the  shal- 
low-surface description  or  of  the  deep  cement,  blue  lead 
or  gravel  deposits ;  to  what  extent  mining  is  carried  on 
when  water  can  be  obtained  and  what  the  facilities 
are  for  obtaining  water  for  mining  purposes ;  upon  what 
particular  ten-acre  sub-divisions  mining  has  been  done, 
and  at  what  time  the  land  was  abandoned  for  mining  pur- 
poses, if  abandoned  at  all. 

112.  The  testimony  should  also  show  the  agricultural 
capacities  of  the  land,  what  kind  of  crops  are  rai.-ed 
thereon  and  the  value  thereof;  the  number  of  acres 
actually  cultivated  for  crops  of  cereals  or  vegetables  and 
within  which  particular  ten-acre  sub-division  such  crops 
are  raised  ;  also  which  of  these  sub-divisions  embrace  the 
improvements,  giving  in  detail  the  extent  and  value  of 
the  improvements,  such  as  house,  barn,  vineyard,  orchard, 
fencing,  etc.,  and  mining  improvements. 

113.  The  testimony  should  be  as  full  and  complete  as 

i» — 


m 


i: 
t 


:ii^ 


:i^^^ 


1 

i 


HHT^ 


P 


.Sir 


ITO 


ilL^jSrJTA. 


possible ;  and  in  addition  to  the  leading  points  indicated 
above,  where  an  attempt  is  made  to  prove  the  mineral 
character  of  lands  which  have  been  entered  under 
the  agricultural  laws,  it  should  show  at  what  date,  if  at 
all,  valuable  deposits  of  mineral  were  first  known  to  exist 
on  the  lands. 

114.  When  the  case  comes  before  this  oflBce  such  de- 
cision will  be  made  as  the  law  and  the  facts  may  justify; 
and  in  cases  where  a  survey  is  necessary  to  set  apart  the 
mineral  from  the  agricultural  land,  the  necessary  in- 
structions will  be  given  to  enable  the  proper  party  at  his 
own  expense,  to  have  the  work  done,  at  his  option,  either 
by  United  States  deputy,  county  or  other  local  surveyor  ; 
the  survey  in  such  case,  where  the  claims  to  be  segre- 
gated are  vein  or  lode  claims,  must  be  executed  in  such 
manner  as  will  conform  to  the  requirements  in  section 
2320,  U.  S.  Revised  Statutes,  as  to  length  and  width  and 
parallel  end  lines. 

115.  Such  survey  when  executed  must  be  properly 
sworn  to  by  the  surveyor,  either  before  a  notary  public, 
officer  of  a  court  of  record,  or  before  the  register  or  re- 
ceiver, the  deponent's  character  and  credibility  to  be 
properly  certified  to  by  the  ofiicer  administering  the 
oath. 

116.  Upon  the  filing  of  the  plat  and  field  notes  of 
such  survey,  duly  sworn  to  as  aforesaid,  you  will  trans- 
rait  the  same  to  the  surveyor-general  for  his  verification 
and  approval;  who,  if  he  finds  the  work  correctly  per- 
formed, will  properly  mark  out  the  same  upon  the  orig- 
inal township  plat  in  his  oflfice,  and  furnish  authenticated 
copies  of  such  plat  and  description  both  to  the  proper 
local  land  oflSce  and  to  this  office,  to  be  afiixed  to  the 
duplicate  and  triplicate  township  plats  respectively. 

117.  With  the  copy  of  plat  and  description  furnished 
the  local  office  and  this  office,  must  be  a  diagram  tracing, 
verified  by  the  surveyor-general,  showing  the  claim  or 
claims  segregated,  and  designating  the  separate  frac- 
tional agricultural  tracts  in  each  40-acre  legal  subdivision 
by  the  proper  lot  number,  beginning  with  No.  1  in  each 
section,  and  giving  the  area  in  each  lot,  the  same  as  pro- 


lav 
I 


ALABKA. 


171 


vided  in  paragraph  45,  in  the  survey  of  mining  claims 
on  surveyed  lands. 

118  The  fact  that  a  certain  tract  of  land  is  decided 
upon  testimony  to  be  mineral  in  character  is  by  no 
means  equivalent  to  an  award  of  the  land  to  a  miner.  A 
miner  is  compelled  by  law  to  give  sixty  days'  publication 
of  notice,  and  posting  of  diagrams  and  notices,  as  a  pre- 
liminary step;  and  then,  before  he  can  enter  the  land,  he 
must  show  that  the  land  yields  mmeral;  that  he  is  en- 
titled to  the  pos.sessory  right  thereto  in  virtue  of  com- 
pliance wi*^>i  local  customs  or  rules  of  miners,  or  by  vir- 
tue of  the  statute  ot  limitations;  that  he  or  his  grantors 
have  expended,  in  actual  labor  and  improvements,  an 
amount  of  not  less  than  five  hundred  dollars  thereon, 
and  that  the  claim  is  one  in  regard  to  which  there  is  no 
controversy,  or  opposing  claim.  After  all  these  proofs 
are  met,  he  is  entitlea  to  have  a  survey  made  at  his  own 
cost  where  a  survey  is  required,  after  which  he  can  enter 
and  pay  for  the  land  embraced  by  his  claim. 

119.  Blank  forms  for  proofs  in  mineral  cases  are  not 
furnished  by  the  General  Land  Office. 

Thomas  H.  Carter, 

Commissioner. 
Approved  December  10,  1891. 


m 
lir 

lii:::-' 


iHllli;; 


11 


John  W.  Noble, 


Secretary. 


dredge-boat  mining. 


Several  movements  have  been  inaugurated  with  the 
view  to  extracting  minerals  from  the  beds  of  rivers  or 
river  bars  in  Alaska,  but  the  consent  of  the  Government 
has  in  no  instance  been  given,  and  the  mineral  laws  of 
the  United  States  do  not  warrant  the  t^iployment  of  the 
methods  proposed.  Upon  this  subject  Honorable  Binger 
Hermann,  Commissioner  of  the  General  Land  Office,  in 
a  communication  dated  January  3,  i^>j8,  and  addressed 
to  The  Honorable,  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior,  said: 


'    'ill 


!i!1' 


i 

Hi"- 


Ww 


VIV    ti 


!M 


172 


ALASKA. 


"  I  have  the  honor  to  acknowledge  the  receipt  of  a 
letter  relative  to  the  right  to  extract  mineral  from  the 
beds  of  rivers  or  from  river  bars,  in  Alaska. 

"  Mr. states,  in  substance,  that  he  is  interested 

in  a  company  which  has  made  investments  with  a  view 
to  operating  vessels  on  those  rivers  of  Alaska  where  gold 
is  presumably  to  be  found ;  that  the  company  contem- 
plates the  use  of  pumps  or  other  methods  suitable  to  the 
extraction  of  the  m^'tal  from  the  beds  of  streams  or  bars 
therein,  and  asks  if  such  operations  would  be  legal. 

"It  is  to  be  reminded  that,  as  no  specific  case  is  now 
before  me  for  decision,  anything  that  may  be  here  said 
upon  the  subject  can  amount  only  to  an  expression  of 
opinion. 

"  The  operations  of  the  mineral  land  laws,  section 
2318  ei  seg.,  U.  S.  Revised  Statutes,  and  acts  supple- 
mental thereto  or  amendatory  thereto,  were  extended  to 
Alaska  by  the  act  of  May  17,  1884  (23  Stats.  24). 

"It  is  contemplated  by  the  law  that  persons  desirous 
of  taking  minerals  from  the  public  domain  shall  locate 
a  claim,  the  boundaries  of  which  must  be  plainly  marked 
upon  the  ground.  The  claim,  as  the  term  is  used  in  the 
statutes,  is  something  tangible,  a  particular  portion  of 
the  earth's  surface  susceptible  of  identification,  and,  in 
my  opinion,  there  is  no  legal  warrant  for  the  extraction 
of  mineral  from  the  public  domain  except  the  mining  be 
done  within  the  limits  of  such  a  claim  as  contemplated 
by  law,  the  possessory  title  to  which  may  ripen  into  a 
complete  !  legal  title  by  the  issuance  of  a  United  States 
patent. 

"  Further,  the  question  might  arise  whether  or  not 

such  operations  as  are  described  by  Mr. would 

not  render  the  company  or  its  members  liable  to  the 
penalty  prescribed  by  section  10  of  chapter  907  (p.  802) 
U.  S  Supplemental  Revised  Statutes,  and  attention  is  re- 
spectfully directed  to  said  section  and  to  section  6  of  said 
chapter  (p.  801)." 


ALASKA. 


173 


Dbpartment  of  the  Interior, 

General  I,and  Office, 
Washington,  D.  C,  October  12,  1892. 
Registers  and  Receivers,  United  States  Land  Offices : 

Gentlemen  :  Attached  is  a  copy  of  the  act  of  Con- 
gress of  August  4,  1892,  entitled,  "An  act  to  authorize 
the  entry  of  lands  chiefly  valuable  for  building-stone  un- 
der the  placer  mining  laws." 

The  first  section  of  said  act  extends  the  mineral  land 
laws  already  existing  so  as  to  bring  land  chiefly  valua- 
ble for  building-stone  within  the  provisions  of  said  law 
to  the  extent  of  authorizing  a  placer  entry  of  such  land. 
The  proviso  to  said  first  section  excludes  lands  reserved 
for  the  benefit  of  the  public  schools  or  donated  to  any 
State  from  entry  under  the  act. 

In  cases  that  may  arise  hereafter  in  reference  to  any 
lands  subject  to  entry  under  the  mining  laws,  you  will 
be  governed  by  said  act  in  admitting  such  entries.  The 
proper  instructions'for  your  guidance  in  so  doing  may  be 
found  in  official  circular  of  December  10  1891,  entitled 
"United  States  Mining  Laws  and  Regulations  There- 
under," to  which  you  are  referred,  and  your  special  at- 
tention is  called  to  the  law  and  instructions  therein  re- 
lating to  placer  claims. 

It  is  not  the  understanding  of  this  office  that  the  first 
section  of  said  act  of  August  4,  1892,  withdraws  land 
chiefly  valuable  for  building-stone  from  entry  under  any 
existing  law  applicable  thereto. 

The  second  section  of  said  act  of  August  4,  1892, 
makes  the  timber  and  stone  act  of  June  3,  1878  (20  Stat., 
89),  applicable  to  all  the  public-land  States.  You  will 
observe  the  same  in  acting  upon  applications  for  entries 
in  your  respective  districts.  For  instructions  you  are 
referred  to  the  general  circular  of  February  6,  1892, 
pages  35  to  38  inclusive. 

In  allowing  placer  entries  for  stone  chiefly  valuable 
for  building  purposes,  under  the  first  section  of  the  act 


IP 


iii 


i 


Sir' 


11 


174 


ALASKA. 


of  August  4,  1892,  you  will  make  a  reference  to  said  act 
on  the  entry  papers  returned. 

Very  Respectfully, 

W.  M.  Stone, 


Acting  Commissioner, 


Approved  October  12,  1892. 
Geo.  Ch/ndler, 
Acting  Secretary. 


AN  ACT  to  authorize  the  entry  of  lands  chiefly  valuable  for 
building  stone  under  the  placer  mining  laws. 

Be  it  enacted  by  the  Senate  and  House  of  Representa- 
iiv's  at  the  United  States  of  America  in  Congress  as- 
sembled, That  any  person  authorized  to  enter  lands  un- 
der the  mining  laws  of  the  United  States  may  enter 
lands  that  are  chiefly  valuable  for  building  stone  under 
the  provisions  of  the  law  in  relation  to  placer  mineral 
claims:  Provided,  That  lands  reserved  for  the  benefit  of 
the  public  schools  or  donated  to  any  State  shall  not  be 
subject  to  entry  under  this  act. 

Sec.  2.  That  an  act  entitled  "An  act  for  the  sale  of 
timber  lands  in  the  States  of  California,  Oregon,  Nevada 
and  Washington  Territory,"  approved  June  third,  eight- 
een hundred  and  seventy  eight,  be,  and  the  same  is  here- 
by, amended  by  striking  out  out  the  words  '"  States  of 
California,  Oregon,  Nevada  and  Washington  Territory" 
where  the  same  occur  in  the  second  and  third  lines  of 
said  act,  and  insert  in  lieu  thereof  the  words,  "  public- 
land  States,"  the  purpose  of  this  act  being  to  make  said 
act  of  June  third,  eighteen  hundred  and  seventy-eight, 
applicable  to  all  the  public  land  Siates. 

Sec.  3.  That  nothing  in  this  act  shall  be  construed 
to  repeal  section  twenty-four  of  »he  act  entitled  "An  act 
to  repeal  timber-culture  laws,  and  for  other  purposes," 


I 

1 


ALA8KA. 


176 


approved  March  third,  eighteen  hundred  and  ninety- 
one. 

Approved  August  4,  1892. 


A. 


Department  of  the  Interior, 

General  Land  Office, 


Washington,  D.  C,  October  24,  1892. 

Registers  and  Receivers,  United  States  Land  Offices: 

Gentlemen  :  In  addition  to  instructions  contained 
in  general  circular  of  February  6,  1892,  pages  35  to  38, 
inclusive,  and  pages  147  and  148,  in  relation  to  the  tim- 
ber and  stone  act  of  June  3,  1878,  extended  by  the  act 
of  August  4,  1892,  referred  to  in  circular  A  of  October 
12,  1892,  you  are  advised  as  follows: 

1.  That  entries  made  under  section  one  of  said  act 
are  required  to  be  kept  and  reported  in  consectitive  and 
numerical  order  in  your  mineral  land  series. 

2.  That  entries  made  under  section  two  of  said  act 
are  required  to  be  kept  and  reported  in  consecutive 
numerical  order  in  your  regular  agricultural  cash  series. 

Necessary  additional  blank  forms  for  entries  under 
said  act  are  as  follows : 

Form  Nos.  4—357;  4—363;  4—370;  4—371;  4—537; 
-658  c. 

Very  respectfully, 

W.  M.  Stone, 

Acting  Commissioner. 


'I" 


w- 

&: 


■fi-'' 

m 

'!■ 

'ri'% 

.':■ 

'0% 

fc'; 

^l* 

ffi. 

.V;r:' 

ii 

".fji.^-rt 

!W:'.i 

ffiii:: 

'"!?■    - 

1. 


.1' 


,^;l    ': 


176 


ALASKA. 


i^ 


APPENDIX  B. 


i:,..;ii 


V    I' 


DIGEST  OF  CANADIAN  MINING  IvAWS. 


The  regulations  governing  placer  mining  along  the 
Yukon  River  and  its  tributaries  in  the  Northwest  Terri- 
tory, adopted  by  the  Canadian  Government,  are  as  fol- 
lows: 

DEFINITIONS. 

Bar  Diggings  shall  mean  any  part  of  a  river  over 
which  the  water  extends  when  the  water  is  in  its  flooded 
state,  and  which  is  not  covered  at  low  water. 

Mines  on  Benches  shall  be  known  as  bench  diggings, 
and  shall,  for  the  purpose  of  defining  the  size  of  such 
claims,  be  excepted  from  dry  diggings. 

Dry  Diggings  shall  mean  any  mine  over  which  a 
river  never  extends. 

Miner  shall  mean  a  male  or  female  over  the  age  of 
1 8,  but  not  under  that  age. 

Claims  shall  mean  the  personal  right  of  property  in  a 
placer  mine  or  diggings  during  the  time  for  which  the 
grant  of  such  mine  or  diggings  is  made. 

Legal  Post  shall  mean  a  stake  standing  not  less  than 
four  feet  above  the  ground  and  squared  on  four  sides  for 
at  least  one  foot  from  the  top.  Both  sides  so  squared 
shall  measure  at  least  four  inches  across  the  face.  It 
shall  also  mean  any  stump  or  tree  cut  oflF  and  squared  or 
faced  to  the  above  height  and  size. 

Close  Season  shall  m-^an  the  period  of  the  year  during 
which  placer  mining  is  generally  suspended.  The  period 
to  be  fixed  by  the  gold  commissioner  in  whose  district 
the  claim  is  situated. 

Locality  shall  mean  the  territory  along  a  river  (tribu- 
tary of  the  Yukon)  and  its  affluents. 


1 


ALASKA. 


177 


Mineral  shall  include  all  minerals  whatsoever  ottier 
than  coal. 

NATURE  AND  SIZE  OF  CI^AIMS. 

T.  Bar  Diggings. — A  strip  of  land  loo  feet  wide  at 
high-water  mark  and  thence  extending  along  into  the 
river  to  its  lowest  water-level. 

2.  The  sides  of  a  claim  for  bar-diggings  shall  be  two 
parallel  lines  run  as  nearly  as  possible  at  right  angles  to 
the  stream,  and  shall  be  marked  by  four  legal  posts,  one 
at  each  end  of  the  claim,  at  or  about  high-water  mark; 
also  one  at  each  end  of  the  claim  at  or  about  the  edge  of 
the  water.  One  of  the  posts  at  high  water  mark  shall  be 
legibly  marked  with  the  name  of  the  miner  and  the  date 
upon  which  the  claim  is  staked. 

3.  Dry  diggings  shall  be  100  feet  square,  and  shall 
have  placed  at  each  of  its  four  corners  a  legal  post,  upon 
one  of  which  shall  be  legibly  marked  the  name  of  the 
miner  and  the  date  upon  which  the  claim  was  staked. 

4.  Creek  and  river  claims  shall  be  500  feet  long, 
measured  in  direction  of  the  general  course  of  the 
stream,  and  shall  extend  in  width  from  base  to  base  of 
the  hill  or  bench  on  each  side,  but  when  the  hill  or 
benches  are  less  than  100  feet  apart,  the  claim  may  be 
100  feet  in  depth.  The  sides  of  a  claim  shall  be  two 
parallel  lines  run  as  nearly  as  possible  at  right  angles  to 
the  stream.  The  sides  shall  be  marked  with  legal  posts 
at  or  about  the  edge  of  the  water  and  at  the  rear  bound- 
aries of  the  claim.  One  of  the  legal  posts  at  the  stream 
shall  be  legibly  marked  with  the  name  of  the  miner  and 
the  date  upon  which  the  claim  was  staked. 

5.  Bench  claims  shall  be  100  feet  square. 

6.  In  defining  the  size  of  claims,  they  shall  be  meas- 
ured horizontally,  irrespective  of  inequalities  on  the  sur- 
face of  the  ground. 


NoTB. — The  regulation  relating  to  the  length  of  a  claim  was 
amended  August  8th  by  the  Dominion  Government;  the  new 
regulation  limits  the  length  of  a  claim  to  100  feet,  running  along 
the  stream. 


11- 


tJ 


mt 


i 


I  \ 


'!    f 


f  i    / 


I' 


1 


178 


ALASKA. 


7.  If  any  person  or  persons  shall  discover  a  new 
mine,  and  such  discovery  shall  be  established  to  the  sat- 
isfaction of  the  gold  commissioner,  a  claim  for  the  bar 
diggings  750  feet  in  length  may  be  granted. 

A  new  stratum  of  auriferous  earth  or  gravel  situate  ' 
in  a  locality  where  the  claims  are  abandoned  shall,  fr 
this  purpose,  be  deemed  a  new  mine,  although  the  sanxi 
locality  shall  have  previously  been  worked  at  a  different 
level. 

8.  The  forms  of  application  for  a  grant  for  placer 
mining  and  the  grant  of  the  same  shall  be  those  con- 
tained ill  forms  "H"  and  "I"  in  the  schedule  hereto. 

9.  A  claim  shall  be  recorded  with  the  gold  commis- 
sioner in  whose  district  it  is  situated  within  three  days 
after  the  location  thereof,  if  it  is  located  within  ten  miles 
of  the  commissioner's  office.  One  extra  day  shall  be  al- 
lowed for  making  such  record  for  every  additional  ten 
miles  and  fraction  thereof 

ID.  In  the  event  of  the  absence  of  the  gold  commis- 
sioner from  his  office,  entry  for  a  claim  may  be  granted 
by  any  person  whom  he  may  appoint  to  perform  his  du- 
ties in  his  absence. 

11.  Entry  shall  not  be  granted  for  a  claim  which  has 
not  been  staked  by  the  applicant  in  person,  in  the  man- 
ner specified  in  these  regulations.  An  affidavit  that  the 
claim  was  staked  out  by  the  applicant  shall  be  embodied 
in  form  "H"  of  the  schedule  hereto. 

12.  An  entry  fee  of  $15  shall  be  charged  the  first 
year  and  an  annual  fee  olF  $100  for  each  of  the  follow- 
ing years.  This  provision  shall  apply  to  the  locations 
for  which  entries  have  already  been  granted. 

13.  After  the  recording  of  a  claim,  the  removal  of 
any  post  by  the  holder  thereof,  or  any  person  acting  in 
his  behalf,  for  the  purpose  of  changing  the  boundaries 
of  his  claim,  shall  act  as  a  forfeiture  of  the  claim. 

14.  The  entry  of  every  holder  for  a  grant  for  placer 
mining  must  be  renewed  and  his  receipt  relinquished 
and  replaced  every  year,  the  entry  fee  being  paid  each 
year. 

15.  No  miner  shall  receive  a  grant  for  more  than  one 


ALASKA. 


179 


mining  claim  in  the  same  locality;  but  the  same  miner 
may  hold  any  number  of  claims  by  purchase,  and  any 
number  of  miners  may  unite  to  work  their  claims  in 
common  upon  such  terms  as  they  may  arrange,  provided 
such  agreement  be  registered  with  the  gold  commis- 
sioner and  a  fee  of  $5  paid  for  each  registration. 

16.  Any  miner  or  miners  may  sdl,  mortgage  or  dis- 
pose of  his  or  their  claims,  provided  such  disposal  be 
registered  with,  and  a  fee  of  $2  paid  to  the  gold  commis- 
sioner, who  shall  thereupon  give  the  assignee  a  certifi- 
cate in  form  "J"  in  the  schedule  hereto. 

17.  Every  miner  shall,  during  the  continuance  of  his 
grant,  have  the  exclusive  right  of  entry  upon  his  own 
claim  for  the  miner-like  working  thereof,  and  the  con- 
struction of  a  residence  thereon,  and  shall  be  entitled  ex- 
clusively to  all  the  proceeds  realized  therefrom;  but  he 
shall  have  no  surface  rights  therein,  and  the  gold  com- 
missioner may  grant  to  the  holders  of  adjacent  claims 
such  rights  of  entry  thereon  as  may  be  absolutely  neces- 
sary for  the  working  of  their  claims,  upon  such  terms  as 
may  to  him  seem  reasonable  He  may  also  grant  per- 
mits to  miners  to  cut  timber  thereon  for  their  own  use 
upon  payment  of  the  dues  prescribed  by  the  regulations 
in  that  behalf. 

18.  Every  miner  shall  be  entitled  to  the  use  of  so 
much  of  the  water  naturally  flowing  through  or  past  his 
claim,  and  not  already  lawfully  appropriated,  as  shall  in 
the  opinion  of  the  gold  commissioner  be  necessary  for 
the  due  working  thereof,  and  shall  be  entitled  to  drain 
his  own  claim  free  of  charge. 

19.  A  claim  shall  be  deemed  to  be  abandoned  and 
open  to  occupation  and  entry  by  any  person  when  the 
same  shall  have  remained  unworked  on  working  days  by 
the  grantee  thereof,  or  by  some  person  on  his  behalf,  for 
the  space  of  seventy-two  hours,  unless  sickness  or  other 
reasonable  cause  may  be  shown  to  the  satisfaction  of  the 
gold  commissioner,  or  unless  the  grantee  is  absent  on 
leave  given  by  the  commissioner,  and  the  gold  commis- 
sioner, upon  obtaining  evidence  satisfactory  to  himself 


mm 


m 


I 


11 

f\ 

i 

'M 

1 

"Si 

!!;:■:■ 

iiili  ii" 

''ja 

i  li- 

I 


!:ii-r 


H/Im: 


i: 


180 


ALAiSli:^. 


that  this  provision  is  not  being  complied  with,  may 
cancel  the  entry  given  for  a  claim. 

20.  If  the  land  upon  which  a  claim  has  been  located 
is  not  the  property  of  the  crown,  it  will  be  necessary  for 
the  person  who  applies  for  entry  to  furnish  proof  that 
he  has  acquired  from  the  owner  of  the  land  the  surface 
right  before  entry  can  be  granted. 

21.  If  the  occupier  of  the  lands  has  not  received  a 
patent  therefor,  the  purchase  money  of  the  surface  rights 
must  be  paid  to  the  crown,  and  a  patent  of  the  surface 
rights  will  issue  to  the  party  who  acquired  the  mining 
rights.  The  money  so  collected  will  either  be  refunded 
to  the  occupier  of  the  land  when  he  is  entitled  to  a  pat- 
ent therefor,  or  will  be  credited  to  him  on  account  of 
payment  for  land. 

22.  When  the  party  obtaining  the  mining  rights  can 
not  make  an  arrangement  with  the  owner  thereof  for  the 
acquisition  of  the  surface  rights,  it  shall  be  lawful  for 
him  to  give  notice  to  the  owner,  or  his  agent,  or  the  oc- 
cupier to  appoint  an  arbitrator  to  act  with  another  arbi- 
trator named  by  him,  in  order  to  award  the  amount  of 
compensation  to  which  the  owner  or  occupant  shall  be 
entitled.  The  notice  mentioned  in  this  section  shall  be 
according  to  form,  to  be  obtained  upon  application  from 
the  gold  commissioner  for  the  district  in  which  the  lands 
in  question  lie,  and  shall,  when  practicable,  be  personally 
served  on  such  owner  or  his  agent,  if  known,  or  occu- 
pant, and  after  reasonable  efforts  have  been  made  to  ef- 
fect personal  service  without  success,  then  such  notice 
shall  be  served  upon  the  owner  or  agent  within  a  period 
to  be  fixed  by  the  gold  commissioner  before  the  expira- 
tion of  the  time  limited  in  such  notice.  If  the  proprie- 
tor refuses  or  declines  to  appoint  an  arbitrator,  or  when, 
for  any  other  reason,  no  arbitrator  is  appointed  by  the 
proprietor  in  the  time  limited  therefor  in  the  notice  pro- 
vided by  this  section,  the  gold  commissioner  for  the  dis- 
trict in  which  the  lands  in  question  lie  shall,  on  being  sat- 
isfied by  affidavit  that  such  notice  has  come  to  the  knowl- 
edge of  such  owner,  agent,  or  occupant,  or  that  such 
owner,  agent,  or  occupant,  wilfully  evades  the  service 


■1' 


ALASKA. 


181 


a 


of  such  notice,  or  cannot  be  found,  and  that  reasonable 
efforts  have  been  made  to  effect  such  service,  and  that  the 
notice  was  left  at  the  last  place  of  abode  of  such  owner, 
agent  or  occupant,  appoint  an  arbitrator  on  his  behalf. 

23.  (a)  All  arbitrators  appointed  under  the  authority 
of  these  regulations  shall  be  sworn  before  a  justice  of 
the  peace  to  the  impartial  discharge  of  the  duties  as- 
signed to  them,  and  they  shall  forthwith  proceed  to  esti- 
mate the  reasonable  damages  which  the  owner  or  occu- 
pant of  such  lands,  according  to  their  several  interests 
therein,  shall  sustain  by  reason  of  such  prospecting  and 
mining  operations. 

(6)  In  estimating  such  damages  the  arbitrators  shall 
determine  the  value  of  the  land,  irrespectively  of  any 
enhancement  thereof  from  the  existence  of  mineral 
therein. 

(c)  In  case  such  arbitrators  cannot  agree,  they  may 
select  a  third  arbitrator,  and  when  the  two  arbitrators 
cannot  agree  upon  a  third  arbitrator,  the  gold  commis- 
sioner for  the  district  in  which  the  lands  in  question  lie 
shall  select  such  third  arbitrator. 

(d)  The  award  of  any  two  such  arbitrators  made  in 
writing  shall  be  final,  and  shall  be  filed  with  the  gold 
commissioner  for  the  district  in  which  the  lands  lie. 

If  any  cases  arise  for  which  no  provision  is  made  in 
these  regulations,  the  provisions  of  the  regulations  gov- 
erning the  disposal  of  mineral  lands  other  than  coal  lands 
approved  by  his  excellency  the  governor  in  council  on 
on  the  9th  of  November,  1889,  shall  apply. 


APPLICATION   FOR  GRANT  FOR    PLACER    MINING    CLAIM 
AND  AFFIDAVIT  OF  APPLICANT. 


ii:: 

m 


M 


tea 

m 


jl 


Is!" 


Form  "H." 

I  (or  we),  of ,  hereby  apply  under  the 

Dominion  Mining  Regulations  for  grant  of  a  claim  for 
placer  mining  as  defined  in  the  said  regulations  in 


*3,r, 

ii 


1*1 


I. 


182  ALASKA. 

(here  describe  locality),  and  I  (or  we)  solemnly 

swear: 

J^irsi.  That  I  (or  we)  am  (or  are)  to  the  best  of  ray 
(or  our)  knowledge  and  belief,  the  first  discoverer  (or 
discoverers)  of  the  said  deposit,  or 

Second.  That  the  said  claim  was  previously  granted 
to (here  name  the  last  grantee),  but  has  re- 
mained unworked  by  the  said  grantee  for  not  less  than 


Third.  That  I  (or  we)  am  (or  are)  unaware  that  the 
land  is  other  than  vacant  Dominion  lands. 

Fourth.    That  I  (or  we)  did  on  the day  of 

mark  out  on  the  ground  in  accordance  in 

every  particular  with  the  provisions  of  the  mining  regu- 
lations for  the  Yukon  River  and  its  tributaries,  the  claim 
for  which  I  (or  we)  make  this  application,  and  that  in  so 
doing  I  (or  we)  did  not  encroach  on  any  other  claim  or 
mining  location  previously  laid  out  by  any  other 
person. 

Fifth.    That  the  said  claim  contains,  as  nearly  as  I 

(or  we)  could  measure  or  estimate,  an  area  of 

square  feet,  and  that  the  description  (and  sketch,  if  any) 
of  this  date  hereto  attached  signed  by  me  (or  us)  sets 
(or  set)  forth  in  detail  to  the  best  of  my  (or  our)  knowl- 
edge and  ability  its  position,  form  and  dimensions. 

Sixth.  That  I  (or  we)  make  this  application  in  good 
faith  to  acquire  the  claim  for  the  sole  purpose  of  mining, 
prosecuted  by  myself  (or  us),  or  by  myselt  and  associates, 
or  by  my  (or  our)  assigns. 


Sworn  before  me 


At.... 
i8 


. ,  this 


day  of 


(Signature) 


I 


ALASKA. 


183 


the 


GRANT   FOR   PLACER   CLAIM. 

Form  "  I." 

Department  of  the  Interior, 
Agency ,  i8 . . . . 

In  consideration  of  the  payment  of  the  fee  prescribed 
by  clause  12  of  the  mining  regulations  of  the  Yukon 
River  and  its  tributaries  by (A.  B.)  accom- 
panying his  (or  their)  application  No ,  dated 

,  18 for  a  mining  claim  in     

(here  insert  description  of  locality),  the  minister  of  the 

it'erior  hereby  grants  to  the  said   (A.  B.) 

for  the  terra  of  one  year  from  the  date  hereof  the  exclu- 
sive right  of  entry  upon  the  claim  (here  describe  in  de- 
tail the  claim). 

Granted. — For  the  miner-like  working  thereof  and 
the  construction  of  a  residence  thereon,  and  the  exclu- 
sive right  to  all  the  proceeds  derived  therefrom.     That 

the  said (A.  B.)  shall  be  entitled  to  the  use 

of  so  much  water  naturally  flowing  through  or  past  his 
(or  their)  claim,  and  not  already  lawfully  appropriated, 
as  shall  be  necessary  for  the  due  working  thereof,  and  to 
drain  his  (or  their)  claim  free  of  charge. 

This  grant  does  not  convey  to  the  said 

(A.  B.)  any  surface  right  in  the  said  claim  or  any  right  of 
ownership  in  the  soil  covered  by  the  said  claim,  and  the 
said  grant  shall  lapse  and  be  forfeited  unless  the  claim  is 
continuously  and  in  good  faith  worked  by  the  said 
....    (A.  B.)  or  his  (or  their)  associates. 

The  rights  hereby  granted  are  those  laid  down  in  the 
aforesaid  mining  regulations  and  no  more,  and  are  sub- 
ject to  all  the  provisions  of  the  said  regulations,  whether 
the  same  are  expressed  herein  or  not. 


Gold  Commissioner. 
("  Klondike,"--Chicago  Record.) 


[11!  ,;ft 


■•i!:i;-' 

111 


pH!:,;: 
lis-i-,;- 

liir: 

m 

\m.-,.: 

Si 

II 

Pi' 


Mr;. 


3!i!^: 


m 


184 


ALASKA. 


APPENDIX  C. 


5    f 


GLOSSARY  OF  MINING  TERMS  MOST 
FREQUENTIvY  USED. 


ir 


lit- 


n 


Amalgam :  In  some  ore  the  gold  is  so  fine  and  scarce 
that  it  must  be  dissolved  in  mercury  in  order  to 
save  it ;  such  mixture  of  mercury  (quicksilver)  and 
gold  is  called  amalgam. 

Burn :  To  burn  a  lay  is  to  thaw  out  a  hole  in  the 
ground  by  building  a  fire  over  it. 

Claim :  The  territory  one  man  is  allowed  by  law  or  lo- 
cal, common  consent  to  stake  out  for  himself.  The 
size  differs  and  is  fixed  by  agreement  among  the 
miners  in  any  particular  locality.  It  is  a  section  of 
a  creek  of  a  certain  length — sometimes  zcK'  feet,  ex- 
tending from  rim  to  rim  in  width.  The  reason  of 
this  variableness  in  the  size  of  claims  on  dif- 
ferent creeks  is  that  on  some  greater  length  is 
required  to  make  it  worth  a  man's  while  to  work 
them.  The  pay  deposits  may  be  scattered  so  that  a 
man  could  make  wages  only  by  working  here  and 
there  over  a  large  territory.  Of  course,  the  con- 
ditions surrounding  the  first  discovery  on  a  creek 
are  the  basis  for  fixing  the  size  of  a  claim  on 
that  stream.  The  discoverer  of  a  new  field  is 
allowed  two  claims,  while  others  are  permitted 
to  take  but  one  at  a  time.  However,  when  a  lo- 
cator has  worked  out  his  assessment  of  a  few  days' 
work,  he  is  at  liberty  to  take  another.  When  a  suf- 
ficient cumber  of  men  arrive  on  a  new  creek  to 
make  it  impracticable  to  work  together  in  harmony, 
it  is  customary  to  hold  a  meeting  and  elect  one 


I  i 


SOUTllKRN  WAT15R  FRONT,  JUNEAU. 


m 


s  ■ 


.mmm 


^i"^ 


:  ^  '  SI 


mi 


x; 

I—) 

P 
Q 

< 

>< 
» 


O 

o 
in 

J 

a 
o 


I    " 


ALASKA. 


185 


w 

I— I 

>> 

Q 

•/; 


J 
1— « 

X 
u 

-3 
>■ 

Ui 

5 


of  their  number  as  register  or  clerk,  and  thereafter 
a  record  is  made  of  all  locations  and  all  transfers,  for 
which  a  small  fee  is  usually  charged. 

Color :  When  "  dirt "  is  very  carefully  washed  and  the 
result  at  the  bottom  of  the  pan  is  the  merest  speck 
of  the  metal  it  is  said  to  show  "  color." 

Cradle :     See  "  Rocker." 

Dirt:  Earth  in  which  valuable  minerals,  especially 
gold,  is  expected. 

Discovery :  The  point  where  gold  is  first  found  in  any 
territory  is  called  "  Discovery  Claim,"  and  the  other 
claims  are  numbered  i,  2,  3,  etc.,  in  both  directions 
from  discovery  claim. 

Drift:  A  horizontal  opening  in  the  side  of  a  hill,  creek 
bank,  or  leading  from  a  shaft. 

Dust :  Gold  in  the  form  it  is  taken  from  placer  mines. 
Particles  about  the  size  of  a  pea  and  larger  are 
called  nuggets. 

Float :  Pieces  of  rock,  quartz  or  ore  detached  from  the 
main  vein,  ledge,  lode  or  deposit  of  like  material. 

Fool's  Gold:  Iron  pyrites;  so  named  from  its  resem- 
blance to  the  precious  metal — pyrites  will  crush 
under  the  hammer,  while  gold  flattens. 

Grindstone :  Three  poles,  each  about  8  feet  in  length, 
used  to  support  a  stove  on  the  snow. 

Grub  Stake :  It  frequently  happens  that  a  person  de- 
sirous of  sharing  the  wealth  of  an  unexplored 
country  is  not  in  a  position  to  visit  it  in  person  and 
elects  to  buy  an  outfit  of  tools,  clothing  and  food  for 
some  prospector,  whom  he  sends  into  the  country 
with  the  understanding  that  they  become  equal  part- 
ners.    Such  a  transaction  is  called  grub-staking. 


t 


m 


ijli!!" 

i: 

i 


lUlilillUlU 


186 


ALABKA. 


\\V    i 


Hungry  Ore:  Worthless  rock  which  from  its  appear- 
ance leads  to  the  belief  that  it  contains  gold  or  other 
valuable  mineral. 

I,ay :     The  privilege  of  working  another  man's  claim. 

Pan :  A  gold  digger's  pan  resembles  an  ordinary  frying 
pan  without  the  handle.  It  is  usually  about  a  foot 
in  diameter  at  the  bottom,  with  flaring  sides  four  or 
five  inches  deep.  It  is  made  of  any  suitable  ma- 
terial, profusely  pressed  steel  or  copper. 

Pay  Dirt:  If  a  pan  of  dirt  will  yield  lo  cents  worth  of 
gold  it  is  called  pay  dirt.  If  it  yields  15  cents  worth 
it  is  promising  dirt,  and  20  cents  makes  it  rich.  It 
is  said  that  some  pans  in  the  Klondike  run  as  high 
as  $1,000,  and  many  claims  are  saidto  average  from 
$75  to  $200  to  the  pan. 

Placer  Gold  Mines :  Mines  where  the  gold  is  found  in 
the  pure  state  in  the  form  of  nuggets  or  grains,  and 
can  be  separated  by  the  simple  process  of  washing 
in  water.  The  Supreme  Court  of  the  United  States 
has  defined  a  placer  claim  in  the  following  language : 
"Ground  within  defined  boundaries  which  contains 
mineral  in  its  earth,  sand  or  gravel ;  ground  that  in- 
cludes valuable  deposits  in  any  place,  that  is  not 
fixed  in  rock,  but  which  are  in  a  loose  state  and  may 
in  most  cases  be  collected  by  washing  or  amalgama- 
tion without  milling." 

Prospector:  From  a  mining  standpoint  is  one  who 
makes  a  business  of  searching  for  deposits  of 
precious  metals  or  other  minerals  of  recognized 
value. 

Quartz  Gold  Mines :  Mines  where  the  gold  is  embedded 
or  fixed  in  quartz  rock,  which  requires  heavy  ma- 
chinery to  crush  before  the  metal  can  be  extracted. 

Riffle :     See  "  Sluice  box." 


ALASKA. 


187 


Rocker  or  Cradle :  A  box  with  rockers,  something  after 
the  fashion  of  a  baby's  cradle,  in  which  the  pay 
gravel  is  placed  and  then  rocked  while  water  is  pour- 
ing through. 

Shaft :     A  vertical  hole  sunk  in  the  ground  like  a  well. 

Sluice  Box  or  Riffle :  A  long  narrow  trough  of  plank- 
ing with  slats  or  riffles  across  the  bottom.  The  box 
is  built  on  an  incline,  and  as  water  and  gravel  are 
washed  down  the  gold  is  caught  by  the  riffles ;  some- 
times mercury  is  used  in  connection  with  this  ap- 
pliance. 

Tailings:  The  gold-laden  sands,  etc.,  which  escape 
from  the  pan  or  other  washing  apparatus  in  placer 
mining.  There  are  Chinamen  and  others  still  mak- 
ing good  wages  working  tailings  of  the  early  Cali- 
fornia placer  mines. 

Tenderfoot :  A  person  unacquainted  with  the  ways  of 
frontier  life,  or  mining  camps ;  a  greenhorn. 

Whim  :  A  vein  or  lode  which  'does  not  meet  expecta- 
tions. 


WORDS   COMMONLY   USED    IN   AI^ASKA    AND 

FOR  WHICH  THERE  ARE  NO  ENGLISH 

EQUIVALENTS.— (PETROFF.) 

Barabara :  A  term  of  Siberian  origin  for  a  semi-subter- 
ranean hut  or  dwelling. 

Beluga :     The  white  grampus  or  white  whale. 

Bidar :  A  Kamchatkan  word ;  an  open  boat  with  a 
wooden  frame  and  covered  with  seal,  sea -lion  or 
walrus  skin. 

Biddrka :  A  skin  canoe  of  the  Aleutians,  covered  all 
over  with  the  exception  of  one,  two  or  three  circu- 
lar openings  to  accommodate  as  many  paddlers. 


H3£"j 
Si*- 


iiMtai^ 


188 


ALABKA. 


Kaiak :     Eskimo  skin-canoe. 

Kamleika :  A  Siberian  term,  water-proof  shirt  of  seal, 
whale  or  bear  gut. 

Parka :  A  Kamchatkan  word;  upper  garment  of  fur, 
with  small  head-opening  and  sleeves  varying  in 
length. 

Shamdn  :  A  Kamchatkan  term  for  sorcerer  or  medicine 
man,  used  by  many  tribes  who  once  were  subject  to 
Russian  influence. 

Toy6n :  Kamchatkan  term  for  chief,  introduced  by  Rus- 
sians. Tuyiik  and  Tookoo  with  Aleutians  and  other 
tribes. 

Tundra :  A  Siberian  term,  a  moor,  morass  or  swampy 
plain,  producing  a  dense  growth  of  mosses  and 
grasses  over  a  frozen  sub-soil  and  ice,  which  does 
not  thaw  to  a  greater  depth  than  eighteen  inches  be- 
low the  surface. 

Tiingak :  A  term  used  by  certain  Eskimo  tribes  for  a 
shaman  or  conjuror. 


APPENDIX  D. 


Governor  John  G.  Brady,  of  Alaska,  in  his  report  to 
the  Secretary  of  the  Interior  for  1897,  gives  the  follow- 
ing as  an  outfit  for  two  men  for  fourteen  months,  food 
and  clothing,  Sitka,  Alaska,  prices,  August  i,  1897. 

4  barrels  best  flour  at  $6 $24.00 

200  pounds  granulated  sugar,  at  6  cents 12.00 

200  pounds  navy  beans,  at  4  cents 8.00 

100  pounds  corn  meal 2.75 

250  pounds  breakfast  bacon,  at  121^  cents 31 -25 


ALASKA.  189 

75  pounds  island  rice,  6  cents $  4.50 

2  cases  Eagle  Milk i7-50 

20  pounds  salt .35 

25  pounds  best  Mocha  and  Java  coflFee 8.75 

10  pounds  best  tea 4.50 

8  pounds  soda .70 

20  pounds  baking  powder 9.20 

25  pounds  dried  apricots 2.50 

25  pounds  dried  peaches 2.50 

25  pounds  dried  apples 2.25 

2  boxes  candles 5.00 

1  box  pepper,  25  cents;  soap,  $1 1.25 

3  boxes  yeast,  25  cents,  one-half  tin  matches, 

50  cents -75 

I  Yukon  stove,  complete 6.00 

3  half-spring  shovels 3.00 

3  miner's  picks 3.00 

1  double-bladed  axe,  complete 1.50 

13  oil  sacks,  50's  and  loo's 7.55 

2  gold  pans,  $1  ;  i  coflFee  mill  35  cents 1.35 

12  pounds  condensed  onions 5.00 

ID  pounds  evaporated  spuds 2.50 

46  pounds  rope 5,00 

Toilet  soap .50 

6  tin  plates,  50  cents;  3  granite  cups,  50  cents  i.oo 

1  coflFee-pot,  40  cents ;  whetstone,  20  cents .60 

Awls,  shoe  thread,  wax,  bristles,  etc i.oo 

2  fry- pans,  $1;  fish  line  and  hooks,  50  cents, . .  1.50 

2  pkgs.  extract  of  beef 1.00 

6  assorted  files,  60 cents ;  oil  blacking,  50 cents  i.io 

1  package  chocolate 30 

2  miner's  candlesticks i  .00 

T  iron  brace  and  bits 1.75 

24  pounds  raisins,  10  cents 2.40 

Outfit  for  boat : 
30  pounds  nails,  $1.50;  5  pounds  white  lead,  60 

cents 2.10 

Candle  wicking,  20  cents  ;  ^-inch  auger,  $1.25. . .  1.45 

Oakum,  25  cents ;  pitch,  25  cents .50 

1  handsaw,  $1.50;  i  jack  plane,  75  cents 2.25 


ill; 


i 


If 


mm 


iliii--^' 


■i^j 


I  \  ■ 


If; 


u  si"   t 

III  I  i] 

fr  , 
I;.  I 


w 

lit. 

t  •  :■ 


l! 


m 


..  m 


190 


ALii/SfZl. 


Paint  brush,  25  cents ;  4  candle  wicks,  40  cents 

2  pairs  oars,  $1.75;  oarlocks,  40  cents 

3  pairs  heavy  wool  blankets 

2  pairs  pack  straps,  $3  ;  i  hand  ax,  $1    

2  pairs  hip  r.  boots,  leather  soles,  $6 

2  pairs  high-top  lace  shoes 

4  pairs  German  socks,  75  cents 

2  pairs  lumberman's  rubbers 

2  pairs  suspenders .      

4  suits  heavy  wool  underwear 

4  dark-blue  flannel  overshirts 

4  pairs  Mackinaw  pants 

2  pairs  Mackinaw  coats 

2  blanket  coats 

1 2  pairs  socks,  wool 

6  pairs  wool  mittens 

40  yards  mosquito  netting 

1 1  buckskin  pouches 

1  magnet,  50  cents ;  2  pairs  goggles,  50  cents 

2  pairs  snow  glasses 

I  dozen  bandana  handkerchiefs 

I  lot  spoons,  knives  and  forks 

I  butcher  knife 

4  oil  blankets .  — 

1  lot  buckets,  pans,  cooking  utensils,  etc 

2  southwesters,  $r;  tent,  $12 

I  41  Colt's  revolver  and  ammunition 

1  Winchester  rifle  and  ammunition   

2  fur  caps 

I  whipsaw 


% 


65 

2.15 
20.50 

4.00 
12.00 

7-50 
3.00 
3.00 

75 

12.00 

8.00 

11.00 

6.00 

8.00 

4-50 
3.00 
1. 00 
500 
1. 00 
1. 00 
r.oo 

1-35 

•75 
6.00 

3-35 

13.00 

15.00 

18.00 

2.50 

5-50 


Total $371.60 


ALASKA. 


191 


65 

2.15 
20.50 

4.00 
12.00 

7-50 
3.00 
3.00 

75 

12.00 

8.00 

11.00 

6.00 

8.00 

4-50 
3.00 

1. 00 

5.00 

1. 00 

1. 00 

1. 00 

1-35 

•75 

6.00 

3-35 
1300 

15.00 

18.00 

2.50 

5-50 


APPENDIX  E. 


TABLE  OF  DISTANCES. 


DISTANCES   FROM  JUNBAU. 


MII,ES. 

Haines  Mission  (Chilkat) 80 

Dyea icx) 

Head  of  canoe  navigation 106 

Summit  of  Chilkoot  Pass 114 

Head  of  Lake  Lindeman 1 23 

Foot  of  Lake  Lindeman 127 

Head  of  Lake  Bennett 128 

Foot  of  Lake  Bennett 153 

Caribou  Crossing 156 

Foot  of  Tagish  Lake 173 

Head  of  Lake  Marsh 178 

Foot  of  Lake  Marsh 197 

Head  of  Canyon 223 

Foot  of  Canyon 224 

Head  of  White  Horse  Rapids 225 

Tahkeena  River 240 

Head  of  Lake  Le  Barge 256 

Foot  of  Lake  Le  Barge 284 

Hootalinqua 316 

Cassiar  Bar 342 

Big  Salmon  River 349 

Little  Salmon  River  385 

Five  Fingers  Rapids 444 

Rink  Rapids 450 

Pelly  River 503 

White  River 599 

Stewart  River 609 


iift 


192  ALABKA. 

MILBS* 

Sixty-Mile  Post 629 

Klondike • 678 

Fort  Reliance 682 

Forty-Mile  Post 728 

Fort  Cudahy 728 

Circle  City 898 

Forty-Mile  to  Diggings 70 

Circle  City  to  Diggings  50 

Mouth  of  Cook  Inlet 700 

Turnagain  Arm 800 

Six-Mile  Creek 825 

Funter  Bay 47 

Berner  Bay 50 

Sitka 1 40 

Snettisham 32 

Sum  Dum 50 

Wrangell 160 


rs  >£ ' 


DISTANCES  VIA  VICTORIA,  BRITISH 
COLUMBIA. 


I:|:iyi: 


FROM  SEATTI^E. 

MILKS. 

Mary's  Island 655 

Metlakahtla 683 

lyoring 718 

Fort  Wrangell 808 

Juneau 960 

Bemer  Bay 1,015 

Dyea i  ,060 

FROM   SITKA. 

MILES. 

Killisnoo 70 

Juneau 160 


i 


[LRS. 

655 
683 
718 
808 
960 

1,015 
1,060 


r 


If  i 


M 


'  i1 


f|fe;i 


ti  I 


< 
« 
H 


en 

J, 

05 


•A 
en 

I 

'Ti 

•Jl 

*-* 

w 


c 
w 

M 
H 

n 
w 

v. 


w 


|iii: 


W^    .1 
Pnlipis 


iHiiiH! 


w 

CD 

y. 

« 
O 


ALASKA.  198 

MIIvBS. 

Hoona 120 

Dyea 193 

Yakutat 220 

Nutschk  (Prince  William  Sound,  direct) 450 

Kadiak 550 

Sunrise  City,  Cook  Inlet 785 

Karluk 610 

Sandpoint 880 

Unga 874 

Belkofsky 

Unalaska  (Dutch  Harbor) 1,150 


11  *!■ 

i 


m  ■Ml 


:   :^ 


J 
w 

o 

•A 

H 
M 
O 


FROM    UNALASKA. 

(Dutch  Harbor.) 


MILKS. 


Seal  Islands 240 

St.  Michael   850 


1 


i!!iS! 


[!!!!*=■ 


APPENDIX  F. 


NEWSPAPERS  PUBLISHED   IN  ALASKA. 


TAe  Alaskan,  published  at  Sitka,  weekly. 

North  Star,  published  at  Sitka,  monthly. 

Alaska  Mining  Record,  published  at  Juneau,  weekly. 

Alaska  Searchlight,  published  at  Juneau,  weekly. 

Alaska  Miner,  published  at  Juneau  weekly. 

Northern  Light,  published  at  Fort  W  rangell,  monthly. 


Ill; 


isi":r 


,  ( 


'IV 


194 


ALASKA. 


APPENDIX  G. 


LIST  OF  POST  OFFICES  IN  ALASKA  JANUARY 

I,  1898. 


Chilkat, 

Circle, 

*DOUGI<AS, 

Dyea, 

FORT  WRANGELL, 

Homer  (changed  from 

Seward), 
Jackson, 
*JUNEAU, 
Karluk, 
Ketchikan, 
Killisnoo, 
Klawock, 
KODIAK, 


lyoring, 

Mary  Island, 

Metlakahtla, 

Orca, 

Ounalaska, 

Saint  Michaels, 

Sandpoint, 

Saxman, 

Shakan, 

SITKA, 

Skagway, 

Sumdum, 

Tyoonok, 

Unga. 


Note.  —Money-order  offices  in  capital  letters. 
^International  as  well  as  domestic  money-order  offices. 


APPENDIX  H. 


SCHEDULE  OF  RATES,  PACIFIC  COAST  STEAM- 
SHIP COMPANY'S  STEAMERS. 


San  Francisco  to  Wrangell 

San  Francisco  to  Juneau 

San  Francisco  to  Sitka 

Puget  Sound  Ports  to  Wrangell 
Puget  Sound  Ports  to  Juneau.. 
Puget  Sound  Ports  to  Sitka..   . . 


Cabin 

Passaee, 

Single 

Fare. 

Steerage 
Fare. 

?37oo 

I19  00 

44.00 

23.00 

5200 

28.00 

25. CO 

-.3  00 

i'^.-.j 

17.00 

40   JO 

2',-    C>'" 

ALASKA. 


195 


f& 


$19  c» 
23.00 
28. CO 

V-,  00 

17    C30 

2'.-    <■■' 


to 
W 
H 
< 

H 

w 
o 

1-1 

w 

OS 

w 

D 
O 
(4 

CO 

<! 
< 

< 


to 

<J 
H 
H 
(0 

(0 

<: 
o 
tj 

o 

r*. 
>-t 
o 
< 


8.ii 

^ 

U  w 

O 
i» 

*^ 

E-i 


•saoQ 


■Bojjng 


^W 


S 


•sefnn  JO  sdsjoji^ 


■sei^ddng  Xjen 
asipaBqaaapj    |BJ9ae{) 


H 


■saiidclng  ^JBa 
-ipjQ  ,SJ9aipi  puB 
asipaBq3jai){'  |Bjaua{) 


u  a 


•SJJOQ 


•sojjng 


'89in]v  JO  sasjog 


s^r^-i 


rfed  o  *  H 


5^"ii 


•saod 


si 


si 


8 


8 


fel 


•sojjng 


•SajnT^  JO  S98JOQ 


oi 
«» 


•sai^ddns  -tJBu 

-ipjQ      ,8J8UIJ5      pUB 

a'sipuBqajapi   jBjanaf) 


«  S 


CO 


s 

S3 


8 


s 


a3 


8 


8 


8 

06 


8 

in 


88      88 


8 


s 


8 


8 


a 


8 

00 


a 
2 


:  cxia  cd  :  2  ®  g 
oa^-g     o-aS, 


o 


•c.-s  Mi^  §'§ 
men  PLi 


&5 

CO 

m  to 

S3 


a 


en  s 

a^ 


a  (o 

pQ  o 
o 

-I 

s 

CS.2 

•fin 

§-3 
o  a 

«  2 

Se 

S  S  otJ^ 
c.a  J  o.-S 

»  a  "+-+♦ 

.2  8 

n  ^ 


o 

t 
o 

"fci 

I 

(0 
O 

CO 

a 

s 
o 

a 


o 


K  4 


n 


tl 


!i!:i: 


lliu 


i^-rirrrr.'.t'sy.'aiiittcsfww'******'" 


I 


m 
m 

IHi 


.amiii iiiiiii||i|i|<|iiiiiiWiMiiittiiiann;-.i 


•.iiiswsBjiatmiwiiMiiiaiimiBim/HffliiiiiiH'i 


|-«!ri»!Iliffl5M:;Hi(BI,-|»«wi :-^-(..ilMfiiiii;i!r«|iilii(ija;|B«S(JKliliB(»f!iei(IS«klr!'i«mi,,,,,i,, 


!ilillinil!liililjt|j:i 


..?%,> 


MT 


»»»•  ....  ->.ii  M.ii'iwuw'  :;',<>s 


tHo. 


I    ■ 


V/^* 


/ 


/ 


-T 


■X. 


^^*»^ 


/ 


^v 


^--JL 


\ 


r 


/ 


^ 


k 


.^ 


.// 


/ 


CT) 


>3 


ct^"^ 


^ 


I 


7 


/ 


/ 


^ 


/ 


PUBU8HBD  BY  PBRMISSION.v 


/ 


X 


.^ 


'N-^ 


-v"x 


OAT 


"^ 


D 


U  S  COAST  AND  GEODETIC  8UHVEY 

ROUXE  MAP 
JUNEAU  TO  PORCUPINE  RIVER 

ALASKA 

,PU BUSHED  BY 

Hudson-Kimberly  Publishia?  Co. 

KANSAS  CITY.  MO. 


/ 


I 
't(7\\ 

\ 

'/ 

/ 

V 

i^ 

vx,/ 

'■-      1 

L 


^ 


''ifMMnfPPPiviiinnipnHilip 


II JMHWI-.  ipiHPPPipiIpp 


H'«?- 


•  •itmw^\li;«<)i^ji 


"il'IU 


iM 


Om'ANCB. 

vi*  cwikMt  ro*.', 

•unki  M  Dim     ..    ^.u. 
OjmMDtwMn    ..  ji,,J. 

vta  miiiii  n«R 

ia«nla  to  Wnagrii 

Wrai«<U  «•  TiliiiMp>  C<Mk     M»| 

jTil. Cr. ID HtaaiiTMto Lak*.  Vt  1 
l<ta<  •(  I'M.  Lak*  M  Onrw 

I      Via  8<.  MiekMli  a^yrtaa  IHmL^ 

^ao  rnacUca  to  DMall  Maitat. 

lllaaM*  to  Dsuk  Hattar ^.^|MI| 

Dauk  Haibor  id  ■*.  Wtkaafc MM 

{{I.  MMual*  M  MmM  arriitaB. . .  .*  ml 
••  ••  Hair  Ctaaa  M'     " 

"  ••  Nalala.   

••  «  Maalli  ar  Karakak  K.  SVl 

••  ••  MoMk  t» TaauM  B. .  Mtl 

••  <•  KaapaflOnr........  Twl 

«  -  ■hamaM  Vlllac*. 

••  M«Mk»(rM««pUMll  fMl 
t  •■  CInIa   ._  .. 

••  -  Party  MUa. ..   .IMSl 

Ml»| 


i 


~\' 


\ 


Kelaon  L 


SI*-"' 


fco< 


Okn^aanit/ 


oirraAU 


(^ . 


CajviiDanu 


iH 


.Vi 


^^,.-^, 


)'jH<lll 


Fr 


r/ 


LT/i 


.A^^ 


clu>li> 


.r 


f^ 


V- 


'^.\ 


i-A^t'Au\:'\\hM\U-  . 


■■;ft;ji(f|,-iij,flW»fn:f-|(fi!|fijt|i: 


TREASURY  DEPARTMENT 

U.S.  COAST  AND  GEODETIC  SURVEY 

YUKON  RIVER 

ALASKA 

PUELISIIED  BY 

Hudson-Kimberly  Publishinq 

KANSAS  CITY.  MO. 


I-'..'" 


v-,1 


.JBRHBl 


mmmmm 


"lll»F'!l'i!!U!«ll|fl|im Jj 


milimmm 


* 

i 


ii 


f 


13«- 


-^:- 


12  V 


^  122\^ 


s?«-' 


\ 


\ 


\ 


v-- 


N^^^fe.  \ 


PUBLISHED  BY 
UNITED  STATES  COAST  A] 

GENERAL  ( 

ALAJ 

Compiled  from  United  States 
PUBLISH 

Hudson -Kimberly 

Kansas  City, 


M'"* 


I^^^^s 


PUBLISHED  BY  PERMISSION 

FATES  COAST  AND  GEODETIC  SURVEY. 

TERAL  CHART  OF 

iVJLyViblvA 

from  United  States  and  Russian  Authorities. 
PUBLISHED  BY 

■Kimberly  Publishing  Co. 

Kansas  City,  Missouri. 


m 


■o«»1 


|0 


3) 


fKr 


\ 


I 


^^ 


\ 


\      J 


"O^' 
«*^. 


l1*» 


M    I 


C"** 


C\»»»' 


L..^ 


^^ 


^*<_. 


...^-* 


C.I 


L 


^'j( 


s»- 


W»- 


A^fr'w 


T"  'J    / 


^»»*'§«'^''      .^>' 


X 


L^.^ 


c* 


^        J 


s    . 


frl§r** 


\ 


\ 


\ 


1 


s-^ 


*' 


/^/i 


9'i. 


^  *';;;.— 


.^-f/ 


^i\i 


,|.H 


AaV   # 


''V. 


X 


"//, 


'''//(mlina*^^'' 


Ihan 


Vii#»i(i€»r  >v 


.»a^^ 


\" 


V**" 


ft«7     ^.  HI 


na 


J  •»«« 

B:  .1    My 


Ul"(J^ 


«-.,...«*- 


M 


CI    ^'' 


7:1  417 


Hr^! 


81    J,        «ii'''W.'»> 


"(/'•J 


1075 


325.;i».tf 


aBfcj.  iin  w^   j 


'    ")  Ma\tun.\j^    lli_  nil    *•  , .   3»     » 


^-^o.-JR-i*-^"- 


\ 


^V-^" 


\  — -Ot. 


